-NRLF w: ^ ^B 257 ObM if .B fv *; !i' Digitized by the Internet Archive in 2007 with funding from IVIicrosoft Corporation http://www.archive.org/details/beginnersfrenchOOfranrich BEGINNERS' FREKFCH BY VICTOR E. FRANgOIS, Ph.D. OFFICIER D'ACADEMIE ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR OF FRENCH IN THE COLLEGE OF THE CITY OF NEW YORK NEW YORK :. CINCINNATI •:• CHICAGO AMERICAN BOOK COMPANY Copyright, 1903, by Victor E. Francois Entered at Stationers' Hall, London FRANCOIS, BEGINNER'S FRENCH W. p. 22 To MY Dear Friend AND Former Colleague in the University of Michigan DR. ERNST MENSEL Professor of German in Smith College THIS VOLUME IS DEDICATED IN REMEMBRANCE OF THE MANY PLEASANT HOURS WE HAVE SPENT TOGETHER DISCUSSING BOOKS AND METHODS 68'7'902 TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGB Introduction 7 Pronunciation 13 Definite article. Plural of nouns .19 Definite article (continued). Translation of it when a subject . . 21 Negation. Formation of questions. Present indicative of etre . 23 Agreement, feminine and plural of adjectives. Formation of ques- tions (continued) .26 Comparatives and superlatives. Possessive and demonstrative adjectives 30 Of or from the. Irregular plurals 35 Reading Lesson. Sorite 39 Indefinite article. Some or any. Present indicative of avoir . . 39 Cardinal and ordinal numbers 44 Reading Lesson. Divisions du temps ...... 49 Present indicative of the first conjugation 50 To or at the. Imperfect indicative of the first conjugation . . 55 Reading Lesson. Impossible ii'est pas franfais ..... 5^ Present indicative of the second conjugation . . . . -5^ Imperfect indicative of the second conjugation. Formation of adverbs 62 Reading Lesson. Du pareil au mime 66 Present and imperfect indicative of the third conjugation . . 67 Some or any (continued). Verbs ending in -ger and -cer ... 70 Reading Lesson. Un Calembour . . . . . • '75 Some or any (continued). Irregular feminine of adjectives. Present and imperfect indicative of recevoir 75 Place of adjectives. Agreement of adjectives qualifying two or more nouns . 8° Reading Lesson. Trois excellents Medecins 88 Peculiarities of some verbs of the first conjugation • • • 93 Future and conditional of regular verbs. Impersonal verb . . 97 Demonstrative pronouns 108 Interrogative adjectives; interrogative and relative pronouns. Com- pound tenses • • • • .112 Possessive pronouns. Agreement of past participles . . .118 Reading Lesson. Une Meprise 121 Demonstrative and relative pronouns (continued). Compound tenses (continued) ^^i Indefinite adjectives and pronouns ^25 Preterit. Place of personal pronouns I3^ Place of personal pronouns (continued). Formation of tenses. Cueillir 1 37 Reading Lesson. Une joyeuse Harangue Mi S O TAHLK OF CONTKNTS PACK Imperative. Place of personal pronouns (continued). Envoyer . 142 Passive voice. Couvrir^faire, pleuvoir . . . . , .146 Disjunctive pronouns. Hair^ partir,falloi> 152 Time of the day. Aller, mettre 156 Voir 160 Reading Lesson. La petite ATendiantt 163 Prendre 165 Active voice instead of passive. Plaire .168 Simple tenses of the reflexive voice. Sortir 172 Compound tenses of the reflexive voice. Venir, sentir, s'asseoir . 178 Reading Lesson. Enignies .183 Plural of compound nouns. Resoudre^ dire, valoir . . . .184 Prepositions before the infinitive. Craindre 189 Imperative of the reflexive voice. Tenir, boire, pouvoir . . . 194 Ouvrir, lire ............ 198 Reading Lesson. La petite Hirondelle ...... 201 Atteindre, introditire . . . . . . . . . 203 Dormir, eteindre, poun>oir ......... 207 Reading Lesson. Une Suppression spirituelle. Repartie royaU . 211 Reciprocal verbs . . .212 Reading Lesson. Acrosticke .216 Place of adverbs. Senir, vetir .216 Reading Lesson. La Tombe et la Rose . . . . . .221 Rules of the subjunctive mood. £crire, votiloir . . . .222 Use of fie. Mourir, rire, vivre 228 Reading Lesson. Un Courtisan pris au pies^e 232 Instruire, paraitre, (aire, decouvrir, conveuir . . . . . 233 Imperfect of the subjunctive. Sequence of tenses. Acquerir, croire, savoir, cofinaitre . . . . . . . . . • ^Z7 Reading Lesson. Bons Mots de Diof;ene. L"* Animal le plus nuisible. Reponse de Socrate 243 Poems Le Colimafon, by Arnault .... La Feuille dessechee, by Arnault . Le Petit Pierre, by Boucher de Perthes Beau Soir, by Paul Bourget Etoiles Filantes, by Fran9ois Coppee . Con sells a un Enfant, by Victor Hugo Partant pour la Syrie, by La Reine Hortense Trois Fils d'Or, by Leconte de Lisle . Chanson de Barberine, by Alfred de Musset Full conjugation of avoir and etre Table of endings of regular verbs Alphabetical table of irregular verbs Vocabulary, i. French-English 2. English-French 244 24S 245 246 247 247 2^8 249 250 254 • 255 256-2 ::9 . 261 o 28^ 25 INTRODUCTION The old method of teaching modern languages was train- ing only the eye. The new methods aim to train the ear, the tongue and the eye. The author has tried to bring together a set of exercises giving to each of these organs a fair field of activity. Up-to-date teachers are anxious to use French in their classes as soon as possible, but very few elementary books, if any, help them to carry out their cherished ambition. It is the aim of the present volume to enable such masters, however inexperienced they may be, to make use of the con- versational method from the very start. A glance through the book will suffice to understand its arrangement. It is simple and methodical. Rules. — The book contains all grammar rules that first and second-year high school students or first-year college students are expected to be familiar with. Every lesson begins with a few general rules, the examples coming first for obvious reasons. It was decided to write the rules in English for the convenience of the learner. However, as early as possible and especially when reviewing, the teacher is advised to translate them into easy French and to require his pupils to recite them in the same form. May it also be suggested here that teachers of languages should make a more general use of the Socratic or in- ductive method ? Instead of giving detailed grammatical ex- planations to which nobody listens, let the teacher write on 7 8 beginner's FRENCH the board a few well chosen examples, underlining words or parts of words illustrating the rule to be worked out, and let him have the students themselves find it out as if it were the solution of a problem. It is an easy matter if the teacher prompts them by well directed questions. Such a fine opportunity should not be missed. First, this method accustoms the pupils to think, to argue logically and to express themselves intelligibly in their mother's tongue, results which are the first we should aim at even in the teaching of foreign languages. Secondly, it makes interesting and attractive a subject which is otherwise dull and repulsive, for it never fails to create a lively spirit of emulation in the class room, which is most beneficial. Thirdly, the student remembers better and for a longer time a rule which he himself has found out or helped to work out. The arguing about the rules should be done in French as soon as the progress of the class allows it. Vocabulary. — Common words, words of every-day life, were especially sought after, and the stock is increased very slowly. The words are given in the following order in the special vocabularies : masculine nouns, feminine nouns, adjectives, pronouns, verbal forms, adverbs, prepositions, conjunctions and interjections. There is a general vocabu- lary at the end of the book. French Texts. — This part is the pivot of the lesson. It generally consists of four, five, or six easy sentences, plainly illustrating the preceding rules. A great effort has been made to have sentences connected in meaning. The task was very hard at the beginning. There are no irregular verbs except avoir and etre in the first twenty-five exercises. The place of personal pronouns, except en, could not be ex- plained earlier than in the twenty-fifth lesson, because nouns were needed for the application of the rules. From that exercise on, the use of personal pronouns as objects should BEGINNERS FRENCH 9 be required in the answers as often as possible. In all the texts the linking mark has been used, following the set of rules of Dr. Paul Passy (see Linking of Words, p. 17). The French Text, as well as the Vocabulary, should be read aloud carefully several times by the teacher on the day he assigns the lesson. As many students as possible should repeat it after him. It should be studied hy heart and every sentence pronounced aloud again and again. Transposition. — It offers the learner who understands the rules and knows the French text by heart, a golden opportunity to display his progress in pronunciation and to master promptly and intelligently the various verbal forms and constructions. The books being closed, the teacher reads a sentence of the French text at a time and then asks a particular pupil to repeat it after him with the required changes. Care should be taken not to name that particular pupil before reading the sentence to be changed. Keep the class on the qui vive. A very profitable way to relieve the monotony in this part of the work is to ask a student to read the sentences to the class, the teacher having only to point out those who must repeat them. The preparation of the transposition work has been made easy by examples given after every direction. It goes with- out saying that the class is not expected to prepare all the changes which are indicated. The teacher should use his own judgment. The work to be assigned depends on the age and ability of the members of the class, the length of the recitation and the time the students are supposed to devote outside to this special study. Questions. — When the class uses a book not especially prepared for conversational work, lazy or indifferent pupils may answer : " I do not understand you. I cannot answer." In such cases the teacher is generally helpless. No such excuse is possible with this system. Every question has its lO BEGINNERS FRENCH answer in the preceding French text, and the answer to the first question of every set is given. So, all the pupil has to do is to imitate the example. At first glance the reader may think that these numerous questions, calling for almost identical answers, would be- come tiresome and monotonous. It might be so in a very small private class but not in a large section. Teachers and students know how hard it is for an English-speaking person to form correct questions in French. Yet this important side of the work is sacrificed in almost every text book. After years of study, students are able to answer questions, but cannot ask any in a correct way. From the very beginning, when two or three minutes can be spared, select one of the French texts which has already been studied, ask a student to stand up and form questions based on it. Call upon other members of the class to answer them fully. This is a very good way of reviewing. The students are obliged to do their best in pronouncing to make themselves understood, and it gives them confidence in themselves. Grammar Drill. — This part of the work affords the learner a chance to apply the rules he has just mastered, and, if it is written in English, to make a fruitful comparison of both languages. Translation. — Teachers could save themselves a great deal of trouble if they would follow the plan the author pre- sented in a letter published last year in " Modern Language Notes" (see June, 1902). At the beginning, instead of giving out for the next recita- tion the Grammar Drill and the Translation of the lesson he has just explained, let the teacher be satisfied with the French part of the exercise until he reaches, say, the tenth or twelfth lesson. Then, on the day he assigns the eleventh lesson, for instance, let him give out, as reviewing work. BEGINNERS FRENCH II the Grammar Drill and the Translation of the first lesson. It is simply a shifting of the usual work, care being taken that the students be always ten or twelve French exercises ahead. What will be the results? First, it will lighten the work of the first two weeks and allow more time to be devoted to pronunciation. Then, in the first ten exercises, the pupil has seen the rules of the first lesson applied so many times, he has become so familiar with them and the words of that lesson, that he will consider as very easy and enjoyable a task which would have seemed to him hard and disagreeable if he had been asked to do it on the day the first lesson was explained. He will, of course, make very few mistakes, his confidence will increase daily, the stand- ard of the class will be raised and a great deal of time saved. Reading Lessons. — They have been added to bring variety and to play the part of a preparatory reader. The words will be found in the general vocabulary. Another way to use the book is to set aside for review work the Transposition and Questions and go ahead with the rest of the exercises. This plan could be followed by teachers who are anxious to begin reading very early. With that aim in mind, two lessons may be assigned at a time in most cases. New Rules. — References to the set of licenses (tole- rances) adopted by the Minister of Public Instruction of France in his decree of February 26, 1901, will be found at the proper place in the rules or in notes at the bottom of the pages. Verbs. — Tables of regular and irregular verbs will be found at the end of the book, before the vocabulary. PRONUNCIATION Graphic Signs Accents. — e, e, a, u, a, e, i, 6, ii. There are three accents in French : the acute ( ' ) , the grave (") and the circumflex ("). The acute is found only over the vowel e (e). The grave is especially used over the vowel e (e), sometimes also over a or u. The circumflex may be used over any vowel. Apostrophe. — 1', s', m'. The apostrophe (') indicates that a final vowel has been elided before a word beginning with a vowel or an h mute. That vowel is generally e; it may also be a of la (article or personal pronoun) and i of si before il and ils. Hyphen. — Asseyez-vous. A-t-il ? The decree of February 26, 1901, promulgated by the Minister of Public Instruction of France, does away with the hyphen. However, it was kept after an imperative fol- lowed by a personal pronoun object and in questions where the so-called euphonic t is inserted between the verb and il, elle, or on. * It goes without saying that no foreigner can master the French pro- nunciation from rules without outside help. The few general rules given here are to be used by pupils as mere references. 13 14 BEGINNERS FRENCH Cedilla. — Fa§ade, fagon, degu. The cedilla is put under c preceding a, o or u to indicate that it is soft and should be pronounced like s in sin. Diaeresis. — Naif, Esali. It is placed over the last of two vowels to show that it forms a svllable bv itself. Simple Vowels Examples. la, va, ma, ta, sa, papa, baba. tas, pas, fable, ine, ame, flamme. le, ce, me, te, se, je, ne, te. elle, acte, dame, table, fable. 6t6, h\6, priiiri, nez, et, pied, les, des, d^, ces, mes, tes, acc^, sel, chef, fer, fete, bete, tete, etre. Value. a short = a long rr Approximate corresponding sounds in English. intermediate sound bfetween a in lad and a in father. a in father. e short =: « in b«t. e almost silent = ^ in sol^. 6, e, e, e fol- The quality of that sound is lowed by a the same as that of e in consonant. th^re, ranging from a in s^le to e in s^ll. midi, fini, mardi i short = / in mach/ne but shorter. gite, abime, lie, amie. ilong = / in mach/ne. comme, col, colonne, mode. short = in c^rn, shortened. nos, vos, dos, cote. long = o in no. du, vu, bra, rae, debut. ray^, pays, paysage. No similar sound in English ; := German «. Pronounce the examples with the lips in position for whistling. see 1 short above. The first / belongs to the preceding syllable and the second to the following : BEGINNERS FRENCH Compound Vowels Examples. Value. balai, laquais, aimais, ai (see e and e above) aimerais, lait, fait, ai- **' mai, aimerai. au, aux, travaux, eau, bean, veau. reine, peine, veine. deiix, ceux, feu, peu, veux, aveu, bleu, peur, leur, fleur, valeur, sceur, coBUr. toi, moi, voix, bois. 15 Approximate corresponding sounds in English. au eau (see o long above) ei (see e above) eu long and close e in f^rn (= German o). eu OBU short and open = e in iexn but more open than for eu long, intermediate between iva of wax and wa of wa%. 00 in \ioo\.. 01 = ou, tout, nous, vous, chou, ou = cou. ' Nasal Sounds A vowel followed by n or m ending a word or a syllable is nasal unless the n or m is in its turn followed by another n or m or h mute. Pronounce the following examples through the nose, with the mouth widely open, care being also taken to cut the sound short and not let the n be heard. an, tant, an chambre, rampe, iJm enfant, vent, en empire, membre; em vin, in imperial, ' im vain, ain faim, aim teint, ein tympan. ym bon, ton, on nom, ombre. om un, brun, un parfum, humble. um coiUj point, loin, soin. oin J^i !>^ = nasal a. < t \ I = -nasal i > = nasal \ = nasal •1 ■I = w 4- nasal Pronounce an in watt and follow above directions. Pronounce an in angry and follow above directions. Pronounce on in \on^ and follow above directions. Pronounce u of t«rn and follow above directions. /■ which see. ^ I. lis Siiment. £nf, ending of the 3d person plural of verbs, is always silent. — 2. Bi^«, ri« and forms of : e»tr, tenir and their compounds, en has the sound of nasal / which see. i6 BEGINNER S FRENCH The consonants same or almost the Examples. camp, car, col, cure. ceci, fafade, bicyclette. gare, golfe, gue,i aigu. geant, gite, gymnase. agneau, regner, mignon. hardi, haut, homme, bote. Consonants not given in the following list have the same sound as in English. Position. C before «, ^, u p before a, o, u C before e, i,y g before a, o, u g before e, i, y Approximate corresponding sounds in English. c in rorretrt. c in cell. g in ^o. s in pleasure. «/' in u«/on. f // is now silent.- Formerly in words of Germanic i origin, h was aspirate. Now, it merely indicates I that no elision can take place before it and that I the last consonant of the preceding word cannot (^be linked with the vowel following h. jour, jarabe, jeter. J = s in pleasure. fille, famine, aille. 11 preceded by i ,-3_ y in t'ou. fusil, gentil. il final* = y in jj'ou. qui, qualite, que. qu = k. rage, porta, parle. r — r is pronounced more strongly than in Eng- lish. parler, premier, off icier. er final ^ = / i.e. a in kte. baiser, poison, cousin, s between two oser. vowels = like s in pleaj-e. nation, partial, essen- . tiel, minutieux, pa- a ti+^ = // has often the hissing sound of s. tience. e theatre, the, thym. th = t. reflexion. X = usually ks. exercice, examen. ex initial and I fol- lowed by a vowel or h mute = egz soixante. X = ss. deuxieme. X = z. 1 The u after ^ is not sounded unless it is final. 2 Some persons slightly sound it, especially on the stage. 3 Double //, preceded by /, are sounded as a single / in a few words : v/7/e, m/V/e, tranqu///e and their compounds. * There are few exceptions : i/, exi/, vi/, civi/. ^ The r is pronounced in monosyllabic words and in a few other words hiver, hier, fier (proud). BEGINNERS FRENCH 1/ The consonants c, f, 1, r, when final, are generally sounded. The others, when final, are generally silent. See Vocabulary for exceptions. Linking of Words Lessen f ants. Ils^ont. If two words standing together are closely connected in meaning, the first one ending with a consonant, the second beginning with a vowel or h mute, they are pronounced as if they were forming a single word. This mark ^ will indicate in the texts the words to be linked. The following passage translated from " Les Sons du Fran^ais," par Paul Passy, Docteur es lettres, Maitre de con- ferences a rficole des Hautes fitudes (Paris, Firmin Didot), contains very sensible views. The linking of words varies a great deal according to the style and the people. In the literary language it occurs more frequently than in the familiar style. But it is especially schoolmasters and, still more, not very well educated people trying to ** speak well," who link at every opportunity. In the spoken language, only words closely connected by the meaning should be linked. Here are the principal cases : (a) Article followed by an adjective or a noun : lesj^hommes. les^autres personnes. {h) Adjective followed by a noun: le grand^ours, deux petits^enfants, mon^ami. {c) Numeral adjective followed by an adjective or a noun: deux^animaux. {d) Adverb followed by an adjective or an adverb : tres^utile, trop^idiot. 1 s and X, when linked, are pronounced like z. 2 When linked, d is sounded like /, c and g like k» l8 BEGINNER^S FRENCH (e) A personal pronoun (or en) followed by a verb : il^en- tend, noiis^arrivons, on^ecoute, j'en^ai. (/) Verb followed by a personal pronoun or by en: vas-y, prends-en, a-t^l. (g) Preposition followed by its object: sans^abri, en^ecou- tant. (h) The conjunction quand and the following word: Quand^il viendra. (j) The various forms of the verbs etre and avoir, especially used as auxiliaries, and.the following words : il^est^ici, il^etait^arrive, ils^ont^appris. Division of Words into Syllables 1 . Gou ver ne ment, in ca pa bi li te. A medial French syllable must begin, if possible, with a consonant. 2. hon neur, man ger. When two consonants stand together, they generally belong to different syllables. 3. ta ble, ar bre, a gneau, crai gnons. The division takes place before the two consonants if the second is 1 or r and before ^. (Apply Rule 2 if you have 11 or rr. ) 4. ex em plai re. X always belongs to the preceding syllable. Tonic Accent 1. gouverneur. Amerique. All syllables of a French word, except those ending in e mute, must be pronounced distinctly with a slight rais- ing of the voice (tonic accent) on the last sonorous one. 2. Le professeur est debout dans la salle, A statement being pronounced as if it were a long word, the tonic accent is transferred to its last sonorous syllable. FIRST LESSON Rules I. Le Hvre, the hook; la table, the table. 1 . The French language having no neuter gender, French nouns are either mascuHne or feminine. 2. The is translated by le before a masculine noun sin- gular and by la before a feminine noun singular. 2. Le livre, the hook ; les livres, the hooks. La table, the tahle; les tables, the tables. 1. The is translated by les before any plural noun. 2. The plural of French nouns is formed, as in English, by adding s to the singular. 3. Vocabulary le livre, the hook. le papier, the paper. le crayon, the pencil. la salle, the class room. la table, the table. la boite, the box. la poche, the pocket. Monsieur or M., sir, Mr. Madame or M"^^, Madam, Mrs. Mademoiselle or M}^^, Miss. dans, in. sur, on, upon. ou, where. est, is. sont, are (3rd person plural). 4. Text 1. La table est dans la salle. 2. Le livre est sur la table. 3. Le papier est dans la boite, 4. Le crayon est dans la poche. 20 BEGINNER S FRENCH 5. Transposition Replace the singular by the plural. Ex. : I. Les tables sont dans les salles. 6. Questions 1. Ou est la table? Answer: Monsieur/ la table est dans la salle. 2. Oti est le livre? 3. Ou est le papier? 4. Ou est le crayon? 5. Ou sont les tables? A.: Monsieur, les tables sont dans les salles. , ^ ^ 6. Ou sont les livres? 7. Ou sont les papiers? 8. Oti sont les crayons? 7. Grammar Drill The paper, the papers ; the pocket, the pockets ; the book, the books ; the class room, the class rooms ; the box, the boxes; the pencil, the pencils; the table, the tables. 8. Translation I. The pencil is in the box. 2. The papers are in the pocket. 3. The box is on the table. 4. The books are in the class rooms. 5. Where is the paper? 6. Sir, the paper is on the table. 7. Where is the book? 8. Madam, the book is in the pocket. 9. Where are the pencils? 10. Sir, the pencils are in the boxes. * Or Madamgf Mademoiselle, as the case may be. BEGINNERS FRENCH 21 SECOND LESSON ^ Rules 9. L'eleve, the pupil; Tecole, the school; Thabitant, the inhabitant. The is translated by 1' before any singular noun, begin- ning with a vowel or an h mute. 10. Ou est I'encrier? II est sur la table. Where is the inkstand? It is on the table. Ou est la table ? EUe est dans la salle. Where is the table? It is in the class room. It, when a subject, is translated by il when it stands for a masculine noun and by elle when it stands for a feminine noun. 1 1 . Ou sont les livres ? lis sont sur la table. Where are the books? They are on the table. Ou sont les plumes? EUes sont dans la boite. Where are the pens? They are in the box. They, standing for a noun which is masculine in French, is translated by ils; standing for one which is feminine, it is translated by elles. 12. Vocabulary le banc, the bench. I'encrier (m.), the inkstand. l'eleve (m. and f.), the pupil. la plume, the pen. I'ecole (f.), the school. il est, he is or it is. elle est, she is or it is. ils sont, they are. elles sont, they are. 13. Text 1. Les plumes sont dans les^encriers. 2. Les^encriers sont sur les tables. 3. Les^eleves sont sur les bancs. 4. Les salles sont dans les^ecoles. 22 beginner's FRENCH) 14. Transposition Replace the plural by the singular. Ex.: I. La plume est dans Tencrier. 15. Questions 1. Ou sont les plumes? A.: Monsieur, elles sont dans les encriers. 2. Ou sont les encriers? A.: M., ils sont. . . 3. Ou sont les eleves ? 4. Ou sont les bancs? 5. Ou sont les salles? 6. Ou est la plume? A.: M., elle est dans I'encrier. 7. Ou est I'encrier? A.: M., il est. . . 8. Ou est I'eleve? 9. Ou est le banc? 10. Ou est la salle? 16. Grammar Drill Replace the dashes by the proper form of the definite article. 1. — ecole, — ecoles ; — plume, — plumes; — table, — tables ; — eleve, — eleves ; — livre, — livres. 2. — encriers, — encrier ; — poches, — poche ; — bancs, — banc ; — crayons, — crayon ; — salles, — salle. 17. Translation^ I. Where is the pen? 2. It is in the box. 3. Where is the inkstand? 4. It is on the paper. 5. Where is the pen- cil ? 6. It is on the bench. 7. Where is the table ? 8. It is in the class room. 9. Where is the class room? 10. It is ^ The student should be requested to supply Monsieur, Madame, or Mademoiselle before every answer through the whole book. BEGINNER S FRENCH 23 in the school. 11. Where are the papers? 12. They are in the pocket. 13. Where are the boxes ? 14. They are on the tables. 15. Where is the pupil? 16. He is in the school. 17. Where are the pupils? 18. They are on the bench. THIRD LESSON Rules 18. lis ne sont pas sur la table. They are not on the table. II n'est pas sur la table. It is not on the table. Not is translated by ne . . . pas. The verb is placed between ne and pas. Ne becomes n' when the verb begins with a vowel or an h mute. 19. Est il dans la salle? Is he (is it) in the class room? When the subject of an interrogative sentence is a per- sonal pronoun, it is placed after the verb, as in English. 20. Ou est le maitre? Where is the master? When a question contains only an interrogative word izvhere, how, when, etc.), the subject (a noun or pronoun) and the verb, the subject may follow the verb. (For another construction, see 31.) 21. Present of the indicative of 6tre {to be). INTERROGATIVE suis je? am I? es tu? estjl ? est elle? sommes nous? etes vous? sont^ils? sont elles? AFFIRMATIVE je suis, / am tu^ es, you are il est, he is elle est, she is nous sommes, zve are vous etes, you are ils sont, they are elles sont, they are NEGATIVE je ne suis pas, / am not. tu n'es pas il n'est pas elle n'est pas nous ne sommes pas vous n'etes pas ils ne sont pas elles ne sont pas ^ Tu, jyou, is used only in speaking to relatives and intimate friends. In the English exercises, you marked with an asterisk is to be translated by /«. 24 beginner's FRENCH 22. Vocabulary le pare, the park. le maitre, the master, the teacher, la maitresse, the mistress. rantichambre, the anteroom. la chaise, the cliair, ou, or. oui, yes. non, no. qui? who? 23. Text 1. Je suis le maitre.^ 2. Vous^etes les^eleves. 3. Je suis sur la chaise. 4. Vous^etes sur les bancs. 5. Je ne suis pas dans I'antichambre, je suis dans la salle. 6. Vous n etes pas dans le pare, vous^etes dans lecole. 24. Transposition 1. Replace the singular by the plural (except le pare and Tecole in sentence 6) and vice versa. Ex.: i. Nous sommes les . . . 2. Replace the first person by the second and vice versa. Ex.: I. Vous etes le. . . 3. Replace the affirmative form by the negative and vice versa. Ex. : i. Je ne suis pas le. . . 25. Questions 1. Suis je le maitre? A.: Oui. monsieur, vous etes le maitre. 2. fites vous les eleves? A.: Oui, M., nous sommes. . . 3. Suis je sur la chaise? J Or la maitresse, as the case may be. BEGINNER S FRENCH ^5 4. £tes vous sur les bancs? 5. Suis je dans Tantichambre ou dans la salle? 6. £tes vous dans le pare ou dans I'ecole? 7. Qui est le maitre?" A.: Monsieur, vous etes le maitre. 8. Qui sont les eleves? A.: M., nous sommes. . . 9. Qui est sur la chaise? 10. Qui est sur le banc? 11. (a) Qui n'est pas dans rantichambre ? (b) Qui est dans la salle? 12. (a) Qui n'est pas dans le pare? (b) Qui est dans I'ecole? (Negative answers followed by affirmative.) 13. £tes vous le maitre? A.: Non, M., je ne suis pas le maitre, je suis I'eleve. 14. Suis je I'eleve? 15. £tes vous sur la chaise? 16. Suis je sur le banc? 17. Suis je dans I'antichambre ? 18. £tes vous dans le pare? 26. Grammar Drill 1. The chairs, the chair; the parks, the park; the class rooms, the class room ; the pupils, the pupil. 2. The masters, the master ; the anterooms, the anteroom ; the benches, the bench ; the schools, the school ; the mistresses, the mistress. 3. He is, she is, I am, they (m.) are. 4. We are, you* are, they (f.) are, you are. 5. Is he? are they (m.) ? are you? 6. Are you*? is she? are we? are they (f.) ? 7. You are not, she is not, they (m.) are not, we are not. 26 BEGINNERS FRENCH 27. Translation I. Who is the teaclier? 2. I am the pupil. 3. You are the teacher. 4. Who is in the anteroom? 5. You are not in the anteroom. 6. Where am I? 7. You are on the chair, in the class room. 8. Where are we? 9. You are on the bench, in the school. 10. Where are the pupils? 11. They are not in the class rooms. 12. They are in the anterooms. 13. Where is the master ? 14. Is he in the school? 15. No, he is not in the school. 16. He is in the park. FOURTH LESSON Rules 28. Le pare est grand. The park is large. Les pares sont grands. The parks are large. La ville est grande. The city is large. Les villes sont grandes. The cities are large. French adjectives agree in gender and number with the noun which they qualify. 29. Le pare est grand. The park is large. La ville est grande. The city is large. The feminine of a French adjective is formed by adding e to the masculine singular. Exceptions : i. Le mur est jaune. The wall is yellow. La porte est jaune. The door is yellow. Adjectives ending in -e in the masculine singular are alike in both genders. 2. Quel pare? What park? Quelle couleur? What color? The feminine of adjectives ending in -el in the mascu- line singular is formed by doubling the final 1 before add- ing e. BEGINNER S FRENCH V 30. Les pares sont grands. The parks are large. Les villes sont grandes. The cities are large. The plural of a French adjective is formed by adding s to the singular. (Cf. 2. 2.) Exception. Le mur est gris. The zvall is gray. Les murs sont gris. The walls are gray. Masculine adjectives ending in -s in the singular remain unchanged in the plural. 31. Le pare est il grand ? Is the park large f La ville est elle grande ? Is the city large f Oil le pare est il ? Where is the park f When the subject of an interrogative sentence is a noun or any other pronoun but a personal pronoun, it precedes the verb in French and is also repeated after it in the form of a corresponding personal pronoun. (See 20.) 32. Vocabulary le mur, the wall. I'habitant (m,), the inhabitant. la ville, the city. I'a venue (f.), the avenue. la rue, the street. la maison, the house. la porte, the door. la couleur, the color. grand, m. s. grands, m. pl. grande, f. s. grandes, f. pl. joli large, tall. jolis jolie jolies etroit etroits etroite etroites pretty. y narrow. gai gais gaie gaies quel quels quelle quelles large larges large larges triste tristes triste tristes jaune jaunes jaune jaunes cheerful, merry. what? (interrogative adjective). wide. sad, gloomy. vcllow. 28 BEGINNER S FRENCH assis assis assise assises gris gris grise grises seated. gray. qu'est ce qui? what^ Tsubject) comment, how, tres, very. et, and. mais, but. de, of. 33. Text 1. Nous sommes^assis dans le pare. 2. La ville est grande et le pare est joH. 3. L'avenue est tres large et la rue est tres^ etroite. 4. Les maisons sont tristes, mais les^habitants sont gais. 5. Les murs sont gris et les portes sont jaunes. 34. Transposition 1. Replace the singular by the plural (except le pare in sentence i ) and vice versa. Ex. : I . Je suis assis dans le pare. 2. Les villes ... 2. Use the negative form. Ex. : I . Nous ne sommes pas assis dans . . . 3. Use the interrogative form. Ex. : I . Sommes nous assis dans . . . ? 2. La ville est elle grande et le pare . . . ? 35. Questions 1. Qui est assis dans le pare? A.: M., nous sommes assis . . . 2. (a) Qu'est ce qui^ est grand? A.: M., la ville est. . . (b) Qu'est ce qui est joli? ^ Qu^est ce qui is masculine. 29 3- (^) Q^i'est ce qui est tres large? (b) Qu'est ce qui est tres etroit? 4. (j) Qu'est ce qui est triste? A.: M., les maisons sont . . . (b) Qui est gai? 5. (a) Qu'est ce qui est gris? (b) Qu'est ce qui est jaune? 6. Oil etes vous assis ? ^.; M., nous sommes. . . 7. (a) Comment la ville est elle? A.: M., elle est. . . (b) Comment le pare est il? • 8. (a) Comment I'avenue est elle? (b) Comment la rue est elle? 9. (a) Comment les maisons sont elles? (b) Comment les habitants sont ils? 10. (a) De quelle couleur les murs sont ils? (b) De quelle couleur les portes sont elles? 36. Grammar Drill Write : (a) The feminine singular of the following adjectives: joli, gai, quel, assis, triste. (b) The masculine plural of:, jaune, grand, gris, etroit, large. (c) The feminine plural of: triste, gris, large, grand, assis, jaune, gai, etroit, joli, quel. Conjugate the present indicative of : (o) etre gai in the affirmative form. Ex.: Je suis gai or gaie.^ (b) etre triste in the interrogative form. Ex.: Suis je triste ? (c) etre assis in the negative form. Ex. : Je ne suis pas assis or assise.^ i According as the pupil is a boy or a girl. 30 BEGINNER S FRENCH 37. Translation I. We are in the school. 2. It is very large. 3. Who is seated ? 4. The pupils are seated on the benches. 5. They are very sad. 6. The mistress is not in the class room. 7. Where is she? 8. She is seated on the chair in the ante- room. 9. The anteroom is gloomy but the class rooms are pretty. 10. Where are we? 11. You are in the park. ■12. It is narrow. 13. The avenues are not very pretty. 14. Are the streets cheerful? 15. No, they are not cheerful. 16. They are narrow and very gloomy. 17. How is the in- habitant? 18. Is he cheerful or gloomy ? 19. He is gloomy. 20. Is the house narrow? 21. No, it is not narrow, it is wide. 22. Are the walls wide? 23. No, they are not wide, they are very narrow. FIFTH LESSON Rules 38. La salle est plus grande que (moins grande que, aussi grande que) I'antichambre. The class room is larger than (less large than, a^ large as) the anteroom. The comparative of a French adjective is formed by put- ting pins (comparative of superiority), moins (comparative of inferiority), anssi (comparative of equality) before it. Exception : Le maitre est bon. The master is good. La maitresse est bonne. The mistress is good. Le maitre est meillenr que la maitresse. The master is better than the mistress. The comparative of bon is meillenr. Note. The feminine of bon is irregular : bonne. BEGINNERS FRENCH 3 1 39. La plus grande salle. The larger or the largest class room. Le plus petit eleve. The smaller or tlie smallest pupil. Les meilleures ecoles. The better or the best schools, 1. To form the superlative of a French adjective, put the definite article le, la, les before the comparative. 2. The French have only one form to express the larger, the largest. 40. Possessive adjectives. SINGULAR PLURAL Masculine Feminine Both Genders my mon ma mes your ton ta tes his, her, its son sa ses our notre nos your votre vos their leur leurs Notes, i. Son livre. His, her, its book. Sa plume. His, her, its pen. Son and sa agree in number and gender with the fol- lowing noun, not with the possessor as in English. 2. Mon ecole. My school. Ton antichambre. Your anteroom. Son amie. His, her, its friend {fern.). Mon, ton, son replace ma, ta, sa before any feminine ad- jective or noun beginning with a vowel or an 11 mute. 41. Demonstrative adjectives. Ce livre. This or that book. Cet encrier. This or that inkstand. Cette table. This or that table. 32 BEGINNER S FRENCH Cette ecole. This or that school. Ces livres. These or those books. Ces tables. These or those tables. Masculine Feminine Before a consonant. Before a vowel or an A mute. this or / these or hat ce cat cette those ces 42. Vocabulary le frere, the brother. bon le monsieur, the gentleman. bons les messieurs, the gentlemen. bonne ^ «"'"'• bonnes le cousin, ^/t^ cousin. I'enfant (m. or f.), the child. la soeur, the sister. meilleur • la dame, the lady. meilleurs . better. I'amie, the friend (fern.). meilleure I'actrice, the actress. meilleures petit plus. . .que, more. ..than. petits little. moins...que, less... than. petite small aussi.. .que, as... as. petitea si . . . que, so . . .as. 43. Text 1. Son frere est plus grand que ce monsieur. 2. Sa sceur est plus petite que cette dame. 3. Son cousin est meilleur que ceCenfant. 4. Son^amie est moins jolie que cette actrice 44. Transposition I. Replace son and sa by the other possessive adjectives. Ex.: I. Son (mon, ton, notre, votre, leur) frere est plus grand que ce monsieur. BEGINNER S FRENCH 33 2. Use the plural everywhere and replace ses by the other possessive adjectives. Ex.: I. Ses (mes, tes, nos, vos, leurs) freres sont plus grands que ces messieurs. 3. Use the interrogative form. Ex. : I . Son f rere est il plus grand que ce monsieur ? 45. Questions 1. Qui est plus grand que ce monsieur ? ^.: M., son f rere est plus grand que ce monsieur. 2. Qui est plus petite que cette dame? 3. Qui est meilleur que cet enfant? 4. Qui est moins jolie que cette actrice? Use mon instead of son in the answers. 5. Qui est le plus grand, votre frere ou ce monsieur? A.: M.* mon frere est le plus grand. 6. Qui est la plus petite, cette dame ou votre soeur? 7. Qui est le meilleur, votre cousin ou cet enfant? 8. Qui est la moins jolie, cette actrice ou votre amie? Negative answers with si (so) and use leur instead of son. 9. Ce monsieur est il aussi grand que leur frere? A.: Non, M., il n'est pas si grand que leur frere. 10. Cette dame est elle aussi petite que leur soeur? 11. Cet enfant est il aussi bon que leur cousin? 12. Leur amie est elle aussi joHe que cette actrice? 46. Grammar Drill I. Write in French the masculine and feminine forms singular and plural of the following adjectives, compara- tives and superlatives : (a) cheerful, more cheerful, the more cheerful, the most cheerful. 34 BEGINNERS FRENCH (b) small, smaller, the smaller, the smallest. (c) pretty, prettier, the prettier, the prettiest. (d) gloomy, more gloomy, the more gloomy, the most gloomy. (e) good, better, the better, the best. 2. My (your*, his, her, its, our, your, their) pencil; my (our, his, your*, her, your, its, their) pencils. 3. My (their, her, your, his, our, your*, its) pen ; my (your, his, their, its, your*, our) pens. 4. My (his, our, their, its, your*, her, your) friend (fern.) ; my (vour, his, our, her, your*, its, their) friends (fem.). 5. This book, these books : that pupil, those pupils ; this school, these schools; that table, these tables. 47. Translation I. Is that park large? 2. It is larger than your city. 3. Are those avenues narrow? 4. They are as narrow as our streets . 5. Is your school small ? 6. No, it is not small. 7. It is larger than this house. 8. How are the class rooms ? 9. They are not wide. 10. They are as narrow as my ante- room. II. Are these pupils good? 12. They are better than your brother. 13. Is their master cheerful? 14. No, he is sad. 15. His pupils are not good. 16. How are those actresses? 17. Are they pretty ? 18. They are very tall and very pretty. 19. They are taller than this gentleman and prettier than these ladies. 20. How is this child? 21. He is as sad as his sister. 22. Who is the prettier, my friend (fem.) or her sister? 23. Your friend (fem.) is the prettier. 24. Yes, but her sister is the taller and the merrier. BEGINNER S FRENCH 35 SIXTH LESSON Rules 48. (i) Du maitre, du heros ; (2) de la maitresse, de la harpe; (3) de I'eleve, de I'ecole, de I'habitant ; (4) des maitres, des heros, des maitresses, des harpes, des eleves, des ecoles, des habitants. Of the or from the master, the hero, the mistress, the harp, the pupil, the school, the in- habitant; of the or from the masters, the heroes, the mis- tresses, the harps, the pupils, the schools, the inhabitants. Of the or from the is translated by (i) du before a masculine noun singular beginning with a consonant or an h formerly aspirate; (2) de la before a feminine noun singular beginning with a consonant or an h formerly aspirate; (3) de 1' before any singular noun beginning with a vowel or an h mute ; (4) des before any plural noun. 49. Le fils, les fils. The son, the sons. Nouns ending in s, x, z are alike in both numbers. (Cf. exception to 30* ) 50. Le tableau, les tableaux. The blackboard, the black- boards. Le neveu, les neveux. The nephew, the nephews. Nouns ending in au and eu take x in the plural instead of s. 51 • L'amiral, les amiraux. The admiral, the admirals. Nouns ending in al replace 1 by ux in the plural. 52. Est ce que le maitre est dans la salle? Is the master ill the class room? Another way of forming a question is to put est ce que {is it [a fact] that?) before any statement. 36 BEGINNER S FRENCH 53- Le maitre n'est il pas dans la salle ? Is not the master in the class room? Si, M., il est dans la salle. Yes, sir, he is in the class room. Yes is translated by si when the question has a negative form. 54^ Present indicative of etre {to he). INTERROGATIVE NEGATIVE ne suis je pas? am I not? ne sommes nous pas? n'es tu pas ? n'est il pas? n'est elle pas? n'etes vous pas ? ne sont ils pas? ne sont elles pas? or est ce que je ne suis pas? est ce que tu n'es pas ? est ce qu'il n'est pas ? est ce qu'elle n'est pas ? est ce que nous ne sommes pas ? est ce que vous n'etes pas ? est ce qu'ils ne sont pas ? est ce qu'elles ne sont pas ? 55. Vocabulary rinstituteur, the sehoolmaster. le tableau, the blackboard. le bureau, the desk. le neveu, the nephew. le fils, the son. le marquis, the marquis. I'amiral, the admiral. le marechal, the horseshoer. I'edifice (m.), the building. le meuble, the piece of furniture. I'institutrice, the schoolmistress. 'the same. . .as. Tentree (f.), the entrance. la classe, the class room. le meme. . .que les memes. . .que la meme. . .que les memes. . .que-' debout (adverb), standing. en face de, opposite. loin de, far from. pres de, near. si, yes (see 53). 56. Text I. Lecole de la ville est^en face de I'entree du pare. BEGINNER S FRENCH 37 2. Le bureau de I'instituteur est loin de la porte de rantichambre. 3. Le neveu de lamiral est debout pres du tableau de la classe. 4. Le fils du marechal est sur le meme banc que le cousin du marquis. 57. Transposition 1. Replace the singular by the plural. Ex. : I . Les ecoles des villes sont en face des entrees des pares. 2. Use two interrogative forms. Ex.: I. (a) L'ecole de la ville est elle en face de. . . ? (b) Est ce que Tecole de la ville est en face de. . . ? 3. Use the negative form. Ex. : I. L'ecole de la ville n'est pas en face de. . . 58. Questions 1. Oil est l'ecole de la ville ? A. : M., elle est en face de. . . 2. Oil le bureau de Tinstituteur est il? 3. Oil le neveu de I'amiral est il assis? 4. Ou est le fils du marechal? 5. Quel edifice est en face de I'entree du pare? A.: M., l'ecole de la ville est en face de. . . 6. Quel meuble est loin de la porte de I'antichambre ? 7. Qui est assis pres du tableau de la classe? 8. Qui est sur le meme banc que le cousin du marquis? Answers with si (yes). 9. L'ecole de la ville n'est elle pas en face de I'entree du pare? A.: Si, M., elle est en face de I'entree du pare. ^S> Beginner's french 10. Est cc que le bureau de Tinstituteur n'est pas loin de la porte de rantichambrc ? 11. Le neveu de I'amiral ivest il pas assis pres du tableau de la classe ? 12. Est ce que le fils du marechal n'est pas sur le meme banc que le cousin du marquis? 59. Grammar Drill Replace the dashes by the plural form of the preceding word and the dots by the proper form : du, de la, de 1' or des. 1 . Le meuble, les — ; ... meuble, ... — ; la ville, les — ; ... ville, ... — ; I'amiral, les — ; ... amiral, ... — ; le tableau, les — ; ... tableau, ... — . Ex. : le meuble, les meubles, du meuble, des meubles. 2. Le fils, les — ; ... fils, ... — ; I'ecole, les — ; ... ecole, ... — ; le bureau, les -^ ; ... bureau, ... — ; I'edifice, les — ; ... edifice, ... — ; 3. Le marquis, les — ; ... marquis, ... — ; I'actrice, les — ; ... actrice, ... — ; le neveu, les — ; ... neveu, ... — . 4. La dame, les — ; ... dame, ... — ; le marechal, les — ; ... marechal, ... — ; I'enfant, les — ; ... enfant, ... — . 60. Translation I. Where are you seated? 2. We are seated on the benches of the same class room. 3. Where is your class room? 4. It is near the entrance of the school. 5. Is this schoolmaster standing or seated? 6. He is standing oppo- site the pupils. 7. Are the blackboards far from the door of the class room? 8. No, thev are near the desk of the BEGINNER S FRENCH 39 schoolmaster. 9. On what piece of furniture are the books of the horseshoer's nephews^? 10. They are on the table of the anteroom. 11. Are the admiral's sons^ on the same bench as your brothers? 12. No, they are not in the same school. 13. I am seated on the same bench as the children of the marquis. 14. Are not the schools of the city large? 15. Yes, they are very large and very cheerful. 16. What building is opposite the houses of the admirals? 17. Is their street far from the park of the city? 18. No, it is opposite the entrance of the park. 61. Reading Lesson* SORITE L'Europe est la plus belle partie du monde. La France est le plus beau pays d'Europe. Paris est la plus belle ville de France. Ma rue est la plus belle de Paris. Ma maison est la plus belle de la rue. Ma chambre est la plus belle de la maison. Je suis le plus bel homme de ma chambre. Done je suis le plus bel homme du monde. SEVENTH LESSON Rules 62. Tin livre, a (one) book. Tine table, a (one) tabic. The indefinite article a or a)i and one are translated by un l)efore a masculine noun and by une before a feminine. 63. L'eleve a des livres. The pupil has (some) books. ^ Say : the nephews of the horseshoer. ■^ Say : the sons of the admiral. ^ See the general vocabulary for the translation of the reading lessons. 40 BEGINNER S FRENCH The partitive article some or any, expressed or under- stood in English before a noun, must be expressed in French and is translated by des before a plural noun. (Cf. 48. 4.) 64. L'eleve n'a pas de livre. The pupil has no {not a, not any) hook. No, not a, not any are translated by ne (verb) pas de before any noun, singular or plural, used as a direct object. De becomes d' before a vowel or an h mute. 65. L'eleve n'a qn'un livre. The pupil has only one book. Mon frere n*a que des fils. My brother has only sons. Only is translated by ne (verb) que. Que = qu' before a vowel or an h mute. 66. II a, he has. A-t-il? has he? Elle a, she has. A-t-elle? has she? On a, one has. A-t-on? has one? When the third person singular of any tense ends in a vowel and is followed by il, elle, on, the letter t must be inserted between hyphens. 67. Qu'a-t-il? What has he? Qu'est ce qu'il a? 1. What? interrogative pronoun, direct object, is trans- lated by que or qn'est ce que. 2. Qu'est ce que must be used when the subject of the question precedes the verb. 68. Present of the indicative of avoir {to have). AFFIRMATIVE j'ai, / have tu as il or elle a nous avons vous avez ils or elles ont INTERROGATIVE ai je? have I? as tu? a-t-il or a-t-elle? avons nous ? avez vous? ont ils or elles? NEGATIVE je n'ai pas, / have not tu n'as pas il or elle n'a pas nous n'avons pas vous n'avez pas ils or elles n'ont pas BEGINNER S FRENCH 4I Another interrogative form is: est ce que j'ai ? have If est ce que nous avons? est ce que tu as ? est ce que vous avez ? est ce qu'il or elle a ? est ce qu'ils or eiles ont ? 69. Vocabulary le village, the village. le drapeau, the flag. le preau, the playground. le fourneau, the stove. le couteau, the knife. le rideau, the curtain. le store, the shade {blind). la cloche, the hell. la carte, the map. la fenetre, the window. le cahier, the notebook. 70. Text 1. L'ecole du village a un drapeau, un preau et une cloche. 2. La salle de l'ecole a un tableau, une carte et un fourneau. 3. La fenetre de lantichambre a un rideau et un store. 4. Le neveu du marechal a dans son bureau un cahier, un couteau, une plume et un crayon. 71. Transposition 1. Use the plural everywhere and repeat the subject and the verb before every direct object. Ex. : I . Les ecoles des villages ont des drapeaux ; elles ont des . . . et elles ont des . . . 2. Use the negative form and repeat the subject and the verb before every direct object. Ex.: I. L'ecole du village n'a pas de drapeau; elle n'a pas de preau et elle n'a pas de , . . 42 BEGINNER S FRENCF 3. Use the restrictive form (=r only). Ex. : I. L'ecole du village n'a qu'un drapeau, qu'un preau et qu'une eloche. 72. Questions 1. (a) L'ecole du village a-t-elle un drapeau? A.: Oui, M., elle a un drapeau. (b) A-t-elle un preau? (c) A-t-elle une cloche? 2. (a) Est ce que la salle de l'ecole a un tableau? (b) Est ce qu'elle a une carte? (c) Est ce qu'elle a un fourneau? 3. (a) La fenetre de I'antichambre a-t-elle un rideau? (b) A-t-elle un store? 4. (a) Est ce que le neveu du marechal a un cahier dans son bureau? (b) Est ce qu'il a un couteau? (c) Est ce qu'il a une plume? (d) Est ce qu'il a un crayon? 5. Ou'est ce qui a un drapeau, un preau et une cloche? A.: M., Tecole du village a un ... 6. Qu'est ce qui a un tableau, une carte et un fourneau ? 7. Ou'est ce qui a un rideau et un store? 8. Qui a dans son bureau un cahier, un couteau, une* plume et un crayon? 9. Qu'a l'ecole du village? A.: M., elle a un . . . 10. Qu'est ce que la salle de l'ecole a? 11. Qu'a la fenetre de I'antichambre? 12. Ou'est ce que le neveu du marechal a dans son bureau ? BEGINNERS FRENCH 43 Restrictive answers. 13. Est ce que Tecole du village a des drapeaux, des preaux et des cloches? A.: Non, M., elle n'a qii'un drapeau, qu'un ... et qu'une . . . 14. La salle de Tecole a-t-elle des tableaux, des cartes et des fourneaux? 15. Est ce que la fenetre de rantichambre a des rideaux et des stores? 16. Le neveu du marechal a-t-il dans son bureau des cahiers, des couteaux, des plumes et des crayons? 73. Grammar Drill Replace the dashes by un or une as the case may be, the first row of dots by the proper translation of some or any and the second by the plural of the preceding noun. 1. — rideau, ; — drapeau, ; — neveu, ; — fils, ; — couteau, Ex. : i . Un rideau, des rideaux. 2. — ecole, ; — fenetre, ; — porte, ; — plume, ; — cloche, ; — amie, 3. — bureau, ; — carte, ; — preau, ; — ville, ; — antichambre, ; — cahier, ; — crayon, ; — salle, ; — tableau, ; — boite, 4. I have, we have, they (m.) have. 5. Has he? have you? have you*? (Two translations of every question.) ■6. They (f.) have not, I have not, you have not, she has not. 44 BEGINNERS FRENCH 74. Translation I. The school of the city has (some) class rooms and (some) anterooms. 2. The class rooms of the schools have some windows and one door. 3. The anteroom of the school has no blackboards. 4. It has only chairs and one table. 5. Where are the maps and the blackboards? 6. They are on the walls of the class rooms. 7. Have the schools of the village flags and bells ? 8. They have only bells ; they have no flags. 9. The windows of our class rooms have shades. ID. They have no curtains. 11. Where are the pupils of this schoolmaster? 12. They are in the playground in front of the park. 13. Where is the master? 14. He is seated near the stove of his class room. 15. Who is this pupil? 16. What has he in his pocket? 17. He has only a knife. 18. Have you (any) desks? 19. What have you in your desks? 20. We have notebooks, pens and pencils. EIGHTH LESSON Rules 75' Cardinal numbers. un, une i deux 2 trois 3 quatre 4 cinq 5 six (siss) 6 sept (sett) 7 huit (ziret, short) 8 neuf 9 dix (diss) 10 onze II douze treize quatorze quinze seize dix sept (diss) dix huit ( " ) dix neuf ( " ) vingt (z'in) vingt et un (vinte-un) . . vingt deux (pron. t) . . 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 I? 26 21 22 BEGINNER S FRENCH 45 vingt trois (pron. O-. vingt quatre( ) • • vingt cinq ( ) • • vingt six ( ) • • vingt sept ( ) • • vingt huit ( ) • • vingt neuf ( ) • • 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 trente 30 trente et un 31 trente deux, etc 32 quarante 40 quarante et un 41 quarante deux, etc 42 cinquante 50 cinquante et un 51 cinquante deux 52 soixante 60 soixante et un 61 soixante deux 62 soixante dix 70 soixante et onze 71 soixante douze y2 soixante treize 73 soixante quatorze 74 soixante quinze 75 soixante seize y6 soixante dix sept yy Notes: i. Cinq livres; cinq, cinq^enfants. Five hooks; five, five children. Six villes ; six, six^ecoles. Six cities; six, six schools. The final consonant of the numbers cinq, six, sept, huit, neuf, dix is not sounded when they are followed by a noun or adjective beginning with a consonant or an h formerly aspirate and is pronounced in all other cases. 2. The conjunction et is used only in 21, 31, 41, 51, 61, 71. soixante dix huit 78 soixante dix neuf 79 quatre vingts {vin) .... 80 quatre vingt un 81 quatre vingt deux 82 quatre vingt dix 90 quatre vingt onze ..... 91 quatre vingt douze 92 quatre vingt treize 93 quatre vingt quatorze . . 94 quatre vingt quinz-e 95 quatre vingt seize 96 quatre vingt dix sept ... 97 quatre vingt dix huit . . 98 quatre vingt dix neuf . . 99 cent 100 cent un loi cent cinquante 1 50 deux cents 200 deux cent trente 230 trois cents 300 mille 1000 douze cent trois 1203 deux mille 2000 deux mille cent 2100 un million 1,000,000 46 BEGINNERS FRENCH 76. Ordinal numbers. premier, premiere . deuxieme or second, troisieme quatrieme cinquieme sixieme septieme huitieme . . neiivieme dixieme onzieme douzieme treizieme quatorzieme quinzieme seizieme 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th 7th 8th 9th loth nth 1 2th 13th 14th 15th 1 6th dix septieme 17th dix huitieme i8th dix neuvieme 19th vingtieme 20th vingt et unieme 21st vingt deuxieme 22nd trentieme 30th quarantieme 40th cinquantieme 50th soixantieme 60th soixante dixieme 70th quatre vingtieme Both quatre vingt dixieme. . . 90th centieme looth millieme loooth milhonieme i ,(X)0,oooth To form any ordinal number, add -ieme to the correspond- ing cardinal (except premier; fem. irregular: premiere). Notes: i. However, notice the slight changes or addi- tions in quatrieme, cinquieme. neuvieme, trentieme, etc. 2. Unieme, deuxieme are respectively used to translate first and second in 21st, 22nd, 31st, 32nd, 41st, 42nd, etc. 3. Le or la onzieme. We do not elide the vowel of le or la before onzieme. 77. Vocabulary le jour, the day. le mois, the month. le siecle, the century. le temps, the time. la seconde, the second. la minute, the minute. la parti e, the part. rheure (f.), the hour, la semaine, the week. ranne^(f.), the year. la division, the division. il forme, he or it forms. elle ferme, she or it forms. ils or elles forment, they form. BEGINNER S FRENCH 47 78. Divisions du Temps. 1. 60 secondes forment une minute. 2. 60 minutes forment une heure. 3. 24 heures forment un jour. 4. 7 jours forment une semaine. 5. 30 jours forment un mois. 6- 365 jours forment une annee. 7. loo^annees forment un siecle. 79. Transposition 1. Double every number. Ex.: i. 120 secondes forment 2 minutes. 2. Triple every number. Ex.: i. 180 secondes forment 3 minutes. 3. Quadruple every number. Ex.: i. 240 secondes forment 4 minutes. 4. Decuple every number. Ex.: i. 600 secondes forment 10 minutes. 5. Deduct one from the first number of every sentence and use the negative form. Ex. : i. 59 secondes ne forment pas une^ minute. 6. Use the ordinal numbers. Ex. : i. Une seconde est la soixantieme partie d'une minute. 80. Questions 1. 60 secondes forment elles une minute? A.: Oui, M., elles forment une minute. 2. Est ce que 60 minutes forment une heure? 3. 24 heures forment elles un jour? 4. Est ce que 7 jours forment une semaine? ^ Mft one is translated by ne (verb) pas une ; not a by ne (verb) pas de. (See 64.) 48 beginner's FRENCH 5. 30 jours forment ils un mois? 6. Est ce que 365 jours forment une annee? 7. 100 annees forment elles un siecle? 8. Qu'est ce qui forme une minute? A.: M., 60 secon- des . . . 9. Qu'est ce qui forme une heure ? 10. Qu'est ce qui forme un jour? 11. Qu'est ce qui forme une semaine? 12. Qu'est ce qui forme un mois? 13. Qu'est ce qui forme une annee? 14. Qu'est ce qui forme un siecle? 15. Quelle est la soixantieme partie d'une minute? A.: M,, une seconde est la. . . 16. Quelle est la soixantieme partie d'une heure? 17. Quelle est la vingt quatrieme partie d'un jour? 18. Quelle est la septieme partie d'une semaine? 19. Quelle est la trentieme partie d'un mois? 20. Quelle est la trois cent soixante cinquieme partie d'une annee? 21. Quelle est la centieme partie d'un siecle? 81. Grammar Drill 1. Give the odd numbers from i to 21. 2. Give the even numbers from 2 to 30. 3. Give the multiples of 3 up to 99. 4. Give the multiples of 4 up to 120. 5. 58, 814, 1204, 1492, 1643, 1789. 1824, 1870, 1903. 82. Translation Use no figures in writing out this exercise. I. We have 4 generals and 2 admirals in this city. 2. This general has 3 sons and this admiral has 5 nephews. 3. The city has 7 schools, 6 parks, 8 avenues, 92 streets and BEGINNER S FRENCH 49 60,000 inhabitants. 4. Our school has 45 windows, 16 doors and 2 playgrounds. 5. Your class room has 12 benches, 3 blackboards, 5 maps and 2 desks. 6. The schoolmistress has in her desk 4 pencils, 2 inkstands, 7 books, 10 pens and 14 notebooks. 7. The divisions of time^ are the second, the minute, the hour, the day, the week, the month, the year and the century. 8. 180 minutes form 3 hours. 9. 91 days form 13 weeks. 10. 52 weeks form one year. 11. 312 weeks form 6 years. 12. 120 hours form 5 days. 13. 210 days form 7 months. 14. 1460 days form 4 years. 15. 1000 years form 10 centuries. 16. 20 is the fifth part of 100. 17. 30 is the sixth part of 180. 18. 53 is the ninth part of 477. 19. 42 is the eleventh part of 462. 83. Reading Lesson DIVISIONS DU TEMPS L'annee a douze mois. Les noms des douze mois de I'annee sont: Janvier, fevrier, mars, avril, mai, juin, juillet, aout, septembre, octobre, novembre et decembre. Janvier est le premier mois de l'annee; fevrier est le deuxieme ; . mars est le troisieme ; avril est le quatrieme ; mai est le cinquieme; juin est le sixieme; juillet est le septieme; aoiit est le huitieme; septembre est le neuvieme; octobre est le dixieme; novembre est le onzieme et decembre est le douzieme, le dernier. Janvier, mars, mai, juillet, aoiit, octobre et decembre ont trente et un jours. Les autres mois, excepte fevrier, ont trente jours. Fevrier a vingt huit jours dans les annees ordinaires et vingt neuf dans les annees bissextiles. Le premier Janvier est le premier jour de l'annee; le trente et un decembre est le dernier. Le vingt deux fevrier est le jour de I'anniversaire de naissance de Washington. Le quatre juillet est la date de la fete nationale des fitats 1 Supply the. 50 BEGINNER S FRENCH Unis. Le quatorze juillet est la date de Tanniversaire de la prise de la Bastille. L'annee a quatre saisons. Les noms des quatre saisons de Tannee sont: le printemps, lete, rautomne et I'hiver. Le printemps est la plus agreable des quatre saisons. La semaine a sept jours. Les noms des sept jours de la semaine sont: lundi, mardi, mercredi, jeudi, vendredi, samedi et dimanche. Lundi et mardi sont les deux premiers jours de la semaine. Samedi et dimanche sont les deux demiers. NINTH LESSON * Rules Review §§ i8, 40, 48, 49, 50, 51. 84. Sonner, to ring. Dessiner, to draw. The regular French verbs are divided into three conjuga- tions. The infinitive present of the first one ends in -er. 85. Present indicative of sonner (to ring). je Sonne, / ring, I do ring, nous sonnons, we ring I am ringing tu sonnes, you ring vous sonnez, you ring il or elle sonne, he or she rings ils or elles sonnent, they ring The endings of the indicative present of verbs of the first conjugation are: f _e f -ons singular -j -es plural S -ez I -e L -ent 86. I. Present indicative of sonner (interrogative form). ( sonne je? )do I ring? sonnons nous? \ est ce que je sonne? \am I ringing? sonnes tu? sonnez vous? sonne-t-il? sonnent ils? sonne-t-elle ? sonnent elles? BEGINNER S FRENCH 51 1. The auxiliary verb to do has no corresponding form in French. We say Ring I? instead of Do I ring? Ring yoiif instead of Do you ring? etc. 2. Final e mute of the first person singular must be accented (e) when followed by je. Such forms as sonne-je? dessine-je? are avoided in con- versation. Therefore always use the form est ce que in the first person singular of any tense. Either form may be used in the other persons. 87. Present indicative of sonner (negative form), je ne sonne pas, / do not ring, nous ne sonnons pas / am not ringing tu ne sonnes pas il or elle ne sonne pas 88. Le travail, les travaux. A few nouns ending in -ail replace -il by -ux in the plural. 89. I. Qui critiquez vous? Whom do you criticise? De qui parlez vous ? Of whom are you talking? 2. De quoi parlez vous? Of what are you talking? 1. Whom? interrogative pronoun, direct object or object of any preposition, is translated by qui. 2. What? interrogative pronoun, object of any preposi- tion, is translated by quoi. (See 67.) vous ne sonnez pas ils or elles ne sonnent pas The work, the works. 90. r^difice (m.), the building. le chapeau, the hat. le pardessus, the overcoat. I'animal (m.), the animal. le bateau, the boat. le travail, the work. I'avis (m.), the advice. la tour, the tower. Vocabulary- la classe, the class, the class room. sonner, to ring. deposer, to lay down. dessiner, to draw. examiner, to examine. critiquer, to criticise. ecouter, to listen. 52 BEGINNER S FRENCH 91. Text 1. Les cloches sonnent dans les tours des^ecoles. 2. Vous deposez vos chapeaux et vos pardessus sur les tables des^antichambres. 3. Nous dessinons des^animaux et des bateaux dans nos cahiers ou des cartes sur les tableaux des classes. 4. Le maitre examine et critique les travaux des^eleves. 5. Nous^ecoutons ses^avis. 92. Transposition 1. Replace the plural by the singular and vice versa. Ex.: I. La cloche sonne... 2. Tu deposes ton... 3. Je dessine un . . . 2. Conjugate sentences 2, 3, 4 and 5 in the present in- dicative. Ex. : I . Je depose mon . . . Tu deposes ton . . . 3. Use two interrogative forms. Ex. : i. (a) Est ce que les cloches sonnent dans. . . ? (b) Les cloches sonnent elles dans . . . ? 93. Questions 1. Qu'est ce qui sonne dans les tours des ecoles? A.: M., les cloches sonnent. . . 2. Qui depose son chapeau et son pardessus sur la table de Tantichambre ? 3. (a) Qui dessine des animaux et des bateaux dans son cahier ? (b) Qui est ce qui dessine des cartes sur les tableaux des classes? 4. (a) Qui examine les travaux des eleves? (b) Qui est ce qui critique leurs travaux? 5. Qui ecoute les avis du maitre? BEGINNERS FRENCH 53 6. Ou les cloches sonnent elles? A.: M., elles sonnent dans . . . 7. Que deposons nous sur les tables des antichambres ? 8. (a) Qu'est ce que vous dessinez dans vos cahiers? (b) Que dessinez vous sur les tableaux des classes? 9. (a) Qu'est ce que le maitre examine? (b) Que critique-t-il? 10. Qu'ecoutez vous? 11. Dans les tours de quels edifices les cloches sonnent elles? A.: M., elles sonnent dans. . . 12. Sur quoi deposons nous nos chapeaux et nos par- dessus ? 13. (a) Dans quoi dessinez vous des animaux et dea bateaux ? (b) Sur quoi dessinez vous des cartes? 14. (a) De qui le maitre examine-t-il les travaux? (b) De qui critique-t-il les travaux? 15. De qui ecoutez vous les avis? 94. Grammar Drill Replace the dashes by the plural form of the preceding noun and the dots by the proper forms : du, de la, de 1', des. 1. Le chapeau, les — , . . . chapeau, ... — ; la classe, les — , . . . classe, ... — ; le cahier, les — , . . . cahier, ... — ; I'avis, les — , . . . avis, ... — : la carte, les — , ... carte, ... — ; I'animal, les — , . . . animal, . . . — . Ex.: I. Le chapeau, les chapeaux, du chapeau, des cha- peaux. 2. Le bateau, les — , . . . bateau, ... — ; la tour, les — , . . . tour, ... — ; 54 BEGINNERS FRENCH le travail, les — , . . . travail, ... — ; Tenfant, les — , . . . enfant, ... — ; le pardessus, les — , . . . pardessus, ... — ; la cloche, les — , . . . cloche, . . . — . 3. Translate : I listen, we listen, they do not listen ; you are examining, he is not examining, do we examine? do they lay down? we lay down, she does not lay down; you* ring, you do not ring, is she ringing? they are not criti- cising, I am criticising, do you criticise? 95. Translation I. Who rings the bell of the school? 2. Do you ring the bell? 3. No, the nephew of the schoolmaster is ringing. 4. In what class room are you? 5. We are in the class room opposite the park. 6. Does your teacher lay down his hat on the chair? 7. No, he lays down his hat on the table. 8. Where are the pupils' overcoats ? 9. They are on the chairs of the anteroom. 10. What are you drawing? 11. What are we drawing? 12. I am drawing an animal on the black- board of the class room and my brothers are drawing (some) boats in their notebooks. 13. Who is examining the works? 14. The master examines our notebooks. 15. Do you listen? 16. The pupils do not listen to^ the advice^ of the master. 17. They are criticising his work. 1 Omit. 2 Use the pluraL BEGINNER S FRENCH 55 TENTH LESSON Rules 96. Le bal, the hall. Les bals, the halls. A few nouns ending in -al form their plural regularly, by adding s to tl)e singular. (See $!•) 97. (i) Au maitre, (2) a la dame, (3) a I'enfant, (4) aux maitres, aux dames, aux enfants ; to the (at the) master, lady, child; to the (at the) masters, ladies, children. To the and at the are translated by ( i ) au before a mas- culine noun singular beginning with a consonant or an h formerly aspirate, by (2) a la before a feminine noun sin- gular beginning with a consonant or an h formerly aspirate, by (3) ^1' before any singular noun beginning with a vowel or an h mute, and by (4) aux before any plural noun. 98. Je parlais, / was speaking, I used to speak tu parlais, you zvere speaking il parlait, he was speaking elle parlait, she was speaking nous parlions, zve were speaking vous parliez, you were speaking ils parlaient, they were speaking elles parlaient, they were speaking The endings of the indicative imperfect of the first con- jugation are: r _ais [ -ions singular \ -ais plural -j -iez I -ait L -aient le bal, the hall. rambassadeur, the ambassador I'hote, the host. 99. Vocabulary rinvite, the guest. I'etranger, the stranger. le general, the general. 56 BEGINNER S FRENCH le son, the sound. le violon, the violin. rinstrument (m.),the instrument. la princesse. the princess . Tambassadrice, the ambassadress. autre, I'hotesse, the hostess. assister a, to be present at. parler, to speak, to talk. presenter, to introduce. danser, to dance, other. 100. Text 1. Nous^assistons au bal de rambassadeur. 2. Vous presentez letranger a Thote et a I'hotesse. 3. ^ ambassadrice parle au general et a la princesse. 4. Les^autres^ invites dansent aux sons des violons. I o I . Transposition 1. Conjugate every sentence in the indicative present. Ex. : I. J'assiste au bal de Tambassadeur. Tu assistes. . , 2. Replace the singular by the plural and vice versa. Ex.: I. J'assiste aux bals des ambassadeurs. 3. Replace the present by the imperfect. Ex.: i. Nous assistions au bal de Tambassadeur. 4. Use the negative form. Ex.: i. Nous n'assistons pas au bal de I'ambassadeur. 102. Questions 1. Qui assiste au bal de I'ambassadeur? A.: M. assistons au bal de Tambassadeur. 2. Qui presente I'etranger a I'hote et a Thotesse? 3. Qui parle au general et a la princesse? 4. Qui danse aux sons des violons? nous 5. A quoi assistez vous? A.: M., nous assistons au BEGINNER S FRENCH 57 6. A qui est ce que je presente I'etranger? , 7. A qui rambassadrice parle-t-elle ? 8. Aux sons de quel instrument les invites dansent ils? (Use the imperfect.) 9. Assistiez vous au bal de Tambassadeur ? A.: Oui, M., nous assistions au . . . 10. Est ce que je presentais I'etranger a Thote et a I'hotesse ? 11. L'ambassadrice parlait elle au general et a la prin- cesse ? 12. Est ce que les invites dansaient aux sons des violons ? 103. Grammar Drill 1. The ball, the balls ; of the ball, of the balls ; to the ball, to the balls. 2. The princess, the princesses ; of the princess, of the princesses ; to the princess, to the princesses. 3. The guest, the guests ; of the guest, of the guests ; to the guest, to the guests. 4. The host, the hosts; of the host, of the hosts; to the host, to the hosts. ^ 5. The sound, the sounds; of the sound, of the sounds; to the sound, to the sounds. 6. The stranger, the strangers ; of the stranger, of the strangers ; to the stranger, to the strangers. 7. The lady, the ladies ; of the lady, of the ladies ; to the lady, to the ladies. 8. I am dancing, I was dancing; he is speaking, he used to speak ; we introduce, we were introducing ; they are drawing, they used to draw. 9. You are present, you were present;* are you speaking? were you speaking? are we criticising? were we criticising? does she dance? was she dancing? 58 BEGINNER^S FRENCH « 104. Translation (a) I. Where are you ? 2. We are at the ball. 3. Where is the host ? 4. He is introducing the strangers to the other guests. 5. Where are the princesses and the ambassador? 6. The ambassador is standing near the door. 7. To whom does he speak? 8. He speaks to the hostess. 9. The princesses are seated near the general. 10. To whom are they speaking? 11. They are speaking to the ambassadress. 12. Is she present at the ball? 13. Yes, she is dancing. 14. Do you dance? 15. We do not dance to the sounds of the violin. (b) I. My brothers were present at the class. 2. We were drawing. 3. The master was speaking to the pupils. 4. He was criticising their works. 5. We were listening to^ his advice. 105. Reading Lesson IMPOSSIBLE n'eST PAS FRANgAIS Napoleon premier donne un jour a un jeune lieutenant un ordre difficile a executer. L'of ficier hesite et murmure : « Sire, Texecution de cet ordre est impossible.)) « Impossible ! crie Napoleon f urieux, impossible ! ce mot n'est pas fran9ais.)) ELEVENTH LESSON Rules Review §§ 18, 28, 40, 63. 106. Rougir, to blush. Remplir, to fulfill. The infinitive present of the verbs of the second conjuga- tion ends in -ir. 1 Omit BEGINNER S FRENCH 59 107. Indicative present of rougir. je rougis, / blush, I am blushing, nous rougissons / do blush tu rougis vous rougissez il rougit ils rougissent elle rougit elles rougissent The endings of the indicative present of the second con- jugation are: r _is |- -issons singular j -is plural ] -issez I -it -issent 108. Indicative present of rougir (interrogative form) rougissons nous est ce que je rougis? do I blush f am I blushing f rougis tu? rougit il ? rougit elle ? 1. In the first person singular, use the form est ce que. 2. In the other persons, use either forms. rougissez vous r rougissent ils? rougissent elles ? 109. I. Who? interrogative may be translated by qui or qui est ce qui. 2. Whom? interrogative may be translated by qui or qui est ce que. no. Vocabulary I'ami, the friend. le choix, the choice. les parents, the parents, the rela- tives. la punition, the punishment. la conduite, the behavior. diligent, -e, industrious. obeir a, to obey. subir, to undergo, receive. rougir (de), to blush {for). rejouir, to rejoice. choisir, to choose. bien, well. 6o beginner's FRENCH III. Text 1. Mon frere n est pas diligent. 2. II n'obeit pas a ses maitres. T,, II subit des punitions. 4. Nous choisissons bien nos^amis. 5. Vous ne rougissez pas de votre choix et de votre conduite. 6. Nous rejouissons nos parents. 112. Transposition (Choix and conduite must remain singular and parents plural throughout.) 1. Conjugate every sentence in the indicative present. Ex. : I . Je ne suis pas diligent or diligente. Tu n'es pas . . . 2. Replace the singular by the plural and vice versa. Ex.: I. Mes freres ne sont pas diligents. 3. Replace the negative form by the affirmative and vice versa. Ex.: i. Mon frere est diligent. 113. Questions 1. Votre frere n'est il pas dihgent? A.: Noh, M., il n'est pas ... 2. N'obeit il pas a ses maitres? 3. Subit il des punitions? 4. Est ce que vous choisissez bien vos amis? 5. (a) Ne rougissons nous pas de notre choix? (b) Est ce que nous ne rougissons pas de notre con- duite ? 6. Rejouissez vous vos parents? 7. Qui n'est pas diligent? beginner's FRENCH 6l 8. Qui n'obeit pas a ses maitres? 9. Qui est ce qui subit des punitions? 10. Qui choisit bien ses amis? 11. (a) Qui ne rougit pas de son choix? (b) Qui est ce qui ne rougit pas de sa conduite? 12. Qui rejouit ses parents? 13. Votre frere est il diligent? 14. A qui n'obeit il pas? 15. Qu'est ce qu'il subit? 16. Qui choisissez vous bien? 17. De quoi ne rougissons nous pas? 18. Qui est ce que vous rejouissez? 114. Grammar DriH 1. I choose, they choose, she chooses; you* rejoice, we rejoice, they rejoice; you obey, I obey, he obeys. 2. They undergo, you undergo, he undergoes ; we do not blush, she does not blush, they do not blush. 3. Am I choosing? do you choose? do they choose? does she obey? are we obeying? do you* obey? 115. Translation I. My brothers are industrious. 2. Where are they? 3. They are at^ school. 4. Do they obey^ their teachers? 5. They listen well to^ their advice.^ 6. They do not blush for their work. 7. They rejoice our parents and their teachers. 8. Are these pupils your friends? 9. You do not choose well. 10. I do not blush for my choice. 11. Do you receive punishments? 12. The teacher is sad : we are not very indus- trious. 13. We do not obey. 14. We do not listen. 15. And you receive punishments. 16. We blush for our behavior. 1 Supply //^ 20, 28, 29.1, 31, 4i» 52, 98. 116. Ce livre ci, this book. Ce livre la, that book. Cet enfant ci, this child. Cet enfant la, that child. Cette salle ci, this class room. Cette salle la, that class room. Ces eleves ci, these pupils. Ces eleves la, those pupils. When it is necessary to mark a sharp distinction between the adjectives this and that, these and those, put ci after the noun preceded by this or these, and la after the one preceded by that or those. 117. Imperfect of punir (to punish). je punissais, / was punishing, nous punissions / used to punish tu punissais vous punissiez il punissait ils punissaient elle punissait elles punissaient The endings of the indicative imperfect of the second conjugation are: f -issais f -issions ■issiez L -issaient r -issais r singular \ -issais plural \ I -issait L 118. Grand (m.), great; grande (f.), great; grandement, greatly. Rapide (m. and f.), qmck ; rapidement, quickly; plus rapidement, more quickly; le plus rapidement, the most quickly. Je parle rapidement, / speak quickly. I. French adverbs are formed by adding -ment to the feminine form of the adjective. Their comparative and beginner's FRENCH ' 63 superlative are formed like those of the adjectives. (See 38, 39.) 2. Adverbs are placed immediately after the verb. 119. Le livre est sur la table, n'est ce pas? Oui, M., il est sur la table. Is the book on the table f Yes, sir, it is on the table. 1. A third way to form a question is to put n'est ce pas? is it not so? after any statement. 2. Yes, after such a question, is oui, not si. (See 53'.) 120. Vocabulary le devoir, the duty. la fille, the girl. la reputation, the reputation, jeune, young. meilleur, -e, better. punir, to punish. cherir, to cherish, to like. remplir, to fulfill. jouir de, to enjoy. reussir, to succeed. grandir, to grozv. mieux (adverb), better. rapidement, quickly. 121. Text 1. Je punissais ces^eleves ci et je cherissais ces^eleves la. 2. Cette jeune fille la remplissait mieux ses devoirs que cette jeune fille ci. 3. Ce maitre ci jouissait dune meilleure repu- tation que ce maitre la. 4. Ces^enfants la grandissaient plus rapidement que ces^enfants ci. 5. Ces maitresses ci reussissaient mieux que ces maitresses la. 122, Transposition I. Conjugate every sentence in the imperfect. Ex. : I. Tu punissais ces. . .et tu. . 64 beginner's FRENCH 2. Conjugate every sentence in the indicative present. Ex. : I. Je punis ces eleves ci et je. . . 3. Replace the singular by the plural (except " une meil- leure reputation ") and vice versa. 4. Use the interrogative form n'est ce pas. Ex.: i. Je punissais ces eleves ci, n'est ce pas? 123. Questions 1. (a) Qui punissait ces eleves ci? ^..- M., je punissais ces . . . (b) Qui est ce qui cherissait ces eleves la? 2. (a) Qui remplissait bien ses devoirs? (b) Qui est ce qui remplissait mieux ses devoirs que cette jeune fille ci? 3. (a) Qui est ce qui jouissait d'une bonne reputation? (b) Qui jouissait d'une meilleure reputation que ce maitre la? 4. (a) Qui gnandissait rapidement? (b) Qui est ce qui grandissait plus rapidement que ces enfants ci? 5. (a) Qui est ce qui reussissait? (b) Qui est ce qui reussissait mieux que ces maitresses la? 6. (a) Qui punissiez vous? A.: M., je punissais ces. . . (b) Qui est ce que vous cherissiez? 7. (a) Qu'est ce que cette jeune fille la remplissait? (b) Qu'est ce que cette jeune fille la remplissait mieux que cette jeune fille ci? 8. De quoi ce maitre ci jouissait il? 9. Comment ces enfants la grandissaient ils? 10. Comment est ce que ces maitresses ci reussissaient ? Use in the answers the indicative present and the negative and the affirmative forms. beginner's FRENCH ' 6$ 11. (o) Punissez vous ces eleves la? A.: Non, M., je ne punis pas ces eleves la, je punis ces eleves ci. (b) Est ce que vous cherissez ces eleves ci? 12. Cette jeune fille ci remplit mieux ses devoirs que cette jeune fille la, n'est ce pas? 13. Ce maitre la jouit il d'une meilleure reputation que ce maitre ci? 14. Ces enfants ci grandissent plus rapidement que ces enfants la, n'est ce pas ? 15. Est ce que ces maitresses la reussissent mieux que ces maitresses ci? 124. Grammar Drill Use ci or 1^, as the case may be, after every noun. 1. This flag, that flag, these flags, those flags. 2. That stranger, this stranger, those strangers, these strangers. 3. These balls, those balls, this ball, that ball. 4. Those bells, these bells, that bell, this bell. 5. This ambassador, that ambassador, those ambassadors, these ambassadors. 6. That actress, these actresses, those actresses, this actress. 7. I was growing; you were not growing; were they growing ? 8. We used to fulfill ; was she fulfilling? You* were not fulfilling. 9. You were not succeeding ; I used to succeed ; were they succeeding ? 125. Translation I. My parents used to blush for my reputation. 2. I was not industrious. 3. You were not fulfilling your duties. 4. I was growing very rapidly. 5. I did not like my 66 beginner's FRENCH master. 6. I was not succeeding. *j. And you did not blush for your behavior! 8. Who used to enjoy a good reputation? 9. These teachers used to enjoy a better rep- utation than those masters. 10. They used to punish their pupils. II. They were only fulfilling their duty. 12. Were you receiving punishment? 13. Were you obeying^ your parents and your masters? 14. We were not blushing for our work. 15. Yoti were succeeding better than your brother. 16. This gentleman used to choose his friends better than that gentleman. 17. He used to enjoy a very good reputation and was succeeding very well. 126. Reading Lesson DU PAREIL AU MEME Napoleon trois, empereur des Franc^ais, cause un jour avec sa femme, I'imperatrice Eugenie. Comme elle parle un peu etourdiment, son mari demande par maniere de plaisanterie : « Quelle est la difference entre un miroir et vous meme ? » L'imperatrice cherche en vain une reponse a cette ques- tion. « Eh bien, continue Napoleon, la difference est que le miroir reflechit et que vous ne reflechissez pas.)) « A votre tour, riposte vivement Eugenie, quelle est la difference entre un miroir et vous meme?)) L'empereur reste muet de surprise. ;(Eh bien, mon ami. c'est que le miroir est plus poli.» 1 Supply a before every object. BEGINNER''S FRENCH 67 THIRTEENTH LESSON Rules 127. Perdre, to lose. Descendre, to go down. The infinitive present of the verbs of the third conjuga- tion ends in -re. 128. Indicative present of perdre. je perds, ,/ lose, I am losing, nous perdons / do lose tu perds vous perdez il or elle perd ils or elles perdent INTERROGATIVE FORM NEGATIVE FORM est ce que je perds? je ne perds pas perds tu ? etc. tu ne perds pas, etc. The endings of the indicative present of the third con- jugation are : j- .s j- _ons singular ^ -s plural -{ -ez I - I -ent 129. Imperfect of perdre. je perdais, / was losing, I used nous perdions to lose, I did lose tu perdais vous perdiez il or elle perdait ils or elles perdaient The endings of the indicative imperfect of the third con- jugation are the same as those of the imperfect of the first conjugation (see 98). 130. Diligent, industrious. Diligemment, industriously. French adverbs ending in -emment are derived from ad- jectives ending in -ent. 68 BEGINNER^S FRENCH 131. Vocabulary le repas, the meal. le pensionnaire, the boarder. le voisin, the neighbor. le temps, the time. la salle a manger, the dining room. la main, the hand. la sonnette, the {small) bell. perdre, to lose. attendre, to wait for. entendre, to hear. tendre, to extend^ to hold out. descendre, to go dozen, to come down. impatiemment, impatiently. enfin, at last. 132. Text 1. Nous^attendons impatiemment Theure du repas. 2. Vous perdez votre temps. 3. Enfin les pensionnaires entendent la son- nette. 4. Vous descendez a la salle a manger. 5. Je tends la main a mes voisins. 133. Transposition (Main must remain singular throughout.) 1. Conjugate every sentence in the indicative present. Ex.: I. J'attends. . . Tu attends. . . 2. Replace the present by the imperfect. Ex.: i. Nous attendions ... 3. Use the three interrogative forms. Ex. :i. (a) Atten- dons nous. . . ? (b) Est ce que nous attendons. . .? (c) Nous attendons. . ., n'est ce pas? 134. Questions 1. Qui attend impatiemment I'heure du repas? A.: M., nous attendons ... 2. Qui est ce qui perd son temps? beginner's FRENCH 69 3. Qui entend enfin la sonnette? 4. Qui est ce qui descend a la salle a manger? 5. Qui tend la main a ses voisins ? 6. Qu'attendez vous impatiemment? ^.; M., nous atten- dons. . . 7. Qu'est ce que nous perdons? 8. Qu'est ce que les pensionnaires entendent enfin? 9. Oil descendons nous? 10. A qui tendez vous la main ? (Use the imperfect and the negative form in the answers.) 11. Est ce que vous attendiez impatiemment Theu're du repas? A.: Non, M., nous n'attendions pas. . . 12.. Perdions nous notre temps? 13. Les pensionnaires entendaient ils enfin la sonnette? 14. Est ce que nous descendions a la salle a manger? 15. Vous tendiez la main a vos amis, n'est ce pas? 135. Grammar Drill 1. I am waiting, we wait, they do wait. 2. She does not go down, you do not go down, we do not go down. 3. Do you* hear? are they hearing? do we hear? 4. We extend ; does he extend ? I do not extend. 5. Are you losing? we are not losing; they lose. 6. I was going down, they were going down, you were going down. 7. You used to lose, they used to lose, I used to lose. 8. We were not hearing, she was not hearing, you* were not hearing. 9. Were they extending? were you extending? was she extending ? 10. They used to wait, were you waiting? we were not waiting. JO BEGINNERS FRENCH 136. Translation I. Who is waiting? 2. Who loses his time? 3. Who is waiting for^ the meal time? 2 4. These gentlemen are wait- ing impatiently for^ the meal time.^ 5. Do you hear the bell? 6. It rings. 7. Is it ringing? 8. Don't you hear? 9. We hear at last. 10. We do not lose our time. 11. The hostess is examining the dining room. 12. To whom does she hold out her^ hand? 13. She holds out her^ hand to her friends. 14. She does not lose her time. 15. She introduces the strangers to the other boarders. 16. Who is going down quickly? 17. Our neighbors go down quickly to the dining room. 18. They hear the bell. 19. They do not extend their^ hands* to their neighbors. 20. They do not lose their time. FOURTEENTH LESSON Rules Review § 63. 137. (i) Du papier, (2) de la viande, (3) de Teau, (4) des olives ; some i^any) paper, meat, water, olives. Some or any, expressed or understood before a noun, must be expressed in French and is translated by (i) du before a masculine noun singular beginning with a con- sonant or an h formerly aspirate, by (2) de la before a feminine noun singular beginning with a consonant or an h formerly aspirate, by (3) de 1* before any singular noun beginning with a vowel or an h mute, and by (4) des before any plural noun. 1 Omit. ' heure. ^ the. ^ Use the singular. BEGINNER S FRENCH 71 138. Indicative present of manger (to eat). je mange, / eat , nous mangeons tu manges vous mangez il or elle mange ils or elles mangent Imperfect, je mangeais, / was eating nous mangions tu mangeais vous mangiez il or elle mangeait ils or elles mangeaient In verbs ending in -ger, supply a silent e after the g to keep it soft (p. 16) whenever the endings begin with a or 0. Compare in English to singe, singeing; to tinge, tingeing 139. Indicative present of placer (to place, to put). je place, / place nous plaqons tu places vous placez il or elle place ils or elles placent Imperfect, je plagais, I zvas placing nous placions tu plagais vous placiez il or elle plagait ils or elles plaqaient In verbs ending in -cer, put a cedilla (,) under the c to keep it soft (= s) whenever the endings begin with a or 0. Compare in English noticeable, serviceable, faqade, etc. 140. Vocabulary le poisson, the fish. le fruit, the fruit. le legume, the vegetable. le pain, the bread. le biscuit, the cracker. le fromage, the cheese. le sel, the salt. le poivre, the pepper. le radis, the radish. le garden, the waiter. le vin, the wine. le lait, the milk. le verre, the glass. le the, the tea. le chocolat, the chocolate. le cafe, the coffee. la servante, the maid. la viande, the meat. la creme, the cream. la moutarde, the mustard. BEGINNER S FRENCH I'huile (f.), the oil. I'olive (f.), the olive. la biere, the beer. I'eau (f.), the water. la tasse, the cup. chaque (m. & f.), each, manger, to eat. every. placer, to place, to put. demander, to ask for. verser, to pour. quelquefois, sometimes. etc. (et cetera, et ainsi de suite) and so forth. 141. Text 1. A chaque repas, je manp;eais du poisson, de la viande, des legumes, du fromage et des fruits. 2. La servante pla9ait sur la table du pain, de la creme, des^olives, des biscuits, etc. 3. Vous demandiez quelquefois du sel, du poivre, de la moutarde, de Thuile, des radis, etc. 4. Les gar9ons versaient du vin, de la biere, de Teau ou du lait dans les verres des messieurs, et du the, du cafe ou du chocolat dans les tasses des dames. 142. Transposition 1. Conjugate every sentence in the indicative imperfect and repeat the subject and the verb before every direct ob- ject. Ex.: I. A chaque repas, tu mangeais du poisson, tu mangeais de la viande, tu . . . 2. Conjugate every sentence in the present of the indica- tive and repeat the subject and the verb before every direct object. Ex.: i. A chaque repas, je mange du poisson, je mange de la viande, je. . . 3. Use the three interrogative forms. Ex.: i. (a) Man- geais je du. . .a chaque repas? (b) Est ce que je mangeais du...a chaque repas? (c) Je mangeais du...a chaque repas, n'est ce pas ? BEGINNER S FRENCH 73 143. Questions 1. (a) Qui mangeait du poisson a chaque repas ? ^.; M., je mangeais du poisson a chaque repas. (b) Qui est ce qui mangeait de la viande a chaque repas ? • (c) Qui mangeait des legumes a chaque repas? (d) Qui est ce qui mangeait du fromage a chaque repas ? (e) Qui mangeait des fruits a chaque repas? 2. (a) Qui est ce qui plagait du pain sur la table? (b) Qui pla(;ait de la creme sur la table? (c) Qui est ce qui plaqait des olives sur la table? (d) Qui pla(;ait des biscuits sur la table? 3. (a) Qui demandait quelquefois du sel ? (b) Qui est ce qui demandait quelquefois du poivre? (c) Qui demandait quelquefois de la moutarde? (d) Qui est ce qui demandait quelquefois de Thuile? (e) Qui demandait quelquefois des radis? 4. (a) Qui versait du vin dans les verres des messieurs? (b) Qui est ce qui versait de la biere dans les verres des messieurs ? (c) Qui versait de I'eau dans les verres des messieurs ? (d) Qui est ce qui versait du lait dans les verres des messieurs ? (e) Qui versait du the dans les tasses des dames? (/) Qui est ce qui versait du cafe dans les tasses des dames ? (g) Qui versait du chocolat dans les tasses des dames ? 5. Qu'est ce que vous mangiez a chaque repas? A.: M., je mangeais du. . . 6. Qu'est ce que la servante plagait sur la table? 7. Que demandions nous quelquefois? 74 BEGINNER S FRENCH 8. (a) Qu^est ce que les gardens versaient dans les verres des messieurs? (b) Que versaient ils dans les tasses des dames? 144. Grammar Drill Replace the dash by the proper translation of some or any. 1. — cafe, — moutarde, — eau, — verres, — creme, — lait, — viande, — tasses, — sel, — fromages, — poisson, — legumes. 2. — chocolat, — huilc, — fromage, — pain, — biere, — poivre, — fruits, — vin, — olives, — temps, — biscuits. 3. I am eating, we eat, do they eat? You were not eat- ing, were you* eating? She was not eating. 4. Does he place ? they do not place, we are placing ; I was placing; were we placing? They were not placing. 145. Translation I. At last the boarders heard^ the bell. 2. The maid servant was ringing in the dining room. 3. She was losing her time. 4. At meal time,^ we used to go down to the dining room. 5. I used to place my overcoat on one of the chairs of the anteroom and my hat on my overcoat. 6. Did you eat^ some meat at each meal? 7. We used to eat meat^ and vegetables. 8. Who was eating some olives and radishes? 9. The ladies were eating olives, and the gentlemen radishes. 10. The waiters were putting in front of* the boarders (some) bread, salt, glasses and cups. II. One of my neighbors was very merry. 12. He used to pour water in the glass of the hostess. 13. She was some- times very sad. 14. I used to ask the^ maid servants for® some milk, cream, or cheese. 15. The hostess used to place ^ Use the imperfect. - Say : at the hours of the meals. ^ Supply some before every word where it is omitted. * devant. ^ Supply to. ^ Omit. BEGINNER S FRENCH 75 in front of the ladies (some) coffee, tea, milk, or chocolate. 1 6. The gentlemen used to ask the^ waiter for^ some beer or wine. 146. Reading Lesson UN CALEMBOUR Un jour, un acteur, tres fameux pour sa fatuite, tombe subitement malade et est oblige de garder le lit. II charge un de ses amis d'annoncer a son directeur qu'il est incapable de jouer ce soir la. A cette nouvelle, le directeur, affectant une profonde tristesse, pousse cette exclamation: (("Quelle fatalite (quel fat alite) ! » FIFTEENTH LESSON Rules Review §§ 28, 29, 30, 137. 147. Le beau pare, the beautiful park. Les beaux pares, the beautiful parks. ' Le bel enfant, the beautiful child. Les beaux enfants, the beautiful children. 1. Adjectives ending in -au take x in the plural. (Cf. So*) 2. Bel is used instead of beau before a masculine noun singular beginning with a vowel or an h mute. Masculine Fbmininb longs J 1 longues . { handsome, 1 , ,, beau , ... I belle , A beautiful, r , „ beaux .. belles L fme J Some adjectives form their feminine in an irregular way. 1 Supply /o 2 Omit. yd BEGINNER^S FRENCH 149. Un bon livre, a good book. Some French adjectives are placed, as in English, before the noun they quahfy. The most common are: bon, long, beau, joli, haut (high), petit, grand, large, vaste (vast), habile (skilful), immense, excellent, mauvais (bad). 150. De bon the, (some or any) good tea. De bonne creme, (some or any) good cream. De bonnes olives, (some or any) good olives. Some or any, expressed or understood, before a noun, is expressed in French and translated by de (d*) if the quali- fying adjective precedes the French noun.^ 151 • Recevoir, to receive. There are a few French verbs the infinitive present of which ends in -oir. All are irregular. Those the infinitive of which ends in -evoir are conjugated on the same model. .152. Present of the indicative of recevoir. je regois, / receive, I do receive, nous recevons / am receiving tu regois vous recevez il or elle regoit ils or elles reqoivent I. The endings of the indicative present of the verbs in -evoir are : . r -ois f -evons singular \ -ois plural j -evez I -oit I -oivent ^ One of the licenses adopted by the French Minister of Public In- struction in his decree of February 26, 1901, is the following: '^Article Partitif. On tolerera du, de la, de /', des, au lieu de de partitif devant un substantif precede d'un adjectif. Ex. : de ou du bon vin, de bonne viande ou de la bonne viande, de ou des bons fruits." Prof. Cledat, in his " Commentary " on the decree, rightly warns foreigners not to avail themselves of the above "tolerance" except be- fore expressions which may be assimilated to nouns of species. They should never do so either before abstract expressions or before indefinite adjectives. beginner's FRENCH 77 2. The cedilla under the c before a, o, u indicates that the c is soft (= s). (See Pronunciation, page i6.) I53« Imperfect of recevoir. je recevais, / used to receive, nous recevions / was receiinng, I did receive tu recevais vous receviez il or elle recevait ils or elles recevaient The endings of the imperfect of verbs ending in -evoir are : f -evais f -evions singular \ -evais plural \ -eviez I -evait I -evaient 154. Vocabulary I'hotel (m.), the hotel. le magasin, the store. I'administrateur, the adminis- trator. I'arbre (m.), the tree. le lac, the lake. Teglise (f.), the church. la fleur, the flower. la pelouse, the lawn. bon, -ne, good. long, -ue, long. beau, belle, beautiful, fine. haut, -e, high. excellent, -e, excellent. mauvais, -e, bad. vaste, vast. habile, skilful. immense, immense. devoir, must, ought. apercevoir, to perceive, notice. recevoir, to receive. avoir, to have, also. 155. Text 1. Chaque grande ville doit avoir de larges rues, d'immenses.^^h6tels, de belles^^eglises, de hauts^edifices et de grands magasins. 2. Les grandes villes doivent aussi avoir d'ha- biles^administrateurs, de bonnes^ecoles, de jolies maisons et de beaux pares. 3. Dans les pares, vous^apercevez de hauts^ar- 78 beginner's FRENCH bres, de longues^avenues, de jolies fleurs, de vastes pelouses et de petits lacs. 4. Des magasins de la ville, nous recevons de bon the, d'excellent cafe, de bonne huile, inais de mauvaise viande. 156. Transposition 1. Put the singular subjects and verbs in the plural and vice versa, and repeat the subject and the verb before every direct object. Ex.: i. Les grandes villes doivent avoir de larges rues ; elles doivent avoir . . . 2. Drop the adjectives everywhere. Ex. : i. Chaque ville doit avoir des rues, ... 3. Replace the present by the imperfect and repeat the subject and the verb before every direct object. Ex.: i. Chaque grande ville devait avoir . . . 4. Use two interrogative forms. Ex.: i. (a) Est ce que chaque grande ville doit avoir. . . ? (b) Chaque grande ville doit elle avoir . . . ? 157. Questions 1. (a) Qu'est ce qui doit avoir de larges rues? A.: M., chaque grande ville doit avoir de . . . (b) Qu'est ce qui doit avoir d'immenses hotels? (c) Qu'est ce qui doit avoir de belles eglises? (d) Qu'est ce qui doit avoir de hauts edifices? (e) Qu'est ce qui doit avoir de grands magasins? 2. (a) Qu'est ce qui doit aussi avoir d'habiles adminis- trateurs ? (b) Qu'est ce qui doit aussi avoir de bonnes ecoles? (c) Qu'est ce qui doit aussi avoir de jolies maisons? (d) Qu'est ce qui doit aussi avoir de beaux pares? 3. (a) Qui apergoit de hauts arbres dans les pares? BEGINNER S FRENCH 79 (b) Qui est ce qui aper^oit de longues avenues dans les pares? (c) Qui apergoit de jolies fleurs dans les pares? (d) Qui est ee qui apergoit de vastes pelouses dans les pares ? (e) Qui aper^oit de petits laes dans les pares? 4. (a) Qui est ee qui regoit de bon the des magasins de la ville? (b) Qui regoit d'exeellent eafe des magasins de la ville? (c) Qui est ee qui regoit de bonne huile des magasins * de la ville? (d) Qui regoit de mauvaise viande des magasins de la ville? 5. Qu'est ee que ehaque grande ville doit avoir? A.: M., elle doit avoir de . . . 6. Qu'est ee que les grandes villes doivent aussi avoir? 7. Qu'est ee que j'apergois dans les pares? 8. Que reeevez vous des niagasins de la ville? 158. Grammar Drill 1. Some fish, some good fish; eream, bad eream; wine, good wine ; beer, exeellent beer ; radishes, bad radishes. 2. Some tea, some bad tea ; glasses, beautiful glasses ; eheese, good eheese; mustard, good mustard; water, bad water ; olives, exeellent olives. 3. Some masters, some skilful masters ; flags, large flags ; paper, good paper ; pens, bad pens ; sehools, beautiful sehools ; playgrounds, small playgrounds. 4. I am reeeiving; do you receive? We do not receive. 5. He must; must they? I must not; we must. 6. She notices ; are we noticing ? you do not notice ; I notice. 8o beginner's FRENCH 159. Translation I. The schools of the city are immense buildings. 2. They have wide doors and high windows. 3. Each school must also have vast class rooms, long blackboards and immense playgrounds. 4. We must also have excellent administrators and skilful teachers. 5. The pupils must have good paper and good pens. 6. You must have large cities. 7. They have beautiful avenues and long streets. 8. Strangers^ notice also beautiful hotels, large parks, high churches and vast stores. 9. I notice in this park beautiful flowers, large lakes, beautiful trees and pretty lawns. 10. Hotels, must have large dining rooms. 11. At each meal, the waiters place in front of the boarders good water, excellent cream and good milk. 12. They must not place bad wine or bad beer on the tables. 13. A village has small houses and bad streets. 14. I receive from the small store of the village bad tea, excellent chocolate and good coffee. 15. We have excellent friends in this village. SIXTEENTH LESSON Rules Review §§ 64, 137, 149, 150. 160. Un mur gris, a gray wall, Un chapeau rond, a round hat. Un fruit doux, o nveet fruit. Un livre frangais, a French book. Un visage souriant, a smiling face. French adjectives (a) of color, (b) shape, (c) taste, (d) nationality and participles used adjectively are placed after the noun they qualify. 1 Supply the definite article M I37» 160, 162, 163. 170. L'ceil bleu, the blue eye. Les yenx bleus, the blue eyes. 1 . The plural of ceil is irregular : yeux. 2. The plural of bleu is regular: bleus. (Cf. 50«) 171 • Un gateau delicieux. A delicious cake. Des gateaux delicieux. Some delicious cakes. Une figue delicieuse. A delicious fig. I. Masculine adjectives ending in -x are alike in both numbers. (Cf. exception to 30.) 1 Supply f/te. 2 Replace by at. ^ Supply into. * Supply io. 5 Omit. BEGINNER^S FRENCH 85 2. Adjectives ending in -x replace -x by -se in the feminine. 172. S^^ ^ dry sees Sseche seches doux ) sweet, ( douce doux ^ soft I douces The preceding adjectives have an irregular feminine. I73. Imperfect of avoir {to have). j'avais, / had, I did have, nous avions / was having, I used to have tu avais vous aviez il or elle avait ils or elles avaient 174. Vocabulary I'oeil (m.), the eye. les yeux, the eyes. les cheveux (m.), the hair. le manteau, the cloak. le dessert, the dessert. le gateau, the cake. le raisin, the grape. la joue, the cheek. la robe, the dress. la figue, the fig. la fin, the end. la suite, the continuation. la droite, the right side. la gauche, the left side. de gauche, bleu, -e, blue. rose, rosy. pale, pale. blond, -e, fair, blond. noir, -e, black, dark. brun, -e, brown. rond, -e, round. plat, -e, flat. delicieux, -se, delicious, sec, seche, dry. .dou-x, -ce, sweet, soft. mur, -e, ripe. suite et fin, concluded. de droite, on the right side, on the left side. 175. Text {Suite et Fin). I. Ma voisine de droite a des^yeux bleus, des joues roses, des cheveux blonds, des robes et des manteaux gris et des chapeaux ronds. 86 beginner's FRENCH 2. Ma voisine de gauche a des yeux gris, des joues pales, des cheveux noirs, des robes et des manteaux bleus ou bruns et des chapeaux plats. 3. Au dessert, nous mangeons des gateaux de- licieux, des figues seches, des raisins doux et des fruits murs. 176. Transposition 1. Conjugate every sentence in the present indicative and repeat the subject and the verb before every direct object. Ex.: I. J'ai des yeux bleus, j'ai des. . . 2. Replace the present by the imperfect and repeat the subject and the verb before every direct object. Ex. : i. Ma voisine de droite avait des yeux bleus ; elle avait des . . . 3. Use the three interrogative forms. Ex.: (a) Ma voi- sine de droite a-t-elle des yeux bleus,. . . ? (b) Est ce que ma voisine de droite a des yeux bleus,. . . ? (c) Ma voisine de droite a des yeux bleus, . . . n'est ce pas ? 177. Questions 1. (a) Qui a des yeux bleus? A.: M., ma voisine de droite a des yeux bleus. (b) Qui est ce qui a des joues roses? (c) Qui a des cheveux blonds? (d) Qui est ce qui a des robes grises? (e) Qui a des manteaux gris? (/") Qui est ce qui a des chapeaux ronds? 2. (a) Qui est ce qui a des yeux gris? (b) Qui a des joues pales? (c) Qui est ce qui a des cheveux noirs? (d) Qui a des robes bleues ou brunes? (e) Qui est ce qui a des manteaux bleus ou bruns? (f) Qui a des chapeaux plats? beginner's FRENCH 87 3. (a) Qui mange des gateaux delicieux au dessert? (b) Qui est ce qui mange des figues seches au dessert? (c) Qui mange des raisins doux au dessert? (d) Qui est ce qui mange des fruits murs au dessert? 4. Qu'est ce que votre voisine de droite a? A,: M., elle a des yeux bleus, des . . . 5. Qu'a votre voisine de gauche? 6. Que mangez vous au dessert? 178. Grammar Drill 1. Some ^ tea, green tea, good tea, English tea, bad tea, she pours no tea; some mustard, good mustard, French mustard, fresh mustard ; we have no mustard ; some bread, good bread, French bread, bad bread, white bread, fresh bread; you have no bread. 2. Some eyes, large eyes, brown eyes, beautiful eyes; some dresses, blue dresses, fine dresses ; some hats, black hats, beautiful hats, round hats ; she has no hats. 3. Some figs, good figs, fresh figs, delicious figs, bad figs, dry figs, fine figs, ripe figs; some cakes and grapes, delicious cakes and grapes. 179. Translation (a) I. We enter the^ store. 2. My sisters choose gray hats and clqaks and you choose black dresses and hats. 3. Our neighbor on the left is prettier than your neighbor on the right. 4. She has rosy cheeks. 5. She is also younger. 6. She blushes more quickly. 7. She has large brown eyes. 8. They are very sweet. 9. These girls have fair hair^ and those girls have black hair.^ 10. Those ladies are choosing round hats and these ladies are asking for^ flat hats. * Supply info. * Use the plural. * Omit 88 beginner's FRENCH (b) I. Our hostess had pale cheeks and gray hair.^ 2. At each meal, the boarders used to eat excellent fish, fresh vegetables and good meat. 3. Yes, I was also eating dry bread. 4. The maid servants used to pour fresh water in our glasses and bad tea in our cups. 5. At dessert,^ we had ripe figs, white grapes and sweet fruit.^ 6. We had no coffee. 180. Reading Lesson TROIS EXCELLENTS MEDECINS Quelques docteurs eminents de la capitale entouraient le lit de mort de Dumoulin, le plus celebre medecin de son temps. A leurs expressions de douleur et de regret, il repond : (( Messieurs, je laisse derriere moi trois grands medecins.)) Chacun, esperant entendre prononcer son nom, presse le mourant de preciser. Dumoulin murmure avec effort : « L'eau, I'exercice et la diete.)) EIGHTEENTH LESSON Rules Review §§ 50, 171, 173- 181. Beaucoup de pain, much bread, Beaucoup d'amis, many friends. Peu de viande, little meat. Peu de crayons, few pencils. Such words as beaucoup, peu, etc., are called adverbs of quantity in French. They always require the preposition de (without the article unless it is used in EngHsh) before the noun or nouns that they modify. 1 Use the plural. * Supply ^Ae. BEGINNER S FRENCH 89 182. Avez vous beaucoup de livres? J*en ai; j'en ai beaucoup; j'en ai cent; je n'en ai pas. Have you hooks? I have some; I have many; I have a hundred; I have none. 1. When a noun is understood after some, a noun of quantity or measure, an adverb of quantity, or a number, it is expressed in French in the form of the pronoun en {of it, of them) immediately placed before the verb. 2. None is translated by n'en (verb) pas. 183. Le verrou, the holt; les verrous, the holts. Le bijou, the jewel; les bijoux, the jewels. Le joujou, the toy; les joujoux, the toys. Nouns ending in -on form their plural according to the general rule except half a dozen which take x. 184. Imperfect of etre {to he). j'etais, / zvas, I used to he nous etions tu etais Vous etiez il or elle etait ils or elles etaient 185. Vocabulary I'oncle, the uncle. I'oiseau (m.), the bird. le joujou, the toy. le bijou, the jewel. le jeu, the game. la famille, the family. la tante, the aunt. la niece, the niece. la fille, the daughter. nombreu-x, -se, numerous, large. heureu-x, -se, happy. joyeu-x, -se, joyful. . beaucoup, m,uch, many, a great deal. tant, so much, so many. autant, as much, as many. peu, little, few. moins, less, fewer. plus, more. assez, enough. trop, too much, too many. combien, how much, hozv many. que, than, as (when following an- other as or so or same). mais, but. 90 BEGINNER S FRENCH i86. Text 1. Votre famille etait tres nombreuse. 2. Vous^aviez beaucoup d'oncles et de tantes. 3. Vous^aviez autant de neveux que de nieces, mais moins de cousines que de cousins. 4. Vos fils n etaient pas joyeux : ils^avaient beaucoup d'oiseaux, mais peu de joujoux et de jeux ; ils n'en^avaient pas assez. 5. Vos filles etaient^heureuses : elles^avaient beaucoup plus de bijoux, de chapeaux et de robes que leurs^amies ; elles_en_avaient trop. 187. Transposition 1. Replace votre in the first sentence by the other pos- sessive adjectives singular. Ex. : Ma (ta. . . ) famille. . . 2. Replace vos in the first clause of sentences 4 and 5 by the other possessive adjectives singular and plural. Ex. : 4. Mon (ton. . . ) fils. . . 3. Conjugate the sentences 2, 3, 4 and 5 iri the imper- fect. Ex. : 2. J'avais. . . Tu avais. . . 4. Replace the imperfect by the present. Ex.: i. Votre famille est . . . 5. Drop the adverbs of quantity, the comparisons, the word mais and the negations. Ex.: 2. Vous aviez des oncles et des . . . 188. Questions 1. Qu'est ce qui etait nombreux? A.: M., votre fa- mille. . . 2. (a) Qui avait beaucoup d'oncles? (b) Qui est ce qui avait beaucoup de tantes? BEGINNER S FRENCH Ql 3. (a) Qui avait autant de neveux que de nieces? (b) Qui est ce qui avait moins de cousines que de cousins ? 4. (a) Qui n'etait pas joyeux? (b) Qui est ce qui avait beaucoup d'oiseaux? (c) Qui avait peu de joujoux? (d) Qui est ce qui avait peu de jeux? (e) Qui n'avait pas assez de joujoux? (f) Qui est ce qui n'avait pas assez de jeux? 5. (a) Qui est ce qui etait heureux? (b) Qui avait beaucoup plus de bijoux que ses amies? (c) Qui est ce qui avait beaucoup plus de chapeaux que ses amies? (d) Qui avait beaucoup plus de robes que ses amies? (e) Qui est ce qui avait trop de bijoux? (/) Qui avait trop de chapeaux ? (g) Qui est ce qui avait trop de robes? Use the present indicative and the pronoun en whenever it is placed between parentheses. 6. Ma famille est nombreuse, n'est ce pas? A.: Oui, M., elle est tres nombreuse. 7. (a) Combien d'oncles est ce que j'ai? A,: M., vous en avez beaucoup. (b) Combien de tantes est ce que j'ai? (en) 8. (a) Est ce que j'ai autant de neveux que de nieces? (en) (b) Est ce que j'ai moins de cousines que de cou- sins? (en) 9. (a) Mes fils ne sont ils pas joyeux? (b) Combien d'oiseaux ont ils? (en) (c) Combien de joujoux ont ils? (en) (d) Combien de jeux ont ils? (en) (e) Ont ils assez de joujoux? (en) (/) Est ce qu'ils ont assez de jeux? (en) 92 BEGINNER S FRENCH lo. (a) Mes filles sont heureuses, n'est ce pas? (b) Ont elles beaucoup plus de bijoux que leurs amies? (en) (c) Est ce qu 'elles ont beaucoup plus de chapeaux que leurs amies? (en) (d) Elles ont beaucoup plus de robes que leurs amies, n'est ce pas? (en) (e) Ont elles trop de bijoux? (en) (/) Elles ont trop de chapeaux, n'est ce pas? (en) (g) Est ce qu'elles ont trop de robes? (en) 189. Grammar Drill 1. Many families, too many friends, few sons, so many daughters, more cousins ; we have no nieces. 2. How many toys ? many jewels, fewer games, as many birds; they have no books. 3. More curtains, fewer cloaks, many dresses, too many hats; she has no boxes. 4. Much paper, many pencils, too many pens, more pupils, how many books? we have no knives. 5. Too much salt, meat enough,^ little beer, -much bread, less pepper; we eat no fruit. 6. Little coffee, how much milk? so much tea, more grapes than figs, as much wine as water; you don't see any tables. 190. Translation (a) I. Was his family large? 2. How many sons had he? 3. He had many. 4. But he had fewer sons than daughters. 5. How many nephews had your masters? 6. They had few, but they had many nieces. 7. Had you many friends in this town? 8. I had many. 9. I had 1 Say : enough meat. BEGINNER S FRENCH 93 twenty. lo. You had as many as your brother, ii. He had none. 12. Were you numerous? 13. We were ten. (b) I. Our neighbor's nieces are not joyful. 2. They have not enough dresses, cloaks and hats. 3. Their friends have fewer and are happy. 4. My cousins arq happy. 5. They have so many birds, books and games! 6. They have much more than their little friends. 7. These children have too many toys and those children have none. NINETEENTH LESSON Rules Review §§ 40» 85, 98. 191. Un verre d'eau, a glass of water, Une livre de bonbons, one pound of candy. Nouns of quantity and measure require the preposition de (without the article unless it is also expressed in English) before the noun or nouns that they modify. 192. Indicative present of preferer (to prefer). je prefere, / prefer nous preferons tu preferes vous preferez il or elle prefere ils or elles preferent Imperfect: je preferais, etc. Some verbs of the first conjugation have an e before the last syllable of the infinitive; that e is replaced by an e before the mute endings e, es, e. 193. Indicative present of mener (to lead, to take). je mene, / lead, I take nous menons tu'menes vous menez il or elle mene ils or elles menent Imperfect : je menais, / was leading, taking, etc. 94 BEGINNER S FRENCH Some verbs of the first conjugation have an unaccented e before the last syllable of the infinitive; it is replaced by an e whenever the next syllable is mute. 194. I. Indicative present of appeler {to call). j'appelle, / call nous appelons tu appelles vous appelez il or elle appelle ils or elles appellent Imperfect : j 'appelais, / was calling. 2. Indicative present of Jeter (to throw). je jette, / throw nous jetons tu jettes vous jetez il or elle jette ils or elles jettent Imperfect: je jetais, / zvas throwing, etc. Verbs ending in -eler and -eter double the 1 or the t, instead of replacing the unaccented e by an e, before a silent syllable. Cf. in English, to impel, impeWed ; to pet, petted, 195. Vocabulary le desir, the wish. le cocher, the coachman. le theatre, the theater. la mere, the mother. I'invitee (f,), the guest. la demoiselle, the young lady. lassiettee (f.), the plateful. la fraise, the strawberry. la douzaine, the dozen. la limonade, the lemonade. preparer, to prepare. cedej-, to yield. preferer, to prefer. mener, to lead, to take. appeler, to call. generalement, generally. pour, for. 196. Text 1. Ma mere cede a mes desirs. 2. Mon frere appelle un cocher. 3. Je mene mes^amies au pare ou au theatre. 4. La servante doit preparer pour mes^invitees une tasse de the ou un verre de limonade. BEGINNER S FRENCH 95 5. Ces demoiselles preferent generalement une assiettee de fraises, une douzaine de bonbons et un verre d'eau fraiche. 197. Transposition 1. Conjugate every sentence in the present of the in- dicative. Ex. : I . Je cede aux desirs de ma f ille. Tu cedes aux desirs de ta . . . 2. Replace the present by the imperfect. Ex. : i . Ma mere cedait a . . . 3. Use the three interrogative forms except in sentence 3 (see 86. 2). Ex.: i. (a) Ma mere cede-t-elle a...? (b) Est ce que ma mere cede a. . . (c) Ma mere cede a . . . , n'est ce pas ? 198. Questions 1. Qui cede a vos desirs? A.: M., ma mere cede a. . . 2. Qui est ce qui appelle un cocher? 3. Qui mene ses amies au pare ou au theatre? 4. Qui est ce qui doit preparer pour vos invitees nne tasse de the ou un verre de Hmonade? 5. (a) Qui prefere generalement une assiettee de fraises ? (b) Qui est ce qui prefere generalement une douzaine de bonbons ? (c) Qui prefere generalement un verre d'eau fraiche? 6. A quoi madame^ votre mere cede-t-elle? 7. Qui monsieur^ votre frere appelle-t-il ? 8. Oil menez vous vos amies? 9. Qu*est ce que la servante doit preparer pour vos in- vitees ? 10. Qu'est ce que ces demoiselles preferent generalement? 1 We use monsieur, madame, mademoiselle or their plurals as a mark of politeness before the adjective votre or vos followed by a noun express- ing a member of the family. 96 beginner's FRENCH 199. Grammar Drill Replace the dashes by the preposition de. 1. Un verre — vin, une tasse — lait, une douzaine — fruits, une assiettee — raisins. 2. Deux douzaines — amis, quatre assiettees — gateaux, cinq tasses — the, trois verres — eau. 3. Beaucoup — legumes, moins — pain, plus — fraises, assez — limonade, trop — bonbons. 4. He prefers, do we prefer? they prefer. 5. I am leading, do you lead ? she is not leading. 6. We call, does she call? I am calling. 7. You are throwing, do they throw? he is throwing. 8. I am yielding, do we yield? they do not yield. 200. Translation I. What do you prefer? 2. Do you prefer a cup of coffee or a glass of wine? 3. We prefer a cup of chocolate or tea and a glass of water. 4. We yield to your wishes. 5. You are our guests. 6. We have good fresh, water. 7. Whom are you calling? 8. I am calling the maid serv- ant. 9. She is preparing the lemonade for our friends. 10. We are going down to the dining room. 11. You enter first.^ 12. These young ladies are seated near the windows. 13. They generally speak of their dresses, hats,^ cloaks and jewels. 14. These ladies prefer round hats, gray cloaks and brown dresses ; those ladies prefer flat hats, blue cloaks and black dresses. 15. You notice on the table many plates, two dozen (of) glasses and cups and four or five platefuls of cakes, candies and fruit.^ 16. Does your sister prefer straw- berries or grapes? 17. She prefers strawberries. 18. Our brothers are calling three coachmen. 19. We are taking our guests to the park. 20. I prefer the theater, but I yield to the wishes of my sister and my friends. * Supply the. ^ Supply of their before every noun. « Use the plural. BEGINNER S FRENCH 97 TWENTIETH LESSON Rules 201. I. Dauser (to dance). FUTURE CONDITIONAL je danserai, je danserais, ■• / shall or -mil dance I should or would dance tu danseras tu danserais il or elle dansera il or elle danserait nous danserons nous danserions vous danserez vous danseriez ils or elles danseront ils or elles danseraient 2. RoTigir (to blush). je rougirai, etc., je rougirais, etc., ' / shall or will blush I should or would blush 3. Tendre (to extend). je tendrai, etc., je tendrais, etc., / shall or will extend I should or would extend 4. Recevoir (to receive). je recevrai, etc., je recevrais, etc., / shall or will receive I should or would receive The endings of the future are : {-ai r -ons -as plural 1 -ez ' -a l -ont The endings of the conditional^ are: -ions singular -j -ais plural ■{ -iez C -ais r -i( \ -ais plural ■{ -i( ait I -aient 1::; 1 It will be noticed that the imperfect and the conditional have the same endings. Those of the imperfect are added to the root and those of the conditional to the infinitive. 98 beginner's FRENCH The future and the conditional of any regular verb are formed by adding respectively the above endings to the in- finitive. Note. Drop the final e of the infinitive of the third conjugation and -oi of the five verbs ending in -evoir be- fore adding the terminations. 202. I. AvQir (to have). FUTURE CONDITIONAL j'aurai, / shall or zvill have tu auras il or elle aura nous aurons vous aurez • ils or elles auront 2. Etrc (to be), je serai, / shall or will be tu seras il or elle sera nous scrons vous serez ils or elles seront J aurais, / should or would have tu aurais il or elle aurait nous aurions vous auriez ils or elles auraient je serais, / should or would be tu serais il or elle serait nous serions vous seriez ils or elles seraient The future and the conditional of avoir and etre are formed irregularly. 203. Pref6rer {to prefer). je prefererai, / shall or will prefer tu prefereras il or elle preferera nous prefererons vous prefererez ils or elles prefereront je prefererais, / should or would prefer tu prefererais il or elle prefererait nous prefererions vous prefereriez ils or elles prefereraient 99 In the future and the conditional of verbs of the first conjugation having an e before the last syllable of the in- finitive there is no change in the spelling. (Cf. 192.) 204. I. Mener {to lead, take). FUTURE CONDITIONAL je menerai, je menerais, / shall or will lead I should or would lead tu meneras tu menerais il or elle menera il or elle menerait nous menerons nous menerions vous menerez vous meneriez ils or elles meneront ils or elles meneraient 2. Appeler (to call). j 'appellerai, etc., j'appellerais, etc., / shall or will call I should or would call 3. Jeter (to throw). je jetterai, je jetterais, / shall or will throw I should or would throw Rules I93> 194 are applied also in the future and the con- ditional. 205, I. Acheter (to buy). INDICATIVE PRESENT j*achete, / buy nous achetons tu achetes vous achetez il or elle achete ils or elles achetent IMPERFECT j'achetais, / was buying FUTURE CONDITIONAL j'acheterai, / shall buy j'acheterais, / should buy lOO BEGINNER S FRENCH 2. GtlBT '(to freeze). INDICATIVE PRESENT il gele, it freezes FUTURE il gelera, it will freeze IMPERFECT CONDITIONAL il gelait, it was freezing il gelerait, it would freeze The verbs acheter, geler and a few others follow rule 193 instead of I94> i-c, the unaccented e preceding the last syllable of the infinitive becomes e before a mute vowel and the t or the 1 is not doubled. 206, Lundi, samedi, le 14 mars. On Monday, on Saturday, on March 14. The preposition on is omitted in French before dates. 207. Une demi douzaine, half a dozen. Une douzaine et demie, a dozen and a half. Quatre livres et demie, four pounds and a half. Demi agrees only when it follows the noun. However, according to the decree of the Minister of Public Instruction (February, 1901), the agreement of demi, when preceding a noun, will no longer be considered a mistake. 208. Vocabulary ranniversaire (m.^, the anniver- sary. le panier, the basket. le bonbon, the candy. le biscuit, the biscuit. le plaisir, the pleasure. le cri, the cry. I'ordre (m.), the order. la naissance, the birth. la livre, the pound. la douzaine, the dozen. la demi douzaine, the half-dozen. la confusion, the confusion. aimable, amiable, kind. demi, -e, half. celebrer, to celebrate. repeter, to repeat. regner, to reign. Jeter, to throw, to utter. acheter, to buy. jouer, to play. amener, to bring. hi en, very. plusieurs, several. beginner's FRENCn iOI 209. Text ,'^ ^;- '>-^ ^"-; ^^» • "'•> 1. Lundi, je celebrerai mon^anniversaire de naissance. 2. Notre servante achetera plusieurs paniers de fruits, quatre livres et demie de bonbons et une douzaine de boites de biscuits. 3. Mes freres seront bien^aimables; ils^ame- neront une demi douzaine d'amis. 4. Nous^aurons beaucoup de plaisir ; nous jouerons, nous danserons, nous jetterons des cris. 5. La confusion regnera dans la maison. 6. Vous repeterez mes^ordres a la servante. 210. Transposition 1. Conjugate every sentence (except the fifth) in the future. Ex.: i. Lundi, je celebrerai mon...; lundi, tu celebreras ton... 2. J'acheterai . . . ; tu acheteras... 2. Replace the future (a) by the present of the indicative. Ex.: i. Je ce- lebre mon. . . {h) by the imperfect of the indicative. Ex. : i. Lundi, je celebrais mon... (c) by the conditional. Ex.: i. Lundi, je celebrerais mon . . . 211. Questions 1. Quand celebrerez vous votre anniversaire de nais- sance? A.: Je celebrerai. . . 2. (fl) Combien de paniers de fruits votre servante achetera-t-elle ? {b) Combien de livres de bonbons achetera-t-elle? {c) Combien de boites de biscuits achetera-t-elle? I02 BEGINNER S FRENCH 3. Polinqucd vostireres seront ils bien aimables? 4. (a) Qu'est ce que vous aurez? (b) Jouerez vous? (c) Danserez vous? (d) Que jetterez vous? 5. Ou regnera la confusion? 6. Qu'est ce que je repeterai a la servante? 7. Que celebrerez vous lundi? A.: Je celebrerai mon. . . 8. Qu'est ce que la servante achetera? 9. (a) Qui sera bien aimable? (b) Qui ameneront ils? 10. (a) Qui aura beaucoup de plaisir ? (b) Qui est ce qui jouera? (c) Qui dansera? (d) Qui est ce qui jettera des cris? 11. Qu'est ce qui regnera dans la maison? 12. A qui repeterai je vos ordres? 212. Grammar Drill 1. A cup of chocolate, a glass of water, a plateful of olives. 2. A pound of candies, half a pound of bread, two pounds and a half of tea, a basket of fruit. 3. Three glasses of red wine, four baskets of fresh bis- cuits, five boxes of ripe strawberries. 4. A dozen^ friends, half a dozen^ young ladies, two dozens and a half boxes of flowers. 5. Little pleasure, too many cries, more lemonade ; I have no wish. 6. I repeat, do you repeat? we were repeating, they will not repeat, I should repeat. 7. He is throwing, do we throw? I was throwing, shall you throw? she would not throw. ^ Supply o/. 2 Say : a half dozen of. BEGINNER S FRENCH ) IO3 8. We do not buy, are they buying? I used to buy, who will buy ? you would buy. 9. You* celebrate, does she celebrate? we are celebrat- ing, he was not celebrating, shall we celebrate? they would not celebrate. 10. Are you calling? I am not calling, who was calling? you shall not call, would she call ? 213. Translation I. We shall celebrate on Monday the birthday of my brother. 2. How many guests will you have? 3. We have many , guests when we celebrate that anniversary. 4. My brother will be the host and I shall be the hostess. 5. We shall receive our little friends in the immense dining room. 6. My cousin generally^ brings several friends. 7. Will you utter cries? 8. We shall utter no cries. 9. But con- fusion^ and pleasure^ will reign in the house. 10. The guests will play or dance to the sound of the instruments. II. They will have a great deal of pleasure. 12. I shall buy a dozen baskets of fruit. 13. I shall choose ripe fruit. 14. Our mother will be kind. 15. She will yield to my brother's wishes. 16. And we shall also^ buy six pounds and a half of biscuits and a half dozen boxes of candies. 17. I prefer candies^ to cakes.^ 18. We shall have no cakes. 19. The maid servants will pour lemonade in the glasses and tea in the cups of the guests. 20. I yield to your wishes. 21. I shall repeat your orders. 22. You are very kind. 1 See 118. 2. 2 Supply the. I04 BEGINNERS FRENCH TWENTY-FIRST LESSON GENERAL REVIEW Review especially §§ 64, 137, 150, 162, 163, 182. 214. Vocabulary une centaine, (about a) hundred. nombreu-x, -se, numerous. magnifique, magnificent. exquis, -e, exquisite. charmant, -e, charming, pleasant. sauvage, wild. le boulevard, the boulevard. I'habitant, the inhabitant. I'air (m.), the air. le beurre, the butter. ' I'espace (m.), the space. le bosquet, the grove. ranimal (m.), the animal. I'elephant (m.), the elephant, le lion, the lion. le tigre, the tiger. le serpent, the snake. le singe, the monkey. la campagne. the country. I'allee (f.), the lane. la menagerie, the menagerie. enorme, enormous. superbe, superb. feroce, ferocious. vilain, -e, ugly. tout, -e, tous, toutes, all, every, any. il y a, there is or there are. il y avait, there was or there were. il y aura, there will be. il y aurait, there would be. 215. Text 1. Dans toute ville, il y a de nombreux boule- vards, des magasins magnifiques, de tres beaux theatres, beaucoup d'habitants, et ainsi de suite. 2. A la campagne, il y a de bon^air, des fruits delicieux, de jolies fleurs, du lait exquis, du beurre et du fromage frais, beaucoup d'espace, nlais peu d'habitants. 3. Dans chaque pare, il y a de longues^allees, de petits lacs bleus, de beaux^oiseaux, d'immenses pelouses, des bosquets charmants, des centaines d'arbres, etc. BEGINNER S FRENCH IO5 4. Dans^une menagerie, il y a des^animaux sauvages, d enormes^elephants, des lions superbes, des tigres feroces, de longs serpents, de vilains singes, etc. 216. Transposition N.B. Repeat the expression il y a before every noun in all the changes. 1. Drop the adjectives and the nouns, and adverbs of quantity and replace mais by et. Ex. : i . Dans toute ville, il y a des boulevards, il y a des magasins, il y a . . . 2. Replace the present (a) by the imperfect. Ex.: i. Dans toute ville, il y avait de . . . (b) by the future. Ex. : i. Dans toute ville, il y aura de nombreux boulevards, il y aura des . . . (c) by the conditional. Ex.: i. Dans toute ville, il y aurait de nombreux boulevards, il y aurait des ... 217. Questions 1. (a) Dans toute ville, y a-t-il de nombreux boulevards ? A.: Oui, M., il y a de nombreux boulevards or il y en a.^ (b) Est ce qu'il y a des magasins magnifiques? (c) II y a de tres beaux theatres, n'est ce pas? (d) Y a-t-il beaucoup d'habitants? 2. (a) A la campagne, est ce qu'il y a de bon air? (b) II y a des fruits delicieux, n'est ce pas? (c) Y a-t-il de jolies fleurs a la campagne? (d) Est ce qu'il y a du lait exquis? (e) Y a-t-il du beurre et du fromage frais? (/) II y a beaucoup d'espace, n'est ce pas ? (g) Est ce qu'il y a peu d'habitants? 1 Both answers should be required throughout. I06 beginner's FRENCH 3. (a) Dans chaque pare, il y a de nombreuses allees, n'est ce pas? (b) Y a-t-il de petits lacs bleus? (c) Y a-t-il de beaux oiseaux? (d) Est ce qu'il y a d'immenses pelouses? (e) II y a des bosquets charmants, n'est ce pas? (/) II y a des centaines d'arbres, n'est ce pas? 4. (a) Dans une menagerie, n'y a-t-il pas des^ animaux sauvages? A.: Si, M., il y a des animaux sauvages, or il y en a. (b) Est ce qu'il n'y a pas d'enormes elephants? (c) N'y a-t-il pas des lions superbes? (d) Est ce qu'il n'y a pas des tigres feroces? (e) N'y a-t-il pas de longs serpents? (f) Est ce qu'il n'y a pas de vilains singes? 5. Dans toute ville, qu'y a-t-il? A.: ^I., il y a de nom- breux boulevards, il y a des. . . 6. A la campagne, qu'est ce qu'il y a? 7. Dans chaque pare, qu'est ce qu'il y a? 8. Dans une menagerie, qu'y a-t-il ? (Negative answers.) 9. Y a-t-il peu de boulevards dans les villes? Non, M., il n'y a pas peu de boulevards, il y a de nombreux boule- vards, or il n'y en a pas peu, il y en a beaucoup. 10. Est ce qu'il y a beaucoup d'espace et d'air dans les villes ? 11. Est ce qu'il y a des theatres a la campagne? 12. A la campagne, y a-t-il beaucoup d'habitants? 1 This is a rhetorical question in which the meaning is not really negative. Therefore we use c/^s, not ^^. BEGINNER S FRENCH IO7 218. Grammar Drill 1. Some air, good air, fresh air, much air ; there is no air, 2. Some stores, large stores, French stores, numerous stores, hundreds of stores ; there are no stores. 3. Some animals, fine animals, wild animals, few animals, a dozen animals ; there were no animals. 4. Some space, too much space ; there is no space. 5. Some lakes, small lakes, blue lakes, small blue lakes, pleasant lakes, numerous lakes, so many lakes ; I notice no lakes. 6. Some flowers, beautiful flowers, exquisite flowers, red flowers, boxes of flowers ; I do not buy any flowers. 7. There is, is there? there is not; there are, are there? there are not. 8. There was; was there ? there was not ; there were, were there? there were not. 9. There will be, there would be; would there be? will there be? there will not be, there would not be. 219. Translation I. In the schools of this city there are numerous class rooms and vast anterooms. 2. There are in our class room many desks and benches, high windows, long blackboards, immense maps, but few pupils. 3. There are in a large city magnificent avenues and streets, numerous schools and churches, immense hotels, high buildings and hundreds of strangers. 4. There are in the dining room of this hotel numerous tables, pretty chairs and many waiters. 5. At the windows, there are blue shades and yellow curtains. 6. There were on our table clean plates and glasses, fresh cream and milk, delicious radishes, exquisite figs and grapes, many beautiful flowers, and so forth. 7. There will be in the menagerie of the park fine lanes, small groves, and many I08 beginner's FRENCH animals : tigers, elephants, lions, monkeys, snakes, etc. 8. In the country there would be numerous birds, large lakes, high trees, and more air and space than in the cities. TWENTY-SECOND LESSON Rules Review §§ 41 > "6. 220. Ces bijoux sont beaux: celni ci est celui de ma tante, celni 1^ est celui de ma cousine. These jewels are fine: this one is that of my aunt, that one is my cousin's. Voici de jolies f raises : celles qui sont dans ce panier sont plus mures que celles que nous avons dans notre jardin. Here are pretty strawberries: those which are in this basket are riper than those which we have in our garden. 1. Demonstrative pronouns. SINGULAR PLURAL Masculinb Fkminins Masculinb Fbmininb , . „ 1, ( that, those celui celle ceux celles \ , ^ the one, the ones celui ci celle ci ceux ci celles ci this, these celui la celle la ceux la celles la that, those Note. Ci and la are not used when the pronouns are followed by the preposition of or a relative pronoun. 2. The relative pronouns which, that are always ex- pressed in French and are translated by qui when subject and que (qu*) when direct object. 221. C'est mon frere. He is my brother. Ce sont mes freres. They are my brothers. C'est celui de mon oncle. It is my uncle's. Ce sont ceux de mon oncle. They are my uncle's. C*est le plus grand. He (it) is the largest. Ce sont les plus grands. They are the largest. BEGINNER S FRENCH IO9 He is, she is, it is, and they are are translated by c'est and ce sont when the attribute is a noun, a pronoun or a superlative. 222. Void son frere : c'est le meilleur homme du monde. Here is his brother: he is the best man in the world. In is translated by de after a superlative. 223. Lequel de ces enfants est votre cousin? Which one of these children is your cousin f Laquelle de ces jeunes filles est votre cousine? Which one of these young ladies is your cousin? Which, which one, interrogative pronoun, is translated by lequel, laquelle, lesquels, lesquelles. 224. Vocabulary le fauteuil, the armchair. le salon, the parlor. le jardin, the garden. la chambre, the room. confortable, comfortable. occuper, to occupy. louer, to rent, to let. vendre, to sell. a louer, for rent, to let. a vendre, for sale. voici, here is, here are. voila, there is, there are (when pointing to the person or ob- ject). 225. Text 1. Voici de jolis fauteuils; celui ci est celui de mon pere, celui la est celui de ma mere; c'est le plus confortable du salon. 2. Voila de belles* chambres: celle ci est celle de ma soeur, celle la est celle qui est3 louer; c'est la plus belle de la maison. 3. Voici de beaux jardins; ceux de droite sont ceux de mes neveux, ceux de gauche sont ceux que mon frere loue; ce sont les plus grands de la rue. no BEGINNERS FRENCH 4. Voila de jolies maisons; celles ci sont celles qui sont_a vendre, celles la sont celles que nos^amis occupent; ce sont les plus charmantes de la ville. 226. Transposition The first clause of every sentence must not be altered. 1. Put in the pkiral singular pronouns, adjectives and verbal forms, and vice versa. Ex.: 1. Voici de jolis fau- teuils : ceux ci sont . . . 2. Replace the present by the imperfect. 3. Use the interrogative forms. Ex.: i. (a) Voici... ; celui ci est ce celui de mon pere? (b) Est ce que celui ci est. . . ? (c) Celui ci est. . ., n'est ce pas? 227. Questions 1. (a) Lequel de ces fauteuils est celui de monsieur votre pere? A.: M., celui ci est... (b) Quel est celui de madame votre mere? (c) Est il confortable? 2. (a) Laquelle de ces chambres est celle de mademoi- selle votre soeur? (b) Quelle est celle qui est a louer? (c) Est elle belle? 3. (a) Lesquels de ces jardins sont ceux de messieurs vos neveux? ' (b) Quels sont ceux que monsieur votre frere loue? (f) Sont ils grands? 4. (a) Lesquelles de ces maisons sont celles qui sont a vendre ? (b) Quelles sont celles que vos amis occupent? (c) Sont elles charmantes? BEGINNERS FRENCH III 228. Grammar Drill Replace the dashes by the proper demonstrative adjective or pronoun. 1 . Voici des chapeaux : — de ma cousine est — qui est sur la table ; — qui sont sur la chaise sont — que je choisis, 2. Voila des robes: — la est — de sa soeur, — ci est — que — demoiselle achete. Pref erez vous — ci ou — la ? 3. Les oiseaux que vous apercevez sont — de — enfant ; — de mon frere sont dans sa chambre. Je prefere — ci a — la. 4. Voici des fraises : — ci sont plus f raiches que — qui sont dans — panier ; — sont les meilleures. 229. Translation I. Here are the friends (fem.) of my daughters. 2. I prefer these to those. 3. Those on the right are more cheer- ful than those on the left. 4. Which one of these young ladies is the prettiest? 5. The one who has a blue dress and a gray hat. 6. She is the sister of the stranger who occupies that house. 7. She is the most amiable girl in the parlor. 8. Who are these children? 9. They are my niece's.^ 10. Which one do you prefer ? 11. The one who is uttering cries is the one whom^ we prefer. 12. Those who are seated on the bench are not diligent. 13. There are pretty flowers and many vegetables in the gardens that we see.^ 14. Are these the ones which are to let? 15. This one is for sale, that one is my neighbor's. 16. It is the largest in the street. ^ Say : those of my niece. ^ que. * apercevoir. 112 BEGINNER S FRENCH TWENTY-THIRD LESSON Rules Review §§ 68, 173, 220. 230. I. Quel livre? quelle maison? What hook? what house f Which? or what? modifying a noun or used as attribute, is an interrogative adjective and is translated as above. , 2. qui? qui est ce qui? (de) qui? qui? qui est ce que ? 3. qu'est ce qui ? que? qu'est ce que ? (de) quoi? \ zvho? whom? (object of a preposition). whom? (direct object). what? (subject). > zvhat? (direct object). what? (object of a preposition). 4. Masculine lequel ? duquel ? auquel ? SINGULAR Feminine laquelle ? de laquelle? a laquelle ? which one? of or from which one? to or at which one? PLURAL Feminine lesquelles ? desquelles ? auxquelles ? The above list contains the interrogative adjectives (i) and the interrogative pronouns (2, 3, 4). Masculine lesquels ? desquels ? auxquels ? which ones? of or from which ones? to or at which ones? beginner's FRENCH II3 231. List of relative pronouns: 1. qui, who, which, that (subject). (de) qui, whom (object of a preposition). que, whom, which, that (direct object). 2. SINGULAR Masculine Feminine lequel laquelle which, who duquel (dont) de laquelle (dont) of or from which, whom auquel a laquelle to or at which, whom PLURAL Masculine Feminine lesquels lesquelles which, zvho desquels (dont) desquelles (dont) of or from which, whom auxquels auxquelles to or at which, whom Lequel, laquelle, lesquels, lesquelles (subject or direct object) are seldom used; they sometimes replace qui or que to avoid a double meaning. Duquel, etc., auquel, etc., are of constant use. 232. I. Le monsieur dont (de qui, duquel) je park. The gentleman of whom I am speaking. 2. Le monsieur dans la maison de qui (duquel) j'habite. The gentleman in whose house I live. The relative pronoun of whom or whose has three dif- ferent translations: de qui, duquel, etc., dont; the relative pronoun of which has two : duquel, etc., dont. Notice that dont is used only at the very beginning of a relative clause. If a preposition begins the relative clause (see example 2), dont cannot be used. 233. A qui est ce livre? JVhose book is this? A qui sont ces livres? Whose hooks are those? Such expressions are idiomatic and cannot be translated literally. Whose hook is this? must be replaced by: To whom is this hook? etc. ri4 BEGINNER S FRENCH - 234. Parler to speak; parle, spoken. rougir, to blush; rougi, blushed. perdre, to lose; perdu, lost. recevoir, to receive ; regu, received. avoir, to have; eu, had. etre, to be; ete, been. Past participles of regular verbs are formed by replacing respectively -er, -ir, -re of the infinitive by -e, -i, -u; of the verbs ending in -evoir by replacing -evoir by -u. The c of those ending in -cevoir takes then a cedilla : 5. Note. The past participles of avoir and etre are irreg- ular. 235. Past indefinite: J'ai (tu as, etc.) parle, rougi, perdu, regu, eu, ete. / have spoken, blushed, lost, received, had, been. Pluperfect. J'avais (tu avais, etc.) parle, rougi, perdu, regu, eu, ete. / had spoken, blushed, lost, received, had, been. Compound tenses are formed exactly as in English. 236. Vocabulary le voisinage, the neighborhood. la question, the question. demeurer, to reside. il est question de, it is a question of. avec, with. 237. Text 1. II est question du bal auquel nous^avons^as- siste. 2. La demoiselle avec qui (avec laquelle) vous^avez danse est tres jolie. 3. C'est une jeune fille dans le voisinage de laquelle (de qui) ma famille a demeure. BEGINNERS FRENCH II5 4. Ces^etrangers sont ceux dont (desquels, de qui) I'hotesse a parle. 5. Les fauteuils sur lesquels nous sommes^assis sont tres confortables. 238. Transposition 1. Conjugate every sentence. Ex.: i. II est question . . . j'ai assiste. 2. La demoiselle. . . j'ai danse. . . 3. C'est. . . j'ai demeure. 4. Ces etrangers.. . .j'ai parle. 5. Le fauteuil . . .je suis assis. . . 2. Replace the singular by the plural (except ** le voisi- nage ") and vice versa. Ex.: i. II est question des bals auxquels j'ai assiste. 3. Replace the present by the imperfect and the past in- definite by the pluperfect. Ex. : i. II etait question. . .nous avions ... 4. Use the interrogative forms. 5. Use the negative form in the principal clauses. 239. Questions (Negative answers.) 1. Est ce qu'il est question du bal auquel vous avez assiste? A.: Non, M., il n'est pas. . .nous avons. . . 2. La demoiselle avec laquelle j'ai danse, est elle tres jolie? 3. Est ce une jeune fille dans le voisinage de qui votre famille a demeure? 4. Est ce que ces etrangers sont ceux desquels I'hotesse a parle? 5. Les fauteuils sur lesquels vous etes assis, sont ils tres confortables ? 6. De quoi est il question? 7. Qui est tres jolie? A.: M., il est. . Il6 beginner's FRENCH 8. Qui est cette demoiselle? 9. Qui sont ces etrangers? 10. Comment sont les fauteuils sur lesquels vous etes assis ? 240. Grammar Drill 1. (a) Which book did you^ receive ? (b) Of what book did you speak? 2. (a) Who is this gentleman? (b) Of whom are you speaking ?2 (c) To whom did he sell his house? ((/) Whom did you notice? 3. (a) What is' on the table? (b) What did you sell? (c) Of what did they speak? 4. (a) Which of these teachers is your friend's? (b) Oi which of these teachers did you speak? (c) Which* of these teachers did you obey? (d) Which of these teachers did you like? 5. (a) The book which is on the table of the parlor is not the one that I have bought, (b) The gentleman of whom we are speaking,^ is a stranger, (c) The lady in whose garden^ we have been, is very pretty, (d) The child to whom you have spoken, is her son. (e) The garden in which we have been, is the largest in the neighborhood. 6. Whose toy is this? Whose are these games? Whose birds are those ? 241. Translation (a) I. Who are these gentlemen to whom you held^ out your^ hand? 2. They are those who -were at the balls at which I was present.^ 3. They are those in whose neighbor- hood your brother lived.^ 4. Of what did you speak ?^ 5. We spoke® of the trees which are growing in the garden ^ Replace did you, did they, etc., by have you, have they, etc. 2 Say: is it [a] question. ' Supply there. * Supply to. 6 Say: in the garden of whom. * Use the past indefinite. ' the. beginner's FRENCH II7 in which we were. 6. Whose flowers are these? 7. They are those of the children of the hostess. 8. Which would you prefer? 9. These or those? The red or the white? 10. I should prefer those near which you are standing. 11. I prefer these. 12. Of which do you speak ? 13. Those of which I speak are the ones which are near the wall, far from the bench on which you are seated. 14. They are very beautiful. 15. They are the most beautiful in the whole^ garden. (b) I. The family in whose house we lived^ rent^ rooms. 2. Those, the windows of which you see,* are the ones which are to let. 3. Here are those of which I spoke.^ 4. This one is that of a stranger whose friend my nephew is.^ 5. Which one would you rent? 6. I should probably choose this. 7. From the windows of the room in which we are, we see the country. 8. It has also a stove, a table, chairs and arm- chairs, white shades and curtains. 9. It is the most cheerful in the whole^ neighborhood. 10. The chair on which I am seated, is comfortable. 11. Those on which you are, are green and yellow. 12. They are not pretty colors. 1 Use the past indefinite. f 2 Say : of all the , . . 3 Uge the singular. * Say : Those of which you see the windows. fi Say : of whom my nephew is the friend. ii8 BEGINNER S FRENCH TWENTY-FOURTH LESSON Rules PLURAL Mascuunr Fbmininb les miens les miennes les tiens les tiennes les siens les siennes les notres les votres les leurs 243. Le fauteuil que j'ai achate, the armchair which I bought. Les fauteuils que j'ai achetes, the armchairs which I bought. 'Lai chambre que j'ai occupee, the room that I occupied. Les chambres que j'ai occupees, the rooms that I occupied. Any past participle conjugated with avoir agrees with its preceding direct object. Therefore it does not agree when there is no direct object or when it follows the past participle. 242. SINGULAR Mascuunb Fkminink mine le mien la mienne yours le tien la tienne his, hers, its le sien la sienne ours le notre la notre yours le votre la votre theirs le leur la leur 244. Vocabulary le besoin, the need. la dentelle, the lace. agreable, pleasant. preferable, preferable. rapporter, to bring back. avoir besoin de, to be in need of. ne. . .plus, no longer, no more. 245. Text 1. Cette chambre est celle que mon frere a choisie; elle est plus^agreable que la mienne; c'est la plus^agreable de Thotel. 2. Ce fauteuil est celui que ma soeur a re9u; il BEGINNERS FRENCH II9 est meilleur et plus beau que le mien; cest le meilleur et. le plus beau du salon. 3. J'ai aper9u les rideaux que mon^amie a achetes; ils sont preferables aux miens. 4. Voici les dentelles que ma tante a rapportees du magasin; elle n'a plus besoin des miennes. 246. Transposition 1. Replace mon, ma by the other possessive adjectives and le mien, la mienne, les miens, les miennes by the other pos- sessive pronouns. Ex.: i. Cette chambre. . .ton frere. . . ; elle est . . . la tienne . . . 2. Replace the singular by the plural and vice versa (the last noun of sentences i and 2 must remain singular). 3. Replace the present by the imperfect and the past in- definite by the pluperfect. Ex. : i. Cette chambre etait celle que mon frere avait choisie. . . 247. Questions ,/ I. (a) Quelle chambre monsieur votre frere a-t-il choi- sie? A.: M., cette chambre est celle que... (b) Est elle plus agreable que la votre? (c) Est ce la plus agreable de I'hotel? ^ 2. (a) Quel fauteuil mademoiselle votre soeur a-t-elle (b) Est il meilleur que le votre ? [regu? (c) Est il plus beau que le votre ? (d) Est ce le meilleur du salon? (e) Est ce le plus beau du salon? ^ 3- (^) Qi^iels rideaux avez vous apergus? (b) Sont ils preferables aux votres? / 4. (a) Ou sont les dentelles que madame votre tante a rapportees du magasin? (b) A-t-elle encore besoin des votres? 120 BEGINNERS FRENCH (Negative and affirmative ansv^ers.) 5. (a) Cette chambre est celle que vous avez choisie? A.: Non, M., ce n'est pas celle que j'ai choisie, c'est celle que mon frere a choisie. (b) La votre est elle plus agreable que la sienne? (c) La votre est ce la plus agreable de I'hotel? 6. (a) Ce fauteuil est ce celui que vous avez requ? (b) Le votre est il meilleur que le sien? (c) Le votre est il plus beau que le sien? (d) Le votre est ce le meilleur du salon? (e) Le votre est ce le plus beau du salon? 7. Vos rideaux sont ils preferables a ceux que votre amie a achetes? 248. Grammar Drill I. This pen is mine, that one is yours. 2., That notebook is hers, this one is mine. 3. This bird is theirs, that one is ours. 4. That armchair is yours, this one is mine. 5. These gardens are his, those are theirs. 6. Those laces are hers, these are ours. 7. These toys are yours, those are mine. j/ 249. Translation I. Where is the room which you rented?^ 2. It is near yours. 3. Mine is pleasanter than yours. 4. It is the most pleasant in the v^hole house. 5. These are the ones which my parents chose.^ 6. They are preferable to mine and yours. 7. They are the largest in the hotel. 8. Whose chairs are these ? 9. Those on which we are seated are mine. 10. There is the one which I received ^ from my aunt. 1 1. You do not need hers. 12. It is the most com- fortable in the whole room. 1 3. Where are the hats which i Use the past indefinite. BEGINNER S FRENCH 121 your sister brought ^ back from the store ? 14. Here is hers, there is mine. 15. Which is the prettier? 16. Hers is prettier than yours. 17. It is more expensive than mine. 18. It was the most expensive in the store. 19. She also bought^ some pencils. 20. I do not need yours any longer. 250. Reading Lesson UNE MEPRISE Un jour, un paysan portait un panier de poires au chateau d'un grand seigneur. II arrive au chateau et sur Tescalier il rencontre deux singes, habilles comme des enfants. Le paysan ote respectueusement son chapeau. Les singes approchent du panier — ce sont des animaux gourmands — et devorent une grande partie des poires. Ensuite le paysan monte chez le maitre du chateau. « Monseigneur, voici les poires que vous avez comman- dees.)) « Mais pourquoi n'as tu pas rempli ton panier ? II est a moitie vide.)) « II etait plein, monseigneur, repond le brave homme, mais sur I'escalier j'ai rencontre vos deux fils. Ces messieurs ont trouve mes poires a leur gout et je n'ai pas ose protester.)) TWENTY-FIFTH LESSON Rules 251. Ceci est bon, cela est mauvais. This is good, that is bad. C'est bon. This or that is good. This and that, opposed to each other, are respectively 1 Use the past indefinite. 122 BEGINNERS FRENCH translated by ceci and cela when representing something just named or pointed to. Ce is vague and appears as sub- ject only before the verb 6tre. 252. I. Celqui est bon est cher. What is good is ex- pensive. Ce que j'aper<;ois est beau. What I see is fine. 2. T'ai ce dont vous avez besoin. / have what you are in need of. 3. Voila ce a quoi vous visez. That is what you aim at. 1. What, relative pronoun, meaning that zvhich, is translated by ce qui when a subject and ce que when a direct object. 2. Dont is the only possible translation of of zvhich, of what, when its antecedent that is tran«;lated by ce. 3. A French preposition always \precedes the inter- rogative or relative pronoun which it governs. 4. Which or what is translated by quoi when object of any preposition but of (see 2 above) if its antecedent that is translated by ce. 253. Est ce bon? Is that good? In questions, ce is placed after the verb as if it were a personal pronoun (see 19). 254. Past future of parler, rougir, perdre, recevoir. J'aurai (tu auras, etc.) parle, rougi, perdu, re(;u, / shall have spoken, etc. Past conditional of the same. J'aurais (tu aurais. etc.) parle, rougi, perdu, regu. / should have spoken, etc. * Compound tenses are formed exactly as in English. BEGINNER S FRENCH I23 255. Vocabulary le marche, the bargain. la qualite, the quality. I'experience (f.), the experience. la pratique, the practice. cher, chere, dear, expensive. mauvais, -e, bad, poor. tout, all, everything. manquer de, to lack. viser, to aim. bon marche, cheap. meilleur marche, cheaper. 256. Text 1. Ceci est cher, c^la est bon marche. 2. Ce qui est de mauvaise qualite est genera- lement meilleur marche que ce qui est de bonne qualite. 3. Tout ce que vous^avez achete est bon marche, mais mauvais. 4. La pratique est ce dont vous manquez. 5. L'experience est ce a quoi je vise. 257. Transpositioii 1. Replace respectively the present indicative and the past indefinite {a) by the imperfect and the pluperfect. Ex. :i. Ceci etait cher, cela. . . {b) by the future and the past future. Ex.: i. Ceci sera ... (c) by the conditional and the past conditional. Ex. : Ceci serait . . . 2. Conjugate the relative clauses of sentences 3, 4 and 5. Ex. : 3. Tout ce que j'ai achete est. . . Tout ce que tu as achete est . . . 3. Use one of the interrogative forms. Ex.: i. Ceci est il cher ? Cela . . . ? 124 BEGINNERS FRENCH 258. Questions 1. (a) Qu'est ce qui est cher? (b) Qu'est ce qui est bon marche? 2. Qu'est ce qui est generalement meilleur marche que ce qui est de bonne qualite? 3. (a) Qu'est ce qui est bon marche? (b) Qu'est ce qui est mauvais? 4. De quoi est ce que je manque? 5. A quoi visez vous? (Negative and affirmative answers.) 6. (a) Ceci est il bon marche? A.: Non, M., ceci n'est pas bon marche, ceci est cher. (b) Cela est il cher? 7. Ce qui est de mauvaise qualite est il generalement plus cher que ce qui est de bonne qualite? 8. (a) Est ce que tout ce que j'ai achete est cher? (b) Tout ce que j'ai achete est il bon? 9. Est ce que j'ai beaucoup de pratique? 10. Avez vous beaucoup d'experience ? 259. Grammar Drill 1. This is bad, that is good. That is cheap, this is ex- pensive. That is beautiful. 2. What is bad is cheap. What is sad is not interesting. 3. What you hear is pleasant. What I notice is ex- pensive. 4. He asks for* what -he is in need of.^ You have what your friends aim at.^ 260. Translation I. Our brothers have many qualities. 2. But every- thing* they buy is of poor quality. 3. They do not buy what 1 Omit. 2 Say : that of which. * Say : that at which. * that which. beginner's FRENCH I25 is expensive. 4. And what is cheap is generally of poor quality. 5. Experience is what they are in need of. 6. Practice is what they must aim at. 7. Do you have what they lack? 8. Yes, we generally ask for what is expensive. 9. Every day, I repeat to my sister: 10. This is cheaper than that. 11. That is good, this is bad. 12. All that is^ bad is generally cheap. 13. Everything that is^ good is expensive. 14. We do not need what is cheap. 15. I do not examine what is of poor quality. 16. I buy what is expensive. 17. That is generally of good quality. 18. Ex- perience is not what we are in need of. 19. Practice is not what we must aim at. 20. We have what you are in need of. 21. We have what you must aim at. TWENTY-SIXTH LESSON Rules Review §§ 138, 152, 181, 201. 261. Vous reussirez si vous etes diligent. You will suc- ceed if you are (will be) industrious. Vous reussiriez si vous etiez diligent. You would suc- ceed if you were {should he) industrious. The verb of a clause beginning with si {if) is never put in the future or in the conditional. If the future or the conditional is used in English, replace them respectively in French by the present or the imperfect indicative. 262. Vous regretterez le temps perdu quand vous "serez grand. When you are old, you will regret the time you have wasted. The verb of a clause beginning with the conjunction quand must be put in the future when that of the principal clause is in the future or expresses futurity. 1 Supply which before is. 126 BEGIN NER^S FRENCH 263. I. Present indicative of nettoyer {to clean). je nettoie, I clean nous nettoyons tu nettoies vous nettoyez il or elle nettoie ils or elles nettoient 2. Imperfect. je nettoyais, / was cleaning. 3. Future. je nettoierai, / shall clean, 4. Conditional. je nettoierais, / should clean. In verbs endipg in -yer, the y becomes i before an e mute (cf. in English to tie, tying). In verbs ending in -ayer, the y may be kept. 264. List of indefinite adjectives and pronouns. chaque, each, every. chacun, -e, each one, every one. aucun, -e (with ne), no, none, quelque, some, a few. [nobody. quelqu'un, somebody. quelques uns, some (pron.). quelque chose (m.), something. quiconque, whoever. tout, -e, tous, toutes, all. whole. tout, all, everything. tout le monde, everybody. on. one, people, they. personne (m., with ne), nobody rien (m.). nothing. nul, none (only as subject). nul, -le, no. tel. -le, such. certain, -e. some. 265. Personne ne parle. Nobody speaks. Je ne parle a personne. / speak to nobody, Rien ne bouge. Nothing moves. Je n'ai rien. / have nothing. The verb of the clause in which the indefinite words rien, aucun, nul, personne are used, is preceded by ne but not followed by pas. 266. J'ai quelque chose de bon. / haz'c something good. Je n*ai rien de bon, / have nothing good. BEGINNER S FRENCH T27 ftuelque chose and rien, modified by an adjective, re- quire the preposition de immediately after them (cf. the Latin nihil bo7ti). 267. I. On parle frangais ici. French is spoken here {one does speak French here). 2. Ici Ton parle frangais. Here French is spoken. 3. Parle-t-on frangais ici? Is French spoken here? 1. On {one, people, they) is always singular and used only as subject. 2. L' is sometimes added before on for sake of euphony. 3. In questions, on is placed after the verb as if it were a personal pronoun. Notice that the English passive voice is often replaced by the French active. 268. Vocabulary le chemin de fer, the railroad. le voyage, the trip. le voyageur, the passenger. le soir, the evening. le sommeil, the sleep. le wagon lit, the sleeping car. le doute, the doubt. le repos, the rest. la portiere, the car window. la campagne, the country. la destination, the destination. interessant, -e, interesting. court, -e, short. obscur, -e, dark. content, -e (de),^ pleased (to). profond, -e, deep. voyager, to travel. en chemin regarder, to look at. remarquer, to notice. sembler, to seem. arriver, to arrive. essayer (de),^ to try {to). tomber, to fall. trouver, to find. faire, to do. avoir sommeil, to be sleepy. rarement, seldom. par, through. sans, without. encore, still, yet. quand, when. si, if. pourquoi? why? parce que, because. de fer, by rail. 1 The preposition between parentheses is the one required by the preceding word when an infinitive depends upon it. 128 beginner's FRENCH 269. Text 1. Quand^on voyage en chemin de fer, on re- garde par la portiere, mais Ton remarque rare- ment quelque chose d'interessant. 2. Un tel voyage semble court a certains voya- geurs et long a d autres. 3. Le soir, personne n'aper9oit plus rien dans la campagne obscure. 4. Si quelqu'un a sommeil, il entre dans le wagon lit. 5. Tout le monde essaie de trouver un peu de repos, mais aucun des voyageurs ne tombe dans^un profond sommeil. 6. Sans nul doute, chacun est content d'ar- river a destination. 270. Transposition 1. Replace the present (a) by the imperfect; (b) by the future (keep the present in the clause be- ginning with si) ; (c) by the conditional (use the imperfect in the clause beginning with si). 2. Use the interrogative forms. 271. Questions 1. (a) Quand on voyage en chemin de fer, par ou re- garde-t-on ? (b) Que remarque-t-on rarement? 2. (a) Un tel voyage semble-t-il court a tout le monde? (b) Semble-t-il long a d'autres? BEGINNER S FRENCH 1 29 3. (a) Apergoit on encore quelque chose, le soir, dans la campagne? (b) Pourquoi n'apergoit on plus rien? 4. Si quelqu'un a sommeil, ou entre-t-il ? 5. (a) Qui essaie de trouver un peu de repos? (b) Tous les voyageurs tombent ils dans un profond sommeil ? 6. Sans nul doute, ou chacun est il content d'arriver? Use quiconque in answers to questions 7 (a and b) and ID. 7- (^) Qui regarde par la portiere? A.: M., quiconque voyage . . . , regarde . . . (b) Qui est ce qui remarque rarement quelque chose d'interessant ? 8. (a) A qui un tel voyage semble-t-il court? (b) A qui semble-t-il long ? 9. Qu'aperqoit on, le soir, dans la campagne obscure ? 10. Qui entre dans le wagon lit? 11. (a) Qui essaie de trouver un peu de repos? (b) Qui est ce qui tombe dans un profond sommeil? 12. Qui est content, sans aucun doute, d'arriver a destina- tion? 272. Grammar Drill 1. Each trip, each traveler, every evening, every city. 2. Any^ car window, any rest, any city, any doubt. 3. Some^ trips, some books, some ladies, some evenings. 4. All travelers,^ the whole* trip, all car windows,^ the whole* city. 5. Such a*^ doubt, such a railroad, such a lady. ^ Use aucun and nul. ^ Use quelques and certains. 8 Supply the after all. * Say : all the ... ^ Say : a such . . . 130 beginner's FRENCH 6. Something beautiful ; nothing sad ; one hears the bell : somebody tries to enter ; some of your friends are entering ; nobody looks out of the car window. 7. I notice everything ; you notice nothing ; they perceive nobody ; whoever is sleepy tries to find some rest ; everybody falls ; none of the ladies seems pleased ; each one is sad. 273. Translation I. Do you seldom^ travel by rail? 2. Yes, such a trip is not interesting and seems long. 3. When you are seated near the car window, do you not notice anything beautiful? 4. Without any doubt, I perceive villages, trees, houses, etc. 5. But one seldom perceives anything pleasant in the country. 6. When we^ arrive near a city, everybody tries to look out of the car window. 7. They- examine the build- ings, the avenues, the parks, etc. 8. It seems fine to some of the travelers and gloomy to others. 9. In^ the evening, every one is sleepy. 10. They^ enter the sleeping car. II. We also^ enter. 12. We try to perceive something. 13. If somebody looks out of the car window in^ the even- ing, he will not notice anything any longer. 14. Everything is dark and sad in the country. 15. Will everybody fall into a deep sleep? 16. No, without any doubt, nobody will find any rest. 17. At last we^ arrive. 18. None of the travelers is sorry to* arrive at his^ destination. 19. Every lady seems pleased. 20. Some travelers find such a trip long, others find^ it^ short. 1 See 118. 2. 2 Say: one (see 267. i). ^ Omit. * de. BEGINNER S FRENCH I3I TWENTY-SEVENTH LESSON Rules Review §§ 138, 182, 193, 235, 252. 274. Preterit or past definite. parler {to speak) rougir {to blush) je parlai, / spoke je rougis, / blushed tu parlas tu rougis il or elle parla il or elle rougit nous parlames nous rougimes vous parlates vous rougites ils or elles parlerent ils or elles rougirent perdre {to lose) recevoir {to receive) je perdis, / lost je regus, / received tu perdis tu regus il or elle perdit il or elle regut nous perdimes nous re^iimes vous perdites vous regiites ils or elles perdirent ils or elles regurent The preterit, or past definite, (i) of the first conjugation is formed by replacing -er of the infinitive by: r -ai r -ames singular ■{ -as plural ■{ -ates I -a I -^rent (2) of the second and third conjugations by replacing respectively the endings -ir and -re by: r -is r -imes singular ^ -is plural < -ites I -it L -irent 132 BEGINNERS FRENCH (3) of verbs ending in -evoir by replacing -evoir by : r -us r -times singular \ -us plural -j -utes I -ut I -urent Note. The c of verbs ending in -cevoir takes a cedilla before u. 275. Preterit or past definite. etre {to be) avoir {to have) je fus, / was j'eus, / had tu fus tu eus il or elle fut il or elle eut nous fumes nous eumes vous futes vous eutes ils or elles furent ils or elles eurent They are irregular. 276. I. Je parlais, / was speaking, I used to speak, I did speak. 2, Je parlai, / spoke (once). 3. J'ai parle, / spoke, I have spoken. 1. The imperfect is especially used in description. 2. The preterit is especially used in narration. 3. The past indefinite is especially used in conversation. 277. Je vous choisis. / choose yon. Je I'ai choisi. / have chosen him. Je vous parle. / speak to you. Je lui ai parle. / have spoken to him. II nous a parle. He has spoken to us. II leur a parle. He has spoken to them. BEGINNER S FRENCH 133 Personal pronouns used as objects. (2) As object of the (i) As direct object : me you him, it her, it us you them = le = la = les me te nous vous preposition to: = to me = to you r to him lui = < to her I to it = to us = to you leur = to them All personal pronouns, direct objects or objects of the preposition to, are placed immediately before the verb in simple tenses, and immediately before the auxiliary in compound tenses. Notes, i. The preposition to must not be expressed in French since it is included in the personal pronoun. 2. Me, te, le, la become m', t', 1' before a verbal form beginning with a vowel or h. mute. 278. J'y demeure. I live there. There, representing a place just mentioned, is translated by y, which follows rule 277. 279. Un bel homme. A handsome man. Un bel abricotier. A beautiful apricot tree. Some French adjectives have a double form for the mas- culine singular. Beau is used when the modified noun be- gins with a consonant or an h formerly aspirate, bel when it begins with a vowel or a mute h. 134 BEGINNERS FRENCH 280. Vocabulary rhomme, the man. I'aine, the elder {eldest) son. le cadet, the younger (youngest) son. le pere de famille, the head of the family. I'abricot (m,), the apricot. I'abricotier (m.), the apricot tree. le lendemain, the next day. la question, the question. suivant, -e, following. emmener, to take along. derober, to steal. donner, to give. enlever, to take away. adresser a i fo ask (somebody a poser a J quesiion). conseiller a (de), to advise (to). eviter (de), to avoid (to). defendre a (de), fo forbid (to). cueillir, to gather, pick. aussitot, immediately. 281. Text 1. Un^homme qui avak deux fils, leur defendit de manger les fruits d'un bel^abricotier qui etait dans le jardin. 2. Un jour, I'aine y emmena le cadet et lui conseilla de cueillir des^abricots. 3. Celui ci I'ecouta : il^en deroba, en mangea et en donna a son frere qui en mangea aussi. 4. Le lendemain, le pere de famille remarqua qu on_avait_enleve des fruits de son^arbre. 5. ILappela I'aine aussitot et lui adressa (posa) les questions suivantes : " As tu evite de faire ce que je t'ai defendu ? As tu derobe des^abricots ? " (A suivre.) 282. Transposition I. You are the elder son. Repeat the story with the necessary changes. Ex.: i. Notre pere nous defendit.. 2. Un jour j'y emmenai mon frere. . . BEGINNER S FRENCH 135 2. You are the younger son. Repeat the story with the necessary changes. 3. There are four sons (les deux aines et les deux cadets). Repeat the story with the necessary changes. Ex.: i. Un homme qui avait quatre fils, leur defendit. . . 2. Un jour les deux aines ... 4. Replace the past tenses by (a) the present, and the pluperfect by the past indefinite, (b) the future. (No change in the direct discourse.) Ex. : i. Un homme qui a. . . 283. Questions (The pronouns placed between parentheses after the ques- tions are to be used in the answers.) 1. (a) Qui avait deux fils? (en) (b) Que leur defendit il? (c) Ou etait ce bel abricotier? 2. (a) Qui I'aine emmena-t-il, un jour, dans le jar- din? (y) (b) Que lui conseilla-t-il ? 3. (a) Le cadet Fecouta-t-il ? (b) Deroba-t-il des abricots? (en) (c) En mangea-t-il? (d) A qui en donna-t-il? (e) Le frere en mangea-t-il? 1 4. Qu'est ce que le pere de f amille remarqua le lendemain ? 5. (a) Qui appela-t-il aussitot? (b) Quelles questions lui posa-t-il? 284. Grammar Drill I. Replace the dashes by the proper French personal pro- noun object: (a) by me or to me, (b) by yon* or to you*, (c) hy him or to him, (d) by her or to her, (^) by us or to us, (f) by you or to you, (g) by them or to them. 136 beginner's FRENCH H — appela. Us — parlerent. Us — rejurent. H ^ adressa cette question. 2. I ate^ it,2 we ate them, he ate it, did you eat it? they ate them. He punished^ me, you punished us, did she punish you? I punished them, they punished her. Did she hear^ me ? we heard them, you heard us, did they hear them? I heard you. I perceived^ her, did you perceive him? they perceived us, we perceived them, did she perceive you? They had^ it, did you have them ? we had some. I was,^ was he ? you were, were you ? they were. 285. Translation I. A man had^ a garden. 2. In his garden there were^ two beautiful apricot trees. 3. That man was^ the* head of a family. 4. He had^ only two sons. 5. One day, the parents took^ them along into the garden. 6, When they arrived^ near the apricot trees, they forbaje^ them to take away the fruit^ of those trees. 7. You must avoid those trees or we shall punish you. 8. The next day, they noticed^ that some one was stealing their apricots. 9. At once they called^ their sons. 10. They asked^ them many questions. 11. What have we forbidden you to do? 12. Who has stolen our apricots? 13. Who has eaten them? 14. Who advised® you to pick them? 15. Who is blush- ing? the elder or the younger son? 16. We took® our friends along into the garden. 17. They perceived® the fruit. 18. They advised® us to pick some. 19. We listened® to them. 20. We stole® some. 21. We have given some to our friends. 22. I have eaten some, he has eaten some, they have eaten some, we have eaten some. * Use the preterit. * Replace by a or omit. * Suppose it is masculine. ^ Use the plural. * Use the imperfect indie. ^ Use the past indefinite. BEGINNER S FRENCH \2i7 TWENTY-EIGHTH LESSON Rules Review §§ 243, 274, 276, 277, 278. 286. istpart Personal pronouns direct Verb or ^^^Pf* ^^f^P^Il^^lP'^ '"'^"' negation objects or objects of ... auxiliary ^^^^J.^^ ^^^^ je me tu te il , ^^^ elle le . . ^^ (past ne I lui y en or pas \ • • 1 x on la -^ -y \ participle) nous nous vous vous ils elles auxiliary) les leur When two personal pronoun objects must be placed be- fore the same verb or auxiliary, it is simply a question of importance. Therefore, the first and second persons precede the third. When both pronouns belong to the third person, the direct object comes first, i.e., precedes the personal pro- noun object of lo. En always comes after y and both must follow any personal pronoun. 287. Cueillir (to gather, to pick). flnf initive :^ cueillir 1 To facilitate the study of irregular verbs such as cueillir, French grammarians considier as primitive tenses those marked above with a f. a. For the formation of the future and the conditional, see 201. 6, The present participle is supposed to form three derived tenses : (a) the pli\ral of the present indicative, (d) the imperfect indica- tive, and (c) the present of the subjunctive by replacing the Imperfect indicative : fPreterit Past indefinite : Future : 138 BEGINNERS FRENCH fPresent participle: cueillant^ fPast participle : cueilli t Present indicative: je cueille nous cueillons tu cueilles vous cueillez il or elle cueille ils or elles cueillent je cueillais je cueillis j*ai cueilli je cueillerai Conditional : je cueillerais Imperative: cueille, cueillons, cueillez Present subjunctive : que je cueille Imperfect subjunctive : que je cueillisse 288. J 'en ai cueilli. / have gathered some. Je n'en ai pas vole. / have not stolen any. Nous en avons mange. We have eaten some. En is never the direct object. Therefore past participles, conjugated with avoir, never agree with it (see 243). ending -ant respectively {a) by -ons, -ez, -ent ; {h) by -ais, -ais, -ait, -ions, -iez, -aient ; {c) by -e, -es, -e, -ions, -iez, -ent. The endings of the present subj. of verbs in -evoir are: -oive, -oives, -oive, -evions, -eviez, -oivent. c. The past participle forms all compound tenses with the help of avoir and etre as in English. (See 235, 305.) d. The present indicative forms the imperative by dropping the per- sonal pronouns of the corresponding persons and the final s of the 2d person singular in the ist conjugation. e. An easy mechanical way to get the ist person singular of the im- perfect of the subjunctive is to add -se to the 2d person singular of the preterit : tu parlas, que je parlasse ; tu rougis, que je rougisse ; tu perdis, que je perdisse ; tu re9us, que je re9usse. 1 All irregularities in various tenses will be printed in heavy type throughout. beginner's FRENCH • 139 exemplaire, exemplary. inutile (de), useless (to). repliquer, to reply. refuser (de), to refuse. aj outer, to add,^ 289. Vocabulary infliger a, to inflict upon, desobeir a, to disobey. repondre a, to anszver. alors, then. cependant, however. 290. Text {Sttife et Fin) 1. Son fils lui r^pondit : "Mon frere en_a cueilli, en_a mange, m'en^a donne et j'en^ai aussi mange." 2. Alors le pere appela le cadet et lui de- manda: "Pourquoi m'as tu desobei? Pourquoi as tu derobe des^abricots?" 3. Celui ci lui repliqua : " Vous nous I'aviez defendu, mais mon frere me I'a conseille. 4. Je I'ai ecoute; cependant je n'en^ai cueilli que quelques^uns; je n'en^ai mange que deux ou trois. Je lui en_ai donne autant : il ne les^a pas refuses et il les^a manges." 5. ILest^inutile d'ajouter que leur pere leur infligea une punition exemplaire. 291. Transposition 1. You are the elder son. Repeat the story with the necessary changes. (No change in the direct discourse.) Ex. : I. Je lui repondis : . . . 2. You are the younger son. Repeat the story with the necessary changes. (None in the direct discourse.) Ex.: I . Mon frere lui repondit : . . . 3. There are four sons (les deux aines et les deux I40 BEGINNER S FRENCH cadets). Repeat the story with the necessary changes. (Use the plural in -the direct discourse.) Ex.: i. Ses fils lui... 4. Replace the preterit and the present by (a) the future, (b) the conditional. (No changes in the direct discourse.) 292. Questions 1. (a) Que lui repondiU son fils? b) he cadet a-t-il cueilli des abricots? (en) c) En a-t-il mange? rf) En a-t-il donne a son frere? (lui) e) Celui ci en a-t-il mange au^si? 2. (a) Qui le pere appela-t-il alors? b) Que lui demanda-t-il ? c) Le cadet lui a-t-il desobei? d) A-t-il derobe des abricots? (en) 3. (a) Qu'est ce que le cadet lui repliqua? b) Est ce que leur pere leur avait defendu de cueillii des abricots? (le) c) Qui a conseille au cadet d'en cueillir? (le lui) 4. (a) Le cadet a-t-il ecoute I'aine? (le) b) A-t-il cueilli cependant beaucoup d'abricots? (en) c) Combien en a-t-il mange? d) Combien en a-t-il donne a son frere? (lui) e) Les a-t-il refuses? /) Les a-t-il manges ? 5. Qu'est il inutile d'ajouter? 293. Grammar Drill I. I give it to you, they give them to us, he was giving it to him, we gave^ them to them, will he give it to him ? he will not give it to him, he will give it to you. I speak to him about it,- he spoke^ to me about it, has he spoken to you* about it? we shall speak to them about it. 1 Use the preterit. ^ Translate by ^n. beginner's FRENCH I4I They will take you (along) there, were they taking him there? I do not take them there, we have taken her there. I forbid him to do it,^ were we forbidding them to do it?^ he would not forbid you to do it.^ 2. I gather apricots, do you gather them? we gather some, they were gathering some, will they gather any? she will not gather any, you would not gather any. 294. Translation I. Then the younger son added :^ 2. My brother took* his friends along into our garden. 3. He advised* them to pick and to eat apricots. 4. I repeated* this to him: 5. " Our father has forbidden us to do it."^ 6. He did not listen* to me. 7. He answered* me: 8. You^ will gather fruit. 9. You will give some to me. 10. You will eat some. II. You will also give some to my friends or I shall inflict upon you an exemplary punishment. 12. Then I did not refuse* to do it. 13. I have disobeyed you. 14. However, we have not stolen many. 15. My brother has gathered half a dozen. 16. I have gathered as many. 17. His friends were asking us for some.® 18. I have given them one. 19. They refused* it at once. 20. My brother has given them three. 21. They did not refuse* them. 22. They have eaten them. 23. I blush for my behavior. 24. It is useless to punish me. 295. Reading Lesson UNE JOYEUSE HARANGUE Un roi de France visitait son royaume. Un jour, il arriva aux portes d'une petite ville oti il fut re^u par le cure, accom- pagne de toute la population. Or, ce cure etait un original. Quand il arriva aupres du 1 Say : T forbid it to him. ^ Preterit. ^ Use the 2d person singular. ^ See note i above. * Past indef. * Say . some to us. 14^ BEGINNER S FRENCH roi, il le salua tres humblement et lui dit : « Sire, je n'ai pas rintention de vous faire un long discours ; mais, a I'occasion de votre visite, j'ai compose une petite chanson que je desire vous chanter.)) Et il entonna aussitot une chanson dans laquelle il souhai- tait au monarque la bienvenue et un long regne. Le roi applaudit et cria : « Bis ! Bis ! » Le pretre repeta sa chanson avec encore plus de gaiete et d'enthousiasme. Pour lui temoigner sa satisfaction, le roi lui donna dix louis. Celui ci, en les recevant, cria a son tour : « Bis ! Bis ! sire.)) Le roi, charme de I'esprit du cure, doubla la somme. TWENTY-NINTH LESSON Rules Review §§ 40- 2 ; 243; p. 13 (hyphen) ; note d, bottom of p. 138. - 296. Montrez-moi ce livre. Shozv me this hook, Montrez-le-lui. Show it to him. Montrez-le-nous. Show it to us. Montre-m'en un. Show me one. Montres-en un. Show one. 1. Personal pronouns, direct objects or objects of to, are placed after the verb in the same order as in English when it is in the imperative affirmative. When the imperative is negative, follow 277 and 286. 2. When placed after the verb, the personal pronouns, direct objects or objects of to, are translated as in table 277, except moi and toi instead of me, te. However, moi and toi become m' and t' before en or y. BEGINNER S FRENCH 43 3. The second person singular of the imperative of the first conjugation ends with s before en or y. 297. Envoy er (to send). (Review 263.) Infin. : Pres. part. : Past part. : Pres. ind. : envoyer envoyant envoye j'envoie tu envoies il or elle envoie Imperf. ind. Preterit : Past indefinite: j Future : Conditional : Imperative : Pres. subj. : Imperf. subj nous envoyons vous envoyez ils or elles envoient envoyais 'envoyai 'ai envoye j'enverrai j'enverrais envoie, envoyons, envoyez que j 'envoie que j'envoyasse 298. J'y ajouterai quelque chose, / shall add something to it. Y means also to it, to them (things). 299. Vocabulary- la route, the road. I'aise (f.), the ease. I'adresse (f.), the address. la permission, the permission. I'expression (f.), the expression. la gratitude, the gratitude. sur, -e, sure. montrer, to show. garder, to keep. envoyer, to send. emporter, to carry away. deviner, to guess. desirer, to desire. recommander, to recommend. reflechir a, to reflect upon. salir, to soil. rendre, to return, give hack. plutot, rather. a votre aise, leisurely. 144 BEGINNERS FRENCH 300. Text 1. Montrez-moi les livres que vous^avez trou- ves sur la route. 2. Examinez-les ^ votre aise mais ne les salis- sez pas. 3. Ce sont ceux que mon frere a perdus, j'en suis sur. Reflechissez^y bien: ne les gardez pas; rendez-les-lui. 4. Donnez-moi son^adresse; je les lui enverrai; ou plutot emportez-les et envoyez-les-lui. 5. Recevez Texpression de ma profonde grati- tude et de la sienne. 301, Transposition 1. Use the singular everywhere. 2. Use the first person plural of the imperative in 2 and 3. 302. Questions For the answers, translate the sentences between paren- theses. If there is no sentence, see 3<>o« 1. (a) Devinez ce que j'ai trouve? (You have foynd some books.) (b) Devinez ou je les ai trouves? (You have found them on the road.) (c) Est ce que je dois vous montrer les livres que j'ai trouves? (Show them to me.) 2. Me donnez vous la permission de les examiner a mon aise? (Examine them at your ease.) 3. Que me recommandez vous? (Do not soil them.) 4. (a) Est ce^ ceux que votre frere a perdus? * Used for sake of euphony instead of sonf ce. BEGINNER S FRENCH I45 (b) En etes vous bien sur? (c) Dois^je bien y reflechir? (Yes, do reflect upon it.) (d) Est ce que je dois les garder? (Do not keep them. ) (e) Est ce que je dois les rendre a votre frere? (Re- turn them to him.) 5. (a) Desirez-vous son adresse? (Give it to me.) (b) Les lui enverrez vous? (c) Est ce que je dois les emporter? (Take them away. ) (d) Dois-je les lui envoyer? (Send them to him.) 6. £tes-vous content? (Yes, sir, receive the expres- sion. . .) 303. Grammar Drill 1. Show it, do not show it, show them, do not show them, show some, do not show any, show me, do not show me, show it to me, do not show it to me, show them to us, do not show them to us, let us show it, let us not show it, let us show them to him, let us not show them to him. Keep it, do not keep it, keep them, do not keep them, keep some, do not keep any, let us keep them, let us not keep them. Soil it, do not soil it, soil them, do not soil them, let us soil it, let us not soil it, let us soil them, let us not soil them. Give it back, give it back to me, give some back, do not give them back to him, let us give some back to them. 2. I am sending it to them there, do you send it to them there? I was not sending them to you there, they sent some to me there, she has not sent it to him, will you send them to us there ? he will not send any to you there, we would send some to them there, send it to me, let us not send it to them. 146 beginner's FRENCH 304. Translation I. Somebody has lost his books opposite your house. 2. Did you find^hem? 3. We found^ some on the road. 4. Show them to me. 5. Let us not show them to him. 6. They are^ not yours. 7. Are you sure of it? 8. Give them back to me or rather send them to me. 9. Let us not give them back to him. 10. And we shall not send them to him. II. If you do not return them to me, you will receive an exemplary punishment. 12. Let us keep them. 13. I shall speak to your uncle about it. 14. We forbid you to do it.^ 15. He will inflict upon you a good punishment. 16. Let us reflect upon it. 17. Let us show those books to him. 18. Let us examine them leisurely. 19. You are soiling them. 20. Let us not soil them. 21. Let us not return them to him. 22. They are his. 23. What is the address of your parents? 24. Give it to us. 25. We shall send them to you there. 26. Give them to me rather. 2^. I shall take them away. 28. Take them away. 29. My gratitude is very deep. 30. Receive the expression of it. THIRTIETH LESSON Rules 305. Etre envoye, puni, perdu, rcQU (/o he sent, punished, lost, received). PRESENT INDICATIVE je suis envoye (e) puni(e) tu es envoye (e) puni(e) il est envoye puni elle est envoyee punie * Past indefinite. * c'^st or ce sont according to the new decree. * We forbid it to you. BEGINNER S FRENCH 147 PRESENT INDICATIVE {Continued') nous sommes envoy es (ees) punis (ies) vous etes envoye (ee, es, ees) puni (ie, is, ies) ils sont envoyes punis elles sont envoyees punies je suis perdu (e) regu(e) tu es perdu (e) regu(e) il est perdu regu elle est perdue regue nous sommes perdus (ues) regus (ues) vous etes perdu (ue, us, ues) regu (ue, us, ues) ils sont ' • perdus regus elles sont perdues regues . IMPERFECT INDICATIVE j'etais envoye(e), puni(e), perdi a(e), re9u(e), etc. PRETERIT je fus envoye(e), puni(e), perdu(e), regu(e), etc. PAST INDEFINITE j'ai ete envoye (e), puni(e), perdu (e), re9u(e), etc. FUTURE je serai envoye (e), puni(e), perdu (e), re9u(e), etc. CONDITIONAL je serais envoye (e), puni(e), perdu (e), reQu(e), etc. Past participles, conjugated with etre, agree in gender and number with the subject of the clause. 306. Je suis alle(e). 1 have gone. Elle est revenue. She has come hack. Vous etes sorti (ie, is, ies). You have gone out. The following past participles, conjugated with to have in English, are conjugated with etre {to be) in French. Apply 305. The French considers the state, not the action. 148 beginner's FRENCH alle, -e, gone tombe, -e, fallen. arrive, -e, arrived. venu, -e, come. entre, -e, entered. revenu, -e, come back. parti, -e, departed. ' devenu, -e, become. reste, -e, remained. mort, -e, died. sorti, -e, gone out. ne, -e, born. 307. Inf in. : couvrir faire plenvoir^ {to cover) {to do, make) {to rain) Pres. part. : couvrant faisant plouvant Past part. : cbuvert fait plu Pres. ind. : je couvre je fais tu couvres tu fais il or elle couvre \\ or elle fait nous couvrons nous faisons il pleut vous couvrez vous faites ils or elles couvrent ils or elles font Imperf . ind. : je couvrais je faisais i [ pleuvait Preterit : je couvris je fis i I plut Past indef . : j'ai convert j'ai fait i [ a plu Future : je couvrirai je ferai i 1 pleuvra Condit. : je couvrirais je ferais i I pleuvrait Imperative : couvre fais ' couvrons faisons . (none) couvrez faites Pres. subj.: que je couvre que je fasse* qu'il pleuve Imperf. subj. que je couvrisse que je fisse qu'il plut 308. La rue est couverte de boue. with mud. The street is covered ^ It is irregular throughout. ^ Irregular persons of verbs, ending in -ot'r, cannot be especially marked because there is no model on wMch to base a distinction. BEGINNER S FRENCH 149 1. The partitive article (du, de la, de T, des) is omitted after the preposition de to avoid the repetition of the same word. 2. After some past participles (covered, dressed, adorned, etc.), with is translated by de. 309. Vocabulary le temps, the weather. le vent, the wind. le froid, the cold. Thiver (m.), the winter. le silence, the silence. la boue, the mud. la neige, the snow. la terre, the ground. la nature, the nature, h. feuille, the leaf. calme, calm. mort, -e, dead. plein, -e, full, filled. revenu, -e, come back. geler, to freeze. troubler, to disturb. depouiller, to strip. couvrir, to cover. pleuvoir, to rain. faire du vent (impers.), to be windy. quel temps fait il? how is the weatherf 310. Text I II pleut; il fait du vent; les rues sont pleines de boue. 2. II gele; le froid est revenu; la neige couvre la terre. 3. En shiver, la nature tombe dans^un profond sommeil. 4. Tout est calme et triste : rien ne trouble le silence de la campagne. 5. Les jardins sont depouilles, les feuilles sont tombees, les fleurs sont mortes. 150 beginner's FRENCH 311. Transposition 1. Replace respectively the present and the past indefinite (a) by the imperfect and the pluperfect, (b) by the future and the past future, {c) by the conditional and the past con- ditional. 2. Use the interrogative forms. 312. Questions 1. (a) Quel temps fait il? (b) Pleut il? (c) Est ce qu'il fait du vent? (d) De quoi les rues sont elles pleines? 2. (a) Est ce qu'il gele? (b) Qu'est ce qui est revenu? (c) Qu'est ce qui couvre la terre? 3. En hiver, dans quoi la nature tombe-t-elle ? 4. (a) Qu'est ce qui est calme? (b) Qu'est ce qui est triste? (c) Qu'est ce qui trouble le silence de la campagne? 5. (a) Qu'est ce qui est depouille? (b) Qu'est ce qui est tombe? (c) Qu'est ce qui est mort? 313. Grammar Drill 1. She is sent, we are lost (m.), were you being lost (f. pi.) ? they were sent (m.), I have been sent (f.), they had been lost (m.), will she be lost? we should be sent (m.). 2. I have gone (m.), she has gone, have they gone (m.) ? we have gone out (f.), have you gone out (m. pi.) ? he has come, they have come (m.), have we arrived (m.) ? she has arrived. 3. I am covering, they cover, were you covering? We ; BEGINNERS FRENCH I5I covered, she has covered, they had covered, you* will cover, we would cover, let us cover. 4. He makes, she was making, are you making? they made (pret.), he has made, shall we make? they make, I had made, let us make, you would make, do not make. 5. It was raining, will it rain, it rained (pret.), has it rained? it would rain, it is raining. 314. Translation I . Winter^ and cold^ have come back. 2. The cold is strip- ping our gardens and our parks. 3. Leaves^ have fallen and cover the ground. 4. Flowers^ are dead. 5. Everything is dead. 6: Silence^ reigns over^ nature.^ 7. How is the weather? 8. It has rained and it is raining. 9. The streets are covered with mud. 10. It has been windy and it is windy. 11. When did your sister come^ back from the country? 12. She came^ back on* Tuesday. 13. It had rained. 14. She has fallen. 15. She was covered with mud, 16. I am very sorry for^ it. 17. How will the weather be this winter? 18. It will be windy. 19. If it is windy, it will rain. 20. It has frozen, it is freezing, and it will freeze. 21. Snow^ has fallen, snow^ is falling, snow^ will fall. 22. It will cover everything with its white cloak. 23. Nature^ will fall into a deep sleep. 24. Birds^ will not disturb it. 25. The streets will be quiet and gloomy. 26. They will also be filled with snow. 1 Supply the. ^ Replace by in. ^ Past indefinite. * Omit. ^ Replace by s'assied elle ) nous venons nous sentons nous nous asseyons vous venez vous sentez vous vous asseyez ils ) . ^ils ) ^„^^jviennent^^^^jsente„t ^jl^^jsasseyent Impf. ind.ije venais je sentais je m'asseyais Preterit : je vins je sentis je m'assis tu vins \ Ivint elle ) nous vinmes vous vintes eL j ^^'^"''* 1 The past anterior (I had amused myself) is formed with the help of the preterit and is especially i ised after conjunctions of time like when. as soon as, after, if the verb of the principal clause is in the preterit. i8o BEGINNER S FRENCH Pastindf. : je suis venu(e)j'ai senti Future: je viendrai je sentirai Condit. : Imperat. : je viendrais je sentirais je me suis assis(e) je m'assierai (also asseyerai) je m'assierais (also asseyerais) assieds-toi asseyons-nous asseyez-vous que je m'asseye viens sens venons sentons venez sentez Pres. subj. : que je vienne^ que je sente Impf.subj. : que je vinsse quejesentisse que je m'assisse 367. La ville a ses plaisirs. City life has its pleasures. Cette ville est belle: j'en admire les monuments. This city is beautiful: I admire its momiments. Its and their are translated (i) by son, sa, ses when the thing possessed is in the same clause as the thing which possesses ; (2) generally by en . . . le, la, V, les when they are in different clauses. 368. Vocabulary I'etalage (m.), the display, show window. la vitrine, the window (of a shop), la chaussee, the causeway, street. la connaissance, the acquaintance. fatigue, -e, tired. penetrer dans, to enter. traverser, to cross. admirer, to admire. s'asseoir, to manquer (de), to fail. saluer, to greet. rencontrer, to meet. s'arreter, to stop. se reposer, to rest. se diriger, to direct one's steps. franchir, to cross. sentir, to feel. parvenir a, to reach. se mettre (a), to begin (to). sit down. 1 The ist and 2d persons plural are formed regularly; see note ^, p. 137. All the compounds of Tjentr are conjugated like vemr. beginner's FRENCH l8l 369. Text {Suite) 1. EUe s'arrete aux vitrines des magasins et elle se met a en^admirer les^etalages. 2. Elle ne manque pas de saluer les^amis et les connaissances qu'elle rencontre. 3. Elle traverse la chaussee et elle se dirige vers le pare. 4. Elle y parvient; elle en franchit I'entree et elle y penetre. 5. Elle se sent fatiguee; elle s'assied sur un banc et elle s'y repose. 370. Transposition 1. Conjugate every sentence in the present. 2. Use the second person plural of the conditional. 3. Use the third person plural of the preterit. 4. Use the first person singular (feminine) of the past indefinite. 5. Use the third person singular of the future. 6. Use the second person singular of the imperfect. . 7. Use the interrogative forms. 371. Questions 1. (a) Qui s'arrete aux vitrines des magasins? (y) (&) Qui est ce qui se met a en admirer les etalages? 2. Qui ne manque pas de saluer ses amis et ses con- naissances? (les) 3. (a) Qui est ce qui traverse la chaussee? (la) {h) Qui se dirige vers le pare? (y) 4. (a) Qui est ce qui y parvient? (h) Qui en franchit Tentree? (la) (c) Qui est ce qui y penetre ? l82 BEGINNER^S FRENCH 5. (a) Qui se sent fatigue? (b) Qui est ce qui s'assied sur un banc? (y) (c) Qui s'y repose? 6. (a) Devant quoi s'arrete-t-elle ? (b) Que se met elle a admirer? 7. (a) Qui salue-t-elle ? (b) Est ce qu'elle salue les connaissances qu'elle ren- contre? (les) 8. (a) Qu'est ce qu'elle traverse? (b) Vers quoi se dirige-t-elle ? 9. (a) Ou parvient elle? (b) Que franchit elle? (c) Dans quoi penetre-t-elle ? .10. (a) Comment se sent elle? (b) Que fait elle? (c) Oil se repose-t-elle ? 372. Grammar Drill 1. I have amused myself, she has rejoiced, we (m.) have betaken ourselves, they (f.) have deceived themselves, you (m.) had (pluperf.) amused yourselves, we (f.) shall have rejoiced, they (m.) would have betaken themselves, she would have deceived herself. 2. She comes, were you coming? we came,^ you will come, they (f.) have come, they would not come, do not come. 3. I reach^ there, we shall reach there, she did not reach^ there, was she reaching there? we should not reach there, reach there. 4. He will feel it (m.), are we feeling it? they would not feel it, you felt* it, feel it, you have not felt it. 5. We sit down there, you sat down* there, will you sit 1 Preterit. ^ parvenir, conjugated like venir. beginner's FRENCH 1 83 down there ? we should not sit down there, were they sitting down there? let us not sit down there, they have sat down there. 373. Translation I. Why does everybody stop on the sidewalk on the right? 2. There is the large store of which I have spoken to you. 3. All the ladies stop there and admire its displays. 4. We shall cross the street and we shall stop there also. 5. If you begin to look at every window that we shall see on our way, we shall never reach the park. 6. Ladies^ take delight in stopping in front of every show window. 7. If we meet some friends of yours,^ shall we greet them? 8. We shall not fail to do so.^ 9. Do you see that gentle- man who is resting in an armchair on the sidewalk in front of the hotel ? 10. Is he an acquaintance of yours ?* 11. Yes, he is a good friend of mine.^ 12. If he saw us, he would not fail to greet us. 13. At what time shall we reach the park? 14. If we hasten, we shall reach there in a quarter of an® hour. 15. When you feel tired, we shall sit down. 16. Here is the park towards which we direct our steps. 17. Shall we enter there? 18. Its entrance is superb. 19. Let us cross it. 20. I feel tired. 21. Here are some chairs. 22. Take one of them. 23. We shall sit down a few minutes. 24. When we have rested, we shall go home. 374. Reading Lesson ENIGMES I. Mon premier est un metal precieux, Mon second est un habitant des cieux Et mon tout est un fruit delicieux. (•95uBJo) ^ Supply the. 2 Say : Some of your friends. ^ Replace by it. * Say: One of your acquaintances. ^ Say : One of my good friends. ^ Omit. 184 beginner's FRENCH ' 2. Cinq voyelles, une consonne, En frangais composent mon nom, Et je porte sur ma personne De quoi Tecrire sans crayon. (•nB^siQ) 3. Tout parait renverse chez moi. • Le laquais precede le maitre, Le manant vient avant le roi, Le simple clerc avant le pretre ; Le printemps vient apres I'ete. Noel avant la Trinite, C'en est assez pour me connaitre. (•9JlBUU0ipiQ) 4. Quelqu'un propose dans une societe I'enigme suivante : « Je ne suis pas ce que je suis, car si j'etais ce que je suis, je ne serais pas ce que je suis.)) En voici la solution : C'est un valet qui n'est pas le maitre qu'il suit, car s'il etait le maitre qu'il suit, il ne serait pas le valet. THIRTY-EIGHTH LESSON Rules 375. I. La plate bande, les plates bandes, the border, the borders. 2. Un chef d'ceuvre, des chefs d'ceuvre, a masterpiece, some masterpieces. 3. La contre allee, les contre allees, the side alley, the side alleys. 1. When a compound noun is formed of two nouns or of a noun and an adjective, both words are put in the plural. 2. When it is formed of two nouns connected by a beginner's FRENCH 185 preposition expressed or understood, the first one alone is put in the plural. 3. When it is formed of a noun and an invariable word, the noun alone is put in the plural. 376. Je vois des enfants jouer dans le pare. / see children playing in the park. After verbs meaning to feel, to see, to hear, the English present participle is replaced by the infinitive in French. 377. resoudre dire valoir {to solve, decide) {to say, tell) {to be worth) Pres. part. : resolvant disant valant Past part. : resolu dit valu Pres. ind. : je resous je dis je vaux tu resous tu dis tu vaux il ) ^ . .. \ resout elle ) elle \ ,, > vaut elle J nous resolvons nous disons nous valons vous resolvez vous dites vous valez ^ f, { resolvent ,. { disent elles ) elles \ elles 1^^'^"' Imperf. ind. : je resolvais je disais je valais Preterit : je resolus je dis je valus Past indef . : j'ai resolu j'ai dit j'ai valu Future : je resoudrai je dirai je vaudrai Condit. : je resoudrais je dirais je vaudrais Imperat. : resous dis vaux resolvons disons valons resolvez dites valez Pres. subj.: que je resolve que je dise que je vaille* Impf. subj.: que je resolusse : que je disse que je valusse 1 The ist and 2d persons plural are formed regularly ; see note b, p. 137. i86 BEGINNER S FRENCH 378. Vocabulary le chef d'oeuvre, the masterpiece. le sculpteur, the sculptor. Tequipage (m.), the equipage. I'apres midi (m. or f.), the after- noon. la statue, the statue. rautomobile (f.), the automobile. la bicyclette, the bicycle. la peine, the trouble, the ivhile. celebre, celebrated. delicieu-x, -se, delightful. ideal, -e, ideal. passer, to pass, spend. repasser, to repass. se lever, to get up. se promener, to take a walk. resoudre (de), to decide (to). dire, to say, tell. valoir, to be worth. faire beau, to be fine (weather). 379. Text (Suite) 1. On se dit: il fait beau, il fait delicieux, il fait un temps ideal. 2. On resout de passer Tapres midi au pare. 3. On_y aper9oit de longues^avenues, de petits lacs et de belles statues, chefs d'oeuvre de sculp- teurs celebres. 4. On_y voit de superbes^equipages, des bicy- clettes et des^automobiles passer et repasser. 5. On se leve, on va et Ton vient, on se pro- mene et Ton se plait a admirer la nature. 6. Cela en vaut la peine. 380. Transposition 1. Conjugate sentences i, 2, 3, 4 and 5 in the present. 2. Use the first person plural of the imperfect, wherever it is possible. 3. Use the second person plural of the future, wherever it is possible. 4. Use the first person singular of the preterit, wherever it is possible. beginner's FRENCH 1 87 5. Use the third person plural of the conditional, wher- ever it is possible. 6. Use the second person plural (masculine) of the past indefinite, wherever it is possible. 7. Use the interrogative forms. 381. Questions 1. (a) Que se dit on? (b) Fait il beau? (c) Est ce qu'il fait delicieux? (d) Fait il un temps ideal? 2. Ou resout on de passer I'apres midi? (le) 3. (a) Quest ce qu'on aper^oit dans le pare? (y) (b) De qui ces statues sont elles les chefs d'oeuvre? 4. (a) Que voit on passer et repasser? (b) Est ce qu'on voit beaucoup de bicyclettes passer et repasser? 5. (a) Se leve-t-on? (b) Va-t-on et vient on ? (c) Est ce que Ton se promene? (d) Que se plait on a admirer? 6. Cela en vaut il la peine? (Use les promeneurs instead of on as subject in the answers to questions beginning with qui.) 7. (a) Qu'est ce que les promeneurs se disent? (b) Quel temps fait il? 8. Qui resout de passer Tapres midi au pare? (I'y) 9. (a) Qui est ce qui apergoit de longues avenues? (en) (b) Qui est ce qui apergoit de petits lacs? (en) (c) Qui est ce qui apergoit de belles statues? (en) (d) Est ce^ des chefs d'oeuvre? (en) 10. (a) Qui voit de superbes equipages passer et re- ' passer? (en) 1 See note p. 144. 1 88 beginner's FRENCH (b) Qui est ce qui voit des bicyclettes et des auto- mobiles? (en) 11. (a) Qui se leve? (b) Qui est ce qui va et vient? (c) Qui se promene? (d) Qui est ce qui se plait a admirer la nature? (la) 12. Qu'est ce qui vaut la peine d'etre admire? 382. Grammar Drill 1. They have not decided (solved), I shall decide, were you deciding? they did not decide,^ we decide, you would decide, does she decide? we decided,^ will you not decide? 2. He says, she said,^ they did not say ;^ we shall say, do you say? would you say? they have said, have they said? I used to say, I did not use to say. Let us not tell, tell, tell me, tell her,^ tell him,^ do not tell her,^ say to yourself. 3. I am worth, is it^ better?* you are not worth, they were not worth, we were (pret.) worth, she has been worth, will it be^ better?* we would not be worth. 383. Translation I. In summer, this long walk was delightful. 2. How was the weather? 3. We used to say that it was ideal. 4. Did you seldom come to this park? 5. I have already told you that we used to come whenever^ the weather was fine. 6. That was worth the while. 7. We had decided to spend all our afternoons in this park. 8. We used to come to^ admire beautiful^ nature. 9. In front of what did you use to stop? 10. We used to stop in front of the statues which beautify the lawns. 11. The sculptors who (have) ^ Use the preterit. ^ Supply io. * Supply worth. * Use the adverb mieux. ^ Replace by when. « Omit. '^ Supply the. beginner's FRENCH 189 made them are famous. 12. We used to take delight in ad- miring these masterpieces. 13. They are worth admiring.^ 14. Do you see tliose wide avenues? 15. When it was fine weather, one used to perceive automobiles and bicycles there. 16. They were passing and repassing. 17. Tell me, did you use to take walks there? 18. When we reached^ one of the entrances of the park, we felt^ very tired. 19. We used to sit .down on chairs for a quarter of an hour. 20. Then we used to get up and direct our steps towards the large lake, near which we used to see many carriages going and coming slowly. THIRTY-NINTH LESSON Rules Review §§ 118, 267, 339, 375- 384. Je vais mc promcncr. / am going to take a walk. 2. Je m'amuse k regarder les enfants. / enjoy watching the children. 3. Je crains d'etre en retard. / am afraid I shall he late. 4. J'ai la permission de sortir. / have permission to go out. 5. Je suis pret a partir. / am ready to depart. 6. II est difficile de comprendre cela. It is difficult to understand that. C'est difficile a comprendre. That is difficult to under- stand. When two verbs having the same subject are used in the same clause, the second one depending on the first, the latter is put in the infinitive unless the first is the auxiliary verb etre or avoir. 1 Say : the trouble of being admired. 2 imperfect. 1 90 BEGINNER S FRENCH 1. The first verb may require no preposition before the second. 2. It may require the preposition a. 3. It may require the preposition de. Some require either. 4. Nouns generally require the preposition de. 5. Some adjectives require a, some de. 6. When an adjective is preceded by il est, it requires de before the following infinitive; if preceded by c'est, it re- quires a. No general rule (except for 6) can be given. Practice only will accustom students to use the proper preposition. The preposition to be used is found between parentheses after every verb in the special and general vocabularies. 385. Infin. : Pres. part. : Past part. : Pres. ind. : je crains tu crains il or elle craint Imperf. ind. : Preterit : Past indef . : Future : Condit. Imperat! Pres. subj.: Imperf. subj. .) craindre (to' fear) craig^ant craint nous craignons vous craignez ils or elles craignent je craignais je craignis j'ai craint je craindrai je craindrais crains, craignons, craignez que je craigne que je craignisse 386. Vocabulary le parfum, the perfume. le soleil. the sun. le parterre, the flower bed. le chemin, the^ road, way. la centre allee, the side path. la plate bande. the border. la branche. the branch. marcher, to n'alk. BEGINNER S FRENCH 191 respirer, to breathe, inhale. s'amuser (a), to enjoy, s'attarder (a), to stay late, tarry. se coucher, to go to bed, set. se divertir (a), to enjoy. craindre (de), to fear. prendre garde (de), to take care not (to). reprendre le chemin de, to go back to. voluptueusement, with delight. trop, too, too many. 387. Text (Suie^ et Fin) 1. On s'amuse ^ regarder les^enfants jouer sur les pelouses et dans les centre allees. 2. On prend garde de marcher sur les plates bandes des parterres. 3. On respire voluptueusement le parfum des fleurs. 4. On se divertit ^ ecouter les^oiseaux chanter sur les branches des^arbres. 5. Mais le soleil se couche: il est sept^heures cinq. 6. On reprend le chemin de la maison et Ton se hate, car on craint de s etre trop^attarde. 388. Transposition 1. Conjugate every sentence (except 5) in the present. 2. Use the third person singular of the future. 3. Use the first person plural of the imperfect whenever possible. 4. Use the second person singular of the conditional. 5. Use the third person plural of the preterit (use the imperfect in the last clause of the fifth sentence). 6. Use the first person plural (masculine) of the pluper- fect (use the imperfect in the last clause of the fifth sen- tence). 192 BEGINNER S FRENCH 389. Questions (Use les promeneurs instead of on as subject.) 1. (a) Qui s'amuse a regarder les enfants? (les) (b) Oil ceux ci jouent ils? 2. Qui prend garde de marcher sur les plates bandes des parterres? (y) 3. (a) Qui respire le parfum des fleurs? (le) (b) Comment le respirent ils? 4. (a) Qui est ce qui se divertit a ecouter les oiseaux? (les) (b) Ou ceux ci chantent ils? 5. (a) Qu'est ce qui se couche? (b) Quelle heure est il? 6. (a) Qui reprend le chemin de la maison? (le) (b) Qui est ce qui se hate? (c) Que craignent ils? 7. Que s'amuse-t-on a regarder? A.: M., on s'amuse. . . 8. Que prend on garde de faire? 9. Que respire-t-on voluptueusement ? 10. A quoi se divertit on? 11. (a) Qu'est ce que le soleil fait? (b) Est il sept heures cinq? 12. (o) Quel chemin reprend on? (b) Est ce que Ton se hate? (c) Pourquoi? 390. Grammar Drill 1. We fear, they did not fear,* had he feared? we should fear, fear nothing, I shall fear, was she fearing? you have feared, he feared.* 2. I take care not to fall ; one would take care not to 1 Use the preterit BEGINNERS FRENCH I93 look at; have they taken care not to do that? he took^ care not to walk ; shall we take care not to cross ? you were taking care not to talk ; take care not to fall. 391. Translation I . Where would your friends go if the weather was fine ? 2. They would direct their steps towards the park. 3. They would not tarry to admire its entrance. 4. It is not worth looking at. 5. Would you go with them if the weather was ideal? 6. I do not say no. 7. We should take care not to cross the streets. 8. What would you fear? 9. We should fear to meet an automobile. 10. How would you spend your time? 11. We should go and come in the side paths. 12. We should look at the children playing on the lawns. 13. Would your friends enjoy looking at them? 14. I am sure of it. 15. When my friends were^ tired, they would take chairs and would sit down.^ 16. What would you listen to?^ 17. We should listen to the birds singing in the trees. 18. They fear nothing, they fear nobody. 19. My friends and I would* also breathe with delight the sweet perfumes of the flowers of the borders. 20. Children should take care not to pick any nor to walk in the flower beds. 21. That is forbidden. 22. When the sun set,^ we should go back at once to our homes, 23. Would your friends hasten? 24. rhey would not tarry. 25. Would they fear being punished ? 26. I shall not tell you.^ 1 Preterit. 2 Conditional. » Omit. * Supply we, 5 Say : it to you. 194 BEGINNERS FRENCH , FORTIETH LESSON Rules Review note d, bottom of p. 138; §§ 296, 355, 356, 384. 392. En entrant. In {while, on, by) coming in. Apres avoir dine. After dining. French prepositions require the infinitive except en which always requires the present participle as in English and apres which always requires the past infinitive. 393. Infin. , : tenir^ baire ponvoir (can, (to hold) (to drink) may, to be able) Pres. part. : tenant bnvant pouvant Past part. : tenu bn pu Pies. ind. : je tiens je bois je peux or je puis tu tiens tu bois tu peux elle ) '■ Ibcnt elle ) •L i-' nous tenons nous buvons nous pouvons vous tenez vous buvez vous pouvez ils ) . ils ) , . ^ ils } „ \ tiennent „ } boivent ,, } peuvent elles ) elles ) elles ) ^ Tmperf . ind. : je tenais je buvais je pouvais Preterit : je tins je bns je pus Past indef . : j'ai tenu j'ai bu j'ai pu Future : je tiendrai je boirai je pourrai Condit. : je tiendrais je boirais je pourrais Imperat. : tiens bois tenons buvons tenez buvez Pres. subj. : que je tienne^ que je boive^ que je puisse^ Imperf. subj.: ; que je tinsse que je busse que je pusse 1 Tgm'r is throughout conjugated like ventr, which see (366) ; s'entretettii and other compounds of tenir are conjugated like tenir. 2 The I St and 2d persons plural are formed regularly. ' It is irregular throughout. BEGINNERS FRENCH I95 394. Vocabulary Tevenement (m.), the event. le membre, the member. le diner, the dinner. la bibliotheque, the library. la faim, the hunger. la soif, the thirst. accoutume, -e, usual. diner, to dine. se regaler de, to regale one's self with, to have a feast of. s'entretenir de, to converse about. boire, to drink. pouvoir, can, may, be able. avoir faim, to be hungry. avoir soif, to be thirsty. 395. Text 1. A I'heure du diner, rendez-vous a la salle a manger. 2. Asseyez-vous a votre place accoutumee. 3. Si vous^avez faim, mangez ; buvez, si vous^avez soif. 4. En mangeant, entretenez-vous des^evene- ments du jour avec les membres de votre famille. 5. Au dessert, regalez-vous de gateaux et de fruits. 6. Apres^avoir dine, levez-vous de table et dirigez-vous vers la bibliotheque. 396. Transposition 1. Use the negative form of the imperative. 2. Use the second person singular of the imperative (af- firmative). 3. Use the first person plural of the imperative (negative) . 4. Replace the imperative (a) by the imperfect in the second person plural; (b) by the preterit in the first person plural ; (c) by the past indefinite in the third person singular feminine ; 196 beginner's FRENCH (d) by the pluperfect in the first person plural (mas- culine) . 397. Questions 1. A I'heure du diner, ou est ce que je dois me rendre? A.: Rendez-vous a la. . . 2. Ou m'assierai je? 3. (a) Si j'ai faim, que dois je faire? (b) Si j'ai soif, qu'est ce que je dois faire? - 4. (a) En mangeant, avec qui est ce que je peux ra'en- tretenir ? (b) De quoi puis je m'entretenir avec eux? 5. Au dessert, de quoi me regalerai je? 6. (a) Apres avoir dine, qu'est ce que je ferai? ' (b) Ou pourrai je aller? (In the answers to the follov^ing questions, use the first jv.rson plural of the present indicative.) 7. A I'heure du diner, qui se rend a la salle a manger? (y) 8. Qui s'assied a sa place accoutumee? (y) 9* (^) Qui mange s'il a faim? (&) Qui est ce qui boit s'il a soif? 10. (a) En mangeant, qui s'entretient avec les membres de sa famille? (b) Qui est ce qui s'entretient des evenements du jour avec eux? (en) 11. Au dessert, qui se regale de gateaux et de fruits? (en) 12. (a) Apres avoir dine, qui est ce qui se leve? (b) Qui se dirige vers la bibhotheque? ■ « 398. Grammar Drill I. I converse with my friends ; did she converse^ with her friend ? you will converse with his friends ; we have con- versed with your friends ; let us converse with our friends ; 1 Use the preterit. BEGINNERS FRENCH I97 would they converse with their friends? we conversed^ with them; you were conversing with your friend. 2. You* drink milk; he will not drink tea; were we drinking wine? he has drunk good wine; we drank^ fresh water; they are drinking water, should we drink chocolate? let us drink when we are thirsty, are you drinking beer? they drank^ no coffee. 3. We may, he could,^ will she be able? you have been able, I cannot, will you be able? she was^ able, can they? you would be able, we were^ able, you were^ not able. 399. Translation I. After taking a long walk in the park, you returned^ to your house. 2. Your friends wished^ to^ stop in front of the stores, but you said^ to them : " We cannot stop, let us not tarry, let us hasten, we are already late." 3. After enter- ing the house, you said^ to them : " Let us lay down our hats on the table of the anteroom and let us rest in the parlor while waiting for dinner time." 4. Your sister came^ and said^ to you : " Did you not hear* the bell ringing ? It is half past six, it is dinner time, come to- the dining room." 5. Your friends went^ there with you and the other members of the family, who were^ already seated in their usual seats, got^ up and greeted^ them. 6. Your father said^ to every- body : " Ladies and gentlemen, here are chairs, here are your seats, let us sit down." 7. Everybody seemed^ to^ be hungry and thirsty. 8. You heard^ your little brother saying to his neighbor : " Are you not hungry ? Are you not thirsty ? You do not eat, you do not drink; you can have a feast; do not tell anybody,^ but the maid has prepared a delicious 1 Use the preterit. ^ Use the imperfect. ^ Omit. * Use the past indefinite. ^ See note i and say : betook themselves. * Say : it to anybody. 198 BEGINNER S FRENCH dessert; I have seen it; that is worth the while." 9. You talked^ with your guests while eating and you conversed^ about what you had done and seen during your walk. 10. That is a more interesting subject than the events of the day. 11. After the dessert, everybody will get up and direct his steps towards the library. 12. You will say to your friends : *' Choose the most comfortable armchairs, sit down and rest yourselves. I am sure that you feel tired." 13. They will answer you : " We can stay only half an hour, we must return home.'* FORTY-FIRST LESSON Rules Review §§ 286, 307, 393. 400. Infin. : ouvrir (to open) lire (to read) Pres. part. : ouvrant lisant Past part. : ouvert In Pres. ind. : j ouvre je lis tu ouvres tulis il or elle ouvre il or elle lit nous ouvrons nous lisons vous ouvrez vous lisez ils or elles ouvrent ils or elles lisent Imperf . ind. : j'ouvrais je lisais Preterit : j 'ouvris je lus Past indef . : j'ai ouvert j'ai lu Future : j 'ouvrirai je lirai Conditional : j 'ouvrirais je lirais Imperat. : ouvre, ouvrons, ouvrez lis, lisons, lisez Pres. subj.: que j 'ouvre que je lise Imperf. subj.: que j'ouvrisse que je lusse ^ Use the preterit. BEGINNERS FRENCH I99 401. Vocabulary le journal, the newspaper. le roman, the novel. le morceau, the piece. le piano, the piano. la soiree, the evening reception. favori, -te, favorite. un.. .quelconque, any; some... or other. executer, to play. se mettre a (noun), to sit down at. parfois, sometimes. 402. Text 1. Asseyez-vous dans^un bon fauteuil et repo sez-vousc.y. 2. Lisez le journal du soir. 3. Cela fait, ouvrez un roman quelconque. 4. Mettez-vous parfois au piano et executez quelques^uns de vos morceaux favoris. 5. Tantot allez au theatre ou au bal. 6. Tantot rendez-vous a une soiree et diver- tissez-vouscy autant que vous pouvez. 403. Transposition 1. Use the first person plural of the imperative. 2. Use the second person singular of the imperative. 3. Replace the imperative (a) by the conditional in the first person singular; (b) by the preterit m the third person singular; (c) by the pluperfect in the second person plural (mascuHne) . 404. Questions 1. (a) Oti m'assierai je? A.: Asseyez-vous dans... (b) M'y reposerai je? 2. Qu'est ce que je lirai? 200 BEGINNER S FRENCH 3. Cela fait, qu'est ce que j'ouvrirai? 4. (o) Ou me mettrai je parfois? (b) Quels morceaux est ce que j 'executerai ? 5. Ou irai je le soir? 6. (a) Est ce que je me rendrai a une soiree? (y) (b) Est ce que je m'y divertirai? (In the answers to the following questions, use the third person plural of the future.) 7. (a) Qui s'assiera dans un bon fauteuil? (y) (b) Qui est ce qui s'y reposera? 8. Qui lira le journal du soir? (le) 9. Cela fait, qui est ce qui ouvrira un roman quelcon- que? (en) 10. (a) Qui se mettra parfois au piano? (y) (b) Qui executera quelques uns de ses morceaux favoris? (en) 11. Qui ira tantot au theatre ou au bal? 12. (a) Qui se rendra tantot a une soiree? (y) (b) Qui s'y divertira autant qu'il pourra? 405. Grammar Drill 1. I am reading, they have read, was she reading? we should not read, do you read? we read,^ you had not read, let us read, did he read ?^ will she read ? do not read, he will have read. 2. We were opening, have they opened? you will not open, I have opened, they did not open,^ does he open? she had opened, I am opening, the door is open, they would open, let us not open, will she have opened? open, I would have opened. 3. I could not,^ you may, shall we be able? they have been able, he cannot, they had not been able, will she be able ? you were^ able, may we ? I should be able, we were^ not able. 1 yse the preterit. ^ yse the imperfect. BEGINNER S FRENCH 20I 406. Translation I. After dining, my father got^ up and said^ to the other members of the family : '' Let us go to the Hbrary." 2. The maid quickly opened^ the door. 3. We sat^ down in comfortable armchairs. 4. What did you do?^ 5. Every evening, my father opens the newspapers and reads them from beginning to end. 6. That is his dessert. 7. My sister will probably read a novel. 8. Sometimes she says to me: " Let us sit down at the piano, let us open it and (let us) play some piece or other." 9. If I do not feel too tired, I sit down at the piano with her and we play a few of them. 10. Can your father 2 read when you play the^ piano ? 11. He does not hear us. 12. That done, how do you spend your time? 13. After playing all our favorite pieces, we shall converse about the events of the day. 14. Do your brothers stay at home in* the evening? 15. No, they seldom stay there; they stay there when it rains. 16. Sometimes the elder says to the younger: "Let us go to the ball." 17. Sometimes the younger will say to the elder : " Let us go^ to some theater or other." 18. Do you and your sister* go out much? 19. Sometimes we must go^ to an evening re- ception. 20. Sometimes we go to the theater. 21. Some- times we are present at a ball. 22. Then I say to my sister : " Let us enjoy ourselves as much as we can." 23. And we dance from the beginning to the end. ' 407. Reading Lesson LA PETITE HIRONDELLE C'etait sur la tourelle Du vieux clocher bruni. La petite hirondelle fitait au bord du nid. ^ Use the past indefinite. 2 ggg note, p. 95. ^ Supply of. * Omit. 5 Replace hy: betake ourselves. ^ Say: Your sister and you (aiS- *)• 202 BEGINNERS FRENCH « Courage, dit sa mere, Ouvre ton aile au vent, Ouvre-la tout entiere Et t elance en avant.)) Mais rhirondelle hesite Et dit : « C'est bieii profond ; Mon aile est trop petite.)) Sa mere lui repond: ¥. Quand je me suis jetee Du haut de notre toit, Le bon Dieu m'a portee, Petite comme toi.)) L'hirondelle legere Ouvre son aile au vent, L'ouvre bien tout entiere, Et s'elance en avant. Elle vole, 6 surprise! Elle ne craint plus rien; Tout autour de I'eglise, Comme elle vole bien! Et sa mere avec elle De tout son coeur chantait Sa chanson d'hirondelle Au Dieu qui la portait. Ra] BEGINNERS FRENCH 203 FORTY-SECOND LESSON Review §§ 408. Infin. Pres. part. : Past part.: Pres. ind. : Imperf . ind. : Preterit : Past indef . : Future : Conditional : Imperat. : Pres. subj.: Imperf. subj. Rules 118, 201, 243, 261, 376, 392. atteindre (to attain) introduire (to intro- (Cf. craindre, 3^50 atteignant atteint j'atteins tu atteins il or elle atteint nous atteignons vous atteignez duce, put) introduisant introduit j'introduis tu introduis il or elle introduit nous introduisons vous introduisez ils or elles atteignent ils or elles introduisent J atteignais j 'atteig^is j'ai atteint j 'atteindrai j 'atteindrais atteins atteignons atteignez que j'atteigne que j'atteignisse j 'introduisais j'introduisis j'ai introduit j'introduirai j 'introduirais introduis introduisons introduisez que j'introduise que j'introduisisse 409. Vocabulary le matin, the morning. I'exemple (m.), the example. le palier, the landing. le bouton, the button, the knob. la chambre a coucher, the bed- la cle, the key. [room. la serrure, the lock. tourner, to turn. tirer, to take out. atteindre. to reach. introduire, to put. s'avancer a tatons, to grope one's way. doucement, gently, noiselessly. par exemple, for instance. a tatons, gropingly. 6 heures du soir, 6 o'clock P.M. 2 heures du matin, 2 o'clock a.m. de quelle maniere? in what man- vers, about, tozvards. \nerf 204 BEGINNERS FRENCH 410. Text 1. Si votre frere allait a un bal, par exemple, il rentrerait vers deux^heures du matin. 2. II monterait doucement I'escalier. 3. Il^atteindrait le palier et s'avancerait a tatons vers la porte de sa chambre a coucher. 4. II tirerait la cle de sa poche et Tintroduirait dans la serrure. 5. II tournerait la cle et le bouton et ouvrirait la porte. (a suivr^.) 411. Transposition 1. Conjugate every sentence in the conditional. (Keep the imperfect in the clause beginning with si.) Ex.: i. Si j'allais. . . , je rentrerais. . . 2. Replace the conditional and the imperfect (a) by the present in the second person singular; {h) by the future in the third person plural (use the present after si) ; (c) by the past indefinite in the first person plural (masculine) ; {d) by the imperative in the second person plural. Ex. : I. Si vous allez. . ., rentrez vers. . . 3. Use the interrogative forms. 412. Questions 1. Qui rentrerait vers deux heures du matin s'il allait a un bal? A.: Mon frere rentrerait. . . 2. Qui monterait doucement Tescalier? (le) 3. (a) Qui est ce qui atteindrait le palier? (le) BEGINNER S FRENCH 205 (b) Qui s'avancerait a tatons vers la porte de sa chambre a coucher? 4. (a) Qui est ce qui tirerait la cle de sa poche? (Ten) (b) Qui I'introduirait dans la serrure? (y) 5. (a) Qui tournerait la cle et le bouton? (les) (b) Qui est ce qui ouvrirait la porte? (la) (In the answers to the following questions, use the second person plural of the conditional.) 6. Si nous allions a un bal, par exemple, a quelle heure rentrerions nous? 7. (a) Apres etre rentres, qu'est ce que nous ferions? (b) Comment le monterions nous? 8. (a) Qu'est ce que nous atteindrions ? (b) Vers guoi nous avancerions nous? (c) De quelle maniere nous avancerions nous? 9. (a) Que tirerions nous de notre poche? (eii) (b) Oil rintroduirions nous? 10. (a) Que tournerions nous? (b) Qu'est ce que nous ouvririons? 413. Grammar Drill 1. They attained/ you do not attain, had he attained? let us attain, I should not attain, did he attain ?^ I attain, was she attaining? you will attain, we have not attained, we shall have attained, you* used to attain. 2. We were introducing, have we introduced? they are introducing, they had introduced, do not introduce, you did not introduce,^ he introduces, will they introduce? I intro- duced,^ she would have introduced, you used to introdiKe. 3. He opened,^ will you open? she has opened, had they opened? we were opening, he does not open, shall we have opened? you* would not have opened. 1 Use the preterit. 2o6 BEGINNER^S FRENCH 414. Translation I. Do your brothers go sometimes to a ball? 2. They seldom go there. 3. At what time- do they go out every evening? 4. They generally go out at 8 o'clock. 5. At what time do they come home? 6. They come home about half past one a. m. 7. They open the doors noiselessly, but I hear them going up the stairs. 8. Do they take you along? 9. I very seldom go out with them. 10. What do they do when they reach the door? 11. On^ Monday, for instance, when we reached^ the door, the elder took^ the key of the house out of his pocket and gave^ it to the younger, saying^ to him: " Open the door." 12. The latter took^ it and put^ it into the lock. 13. Then he turned^ the key and the knob and opened^ the door. 14. If I am with them, they do not go up the stairs noiselessly. 15. When we have reached the landing, we grope our way towards our bedrooms. 16. When I have found my door, I put the key into the lock. 17. Then I turn the key and the knob and I open my door. 18. I hear my brothers opening theirs when I am already in my room. FORTY-THIRD LESSON Rules Review §§ I37, 234, 3o8, 364, 365. 415- La bougie allumee. The candle {having been) lighted. La ville prise. The town {having been) taken. Past participles conjugated without any auxiliary must be treated as adjectives. 1 Omit. 2 Use the past indefinite. ^ Supply whiU (en). BEGINNERS FRENCH 207 416. Infin. : dormir Iteindre {to pourvoir^ {to sleep) extinguish) {to provide) (Cf. sortir 357.) (Cf. craindre 385 or atteindre 408.) Pres. part. : dormant eteignant pourvoyant Past part. : dormi eteint pourvu Pres. ind. : je dors j'eteins je pourvois tu dors tu eteins tu pourvois i'ne V^^ .. \ etemt elle \ die jpou'-^oit nous dormons nous eteignons nous pourvoyons vous dormez vous eteignez vous pourvoyez ils ) dor- elles \ ment elles \ ^^^^^"^"^ ils ) elles \ P^^^voient Imperf. ind. : je dormais j'eteignais je pourvoyais Preterit : je dormis j'eteignis je pourvus Past indef . : j'ai dormi j'ai eteint j'ai pourvu Future : je dormirai j'eteindrai je pourvoirai Condit. : je dormirais j'eteindrais je pourvoirais Imperat. : dors eteins pourvois dormons eteignons pourvoyons dormez eteignez pourvoyez Pres. subj. : que je dorme que j'eteigne que je pourvoie Impf. subj.; que je dor- que j'eteignisse quejepourvusse 417. Vocabulary le bee de gaz, the gas burner. le perfectionnement, the improve- ment. le lit, the bed. le lavabo, the washstand. le tapis, the carpet. 1 Is conjugated like voir (see 331), except in the preterit, future and conditional. le mur, the wall. rallumette (f.), the match, la lampe, the lamp. la bougie, the wax candle. la lumiere, the light. la commode, the bureau. 208 BEGINNER S FRENCH la sorte, the kind. la descente de lit, the bedside la mousseline, the muslin, [rug. moderne, modern. eleetrique, electric. frotter, to rub, scratch, strike. allumer, to light. presser, to press. eclairer, to light up. orner de, to adorn with. tapisser de, to paper, hang with. dormir sur les deux oreilles, to sleep soundly. eteindre, to extinguish. a petites fleurs, with small fig ures. 418. Text {Sutfe et Fin) 1. Mes freres prendraient une allumette, la frotteraient et allumeraient une lampe, une bougie ou un bee de gaz. 2. Si la maison etait pourvue des perfectionne- ments modernes, ils presseraient le bouton de la lumiere eleetrique et eclaireraient la chambre. 3. Ils verraient le lit, le lavabo, la commode, un fauteuil, des chaises, une table, le tapis, la descente de lit, les fenetres ornees de rideaux de mousseline ou de dentelle et les murs tapisses d'un papier a petites fleurs. 4. Ils^eteindraient la lumiere, se coucheraient et dormiraient sur les deux oreilles. 419. Transposition 1. Conjugate every sentence in the conditional. (The first clause of the second sentence should not be altered.) 2. Replace the conditional and the imperfect (a) by the present in the third person singular; (&) by the imperfect in the second person plural; (r) by the future in the first person plural; (fl?) by the imperative in the first person plural. BEGINNER S FRENCH 20g (In c and d, use the present in the clause beginning with si.) 3. Use the interrogative forms. 420. Questions 1. (a) Vos freres prendraient ils une allumette? (en) (b) Est ce qu'ils la f rotteraient ? (c) Allumeraient ils une lampe? (en) 2. (a) Si la maison etait pourvue des perfectionnements moderhes, presseraient ils le bouton de la lu- miere electrique? (le) (b) Est ce qu'ils eclaireraient la chambre? (la) 3. (a) Verraient ils le lit, la commode, les chaises, etc.? (les) (b) De quelle espece de rideaux les fenetres sont elles ornees ? (c) De quelle sorte de papier les murs sont ils tapisses ? 4. (a) Est ce qu'ils eteindraient la lumiere?" (la) (b) iVpres Tavoir eteinte, se coucheraient ils? (c) Comment dormiraient ils? (In the answers to the following questions, use the first person singular of the conditional.) 5. (a) Qu'est ce que vous prendriez? (b) La frotteriez vous? (c) Qu'est ce que vous allumeriez? 6. (a) Si la maison etait pourvue des perfectionnements modernes, que presseriez vous? (b) Qu'est ce que vous eclaireriez? 7. (a) Quels meubles verriez vous? (b) Est ce que vous verriez aussi le tapis, la descente de lit, les rideaux, etc.? (les) 8. (a) Qu'est ce que vous eteindriez? (b) Apres avoir eteint la lumiere, que feriez vous? (c) Comment dormiriez vous? 2IO BEGINNERS FRENCH 421. Grammar Drill 1. You were sleeping, I have slept, do not sleep, will they have slept? we slept,^ will they sleep? I do not sleep, we had slept, have you* slept ? I was not sleeping, does she sleep ? 2. She will have extinguished, shall we extinguish? he is not extinguishing, I extinguished,^ we extinguish, they would not have extinguished, were they extinguishing? I should not extinguish, let us extinguish, you had not ex- tinguished, have they extinguished? we extinguished.^ 3. We provided,^ you will not provide, provide, have you* provided ? you would have provided, he is providing, she did not use to provide, I have provided, are you providing? will he provide ? we used to provide, they provided.^ 422. Translation I. Why do you scratch a match? 2. I am going to light a gas burner. 3. I must light up the staircase. 4. Why do you not press the button of the electric light? 5. Our house is not yet provided with all the modern improvements. 6. Do you see the staircase ? 7. Take another match. 8. Put out that lamp. 9. We shall climb the stairs gropingly. 10. We at last reach the landing. 11. Wait. I cannot find the door of my bedroom. 12. While waiting, you hear your friend putting the key into the lock, turning the key and the knob and opening a door. 13. He strikes a match and lights a wax candle. 14. Enter; we shall sleep in this room. 15. You can see that I have chosen the largest in the house. 16. Muslin curtains adorn the two windows. 17. Mine are adorned with lace curtains. 18. A blue paper with small figures covers the four walls. 19. Those of my bedroom 1 Use the preterit. BEGINNERS FRENCH 211 are hung with a green paper with large figures. 20. Here are the two beds, the washstand and the bureau that my mother has given me. 21. This carpet and this bedside rug I (have) received^ from my aunt. 22. There are two arm- chairs and half a dozen chairs. 23. Sit down. 24. I feel very tired. 25. Let us go to bed. 26. In what bed shall I sleep ? 27. Take this one ; I shall take that one. 28. Let us sleep. 29. Sleep soundly. 30. I shall put out the light when you have gone- to bed. 423. Reading Lesson UNE SUPPRESSION SPIRITUELLE En 1640, Louis treize assiegeait la ville d' Arras que les Espagnols occupaient. Ceux ci .firent graver sur une des portes : (( Quand les Frangais prendront Arras, Les souris mangeront les rats.)) La ville prise, un soldat frangais effaqa la lettre p du quatrieme mot et on laissa subsister I'inscription ainsi mo- difiee. REPARTIE ROYALE Lors de la visite de Louis quatorze a Beaune, Sa Majeste gouta le vin que le maire de cette ville lui offrit et le trouva excellent. — Oh ! Sire, dit le maire, il n'est pas comparable a celui que nous avons dans nos caves. — Et que vous gardez sans doute pour une meilleure occasion, lui repartit le roi. 1 Supply them. 2 Use the past future. 212 BEGINNER S FRENCH FORTY-FOURTH LESSON Rules Review §§ ii8, 243, 356, 364, 365, 377- 424. lis se regardent, or on se regarde. They look at themselves, or they look at one another, lis se regardent Tun Tantre, or reciproquement. They look at each other. lis se regardent les nns les autres, or reciproquement. They look at one another. 1. Beside reflexive verbs there are reciprocal verbs which are conjugated on the same model. 2. The reciprocal verbs are used only in the plural except when on is the subject. 3. Each other, one another are then translated by nous, vous, se. 4. To avoid a misunderstanding, Pun Tautre (two), les uns les autres (more than two) or reciproquement may be added. 425. Vocabulary le tour, the turn. le retour, the return. I'oreiller (m.). the pillow. le traversin, the bolster. le matelas, the mattress. le drap, the sheet. le couvre pieds, the counterpane. le bonsoir, good evening, good night. la couverture. the blanket. double, double. baisser, to pull down. se deshabiller, to undress. se parler. to speak to one another. s'enfermer a double tour, to shut one's self in by locking the door. s'endormir, to fall asleep. se dire bonsoir, to bid one an- other good night. promptement. quickly. immediatement. immediately. comme, as. de retour de, on coming back from. beginner's FRENCH 2I3 426. Text 1. De retour du bal, mes soeurs se sont^enfer- mees a double tour dans leur chambre. 2. Apres^avoir baisse les stores, elles^ont^ouvert le lit. 3. Alors elles^ont vu les oreillers, le traversin, le matelas, les draps, la couverture et le couvre pieds. 4. Elles se sont promptement deshabillees. 5. Apres^avoir eteint la lumiere, elles se sont couchees. 6. Elles ne se sont pas parle comme de cou- tume. 7. Apres s etre dit bonsoir, elles se sontjmme- diatement endormies. 427. Transposition I. Replace the third person (a) by nous, (b) by vons. , 2. Replace the past indefinite (a) by the pluperfect in the first person plural (mas- culine) ; (b) by the past future in the second person plural (feminine) ; (c) by the past conditional in the third person plural (masculine) ; (d) by the preterit in the second person plural ; (e) by the future in the first person plural; (/) by the imperfect in the third person plural; (g) by the present in the second person plural ; (h) by the imperative in the first person plural. 214 beginner's FRENCH 428. Questions • I. (a) De retour du bal, qu'est ce que vos soeurs ont fait? A.: Elles se sont. . . (b) Comment se sont elles enfermees? 2. (a) Qu'est ce qu'elles ont baisse? (b) Qu'ont elles ouvert? 3. (a) Qu'est ce qu'elles ont vu? (b) Ont elles vu le matelas et le traversin? (negative) (les) 4. Se sont elles lentement deshabillees ? 5. (a) Est ce qu'elles ont eteint la lumiere? (la) (b) Apres Tavoir eteinte, qu'ont elles fait? 6. Se sont elles parle comme de coutume? 7. (a) Est ce qu'elles se sont dit bonsoir? (b) Quand se sont elles endormies? ( In the answers to the following questions, use mon f rere et moi, nous as subjects.) 8. De retour du bal, qui s'est enferme a double tour dans sa chambre? A.: Mon frereet moi, nous nous sommes en- f ermes . . . 9. (a) Qui a baisse les stores? (les) (b) Qui a ouvert le lit? (le) 10. Qui a vu les oreillers, les draps, la couverture, etc.? (les) 11. Qui s'est promptement deshabille? 12. (a) Qui a eteint la lumiere? (la) (b) Alors, qui s'est couche? 13. A qui n'avez vous pas parle comme -de coutume? 14. (a) A qui avez vous dit bonsoir? (&) Qui s'est immediatement endormi? BEGINNERS FRENCH 215 429. Grammar Drill r. We fell* asleep, will they have fallen asleep? I am falling asleep, has she fallen asleep ? you* were falling asleep, fall asleep, they would fall asleep, I had not fallen asleep, will you fall asleep ? let us not fall asleep, he would not' have fallen asleep, we used to fall asleep. 2. We shall bid one another good night, were you bid- ding one another good night? had they bidden one another good night? you bid one another good night, they will not have bidden one another good night, we have bidden one another good night, they bade* one another good night, bid one another good night, we should bid one another good night, let us bid one another good night, vs^ould you not have bidden one another good night? 430. Translation I. Did^ you go^ to the ball? 2. Yes, my brother and P went there and we enjoyed ourselves very^ much.^ 3. At what time did you go home? 4. It was^ i o'clock a. m. when we arrived at our house? 5. Did you light a lamp or a gas burner ? 6. No, we groped our way towards the door of our bedroom. 7. Nobody heard us coming home. 8. Did you shut yourselves in by locking the door? 9. No, we did not shut ourselves in. 10. We fear nothing. 11. We sleep with^ our door open. 12. On coming back from that ball, who lighted the candle? 13. My brother lighted it. 14. Who pulled down the shades? 15. /* pulled them down. 16. Who opened the bed? 17. He*' opened it. 18. (It is also) P (who) took the pillows and the counterpane and 1 Use the preterit. 2 Put every past tense in the past indefinite throughout this exercise. 3 Replace by : betake yourselves. * See 315. ^ Omit. * Supply there. "^ Use the imperfect. 2i6 beginner's FRENCH threw them on a chair. 19. He^ took the blanket and placed it on another chair. 20. It was^ not cold. 21. We kept only the bolster, the sheets and the mattress. 22. While undress- ing, we spoke to each other. 23. We conversed about what'^ we had done, said and heard at the ball. 24. Who ex- tinguished the light? 25. P extinguished it, for he^ went to bed first."* 26. After going to bed, we bade good night to each other. 2y. We immediately fell asleep. 431. Reading Lesson ACROSTICHE Pour comprendre cet acrostiche, le lecteur doit se rap- peler que le lonis est une piece d'or de 20 francs. Autrefois, il valait 24 livres. On I'appela louis parce que la fabrication en fut commencee sous le regne du roi Louis treize. On suppose que I'acrostiche suivant fut fait sur Louis quatorze, par quelque solliciteur pauvre. Louis est un heros sans peur et sans reproche. On desire le voir. Aussitot qu'on I'approche, Tin sentiment d'amour enflamme tous les coeurs ; II ne trouve chez nous que des adorateurs; Son image e§t partout, excepte dans ma poche. FORTY-FIFTH LESSON Rules Review §§ 118, 243, 277, 286, 375- 432. II se lave les mains. He washes his (own) hands. II lui lave les mains. He washes his (somebody else's) hands. Elle me lave les mains. She washes my hands. 1 See 315. 2 Use the imperfect. « See 252. i. * Supply (At, BEGINNER S FRENCH 217 Before nouns expressing parts of the body, the possessive adjective is generally replaced in French by the definite article and the possession expressed by a corresponding per- sonal pronoun object. 433« J'ai bien dormi; je me suis leve assez tard. / slept well; I got up rather late. Adverbs are placed after the auxiliary in compound tenses. Exception. Adverbs especially expressing time and place and all adverbial phrases are placed after the past participles in compound tenses. 434. Infin. : servir {to serve) vetir {to dress) (Cf. sortir,357.) servant Pres. part. : Past part. : Pres. ind. : Imperf . ind. : Preterit : Past indef . : Future : Conditional : Imperat. : Pres. subj.: Imperf. subj. servi je sers tu sers il or elle sert nous servons vous servez ils or elles servent je servais je servis j'ai servi je servirai je servirais • sers, servons, servez que je serve que je servisse vetant vetu je vets tu vets il or elle vet nous vetons vous vetez ils or elles vetent je vetais je vetis j'ai vetu je vetirai je vetirais vets, vetons, vetez que je vete que je vetisse 435. Vocabulary le bonjour, good day, good morn- ing. le champ, the field. I'essuie main (m.), the towel (especially for the hands), la main, the hand. 2l8 beginner's FRENCH la dent, the tooth. la serviette de toilette, the towel. la hate, the haste. laver, to wash. brosser, to brush. souhaiter, to wish, bid. s'evciller, to awake. se pcigner, to comb one's hair. s'aider (a), to help one another se servir, to make use. se vetir, to dress (up). assez, rather, pretty. profondement, soundly. sur le champ, tout de suite, at once. a la hate, hastily. 436. Text 1. Mes soeurs ont profondement dormi et le lendemain elles se sont^eveillees assez tard. 2. Elles se sent souhaite le bonjour et elles se sont levees sur le champ. 3. Elles se sont lave les mains et le visage et elles se sont brosse les dents. 4. Elles se sont servies d'essuie mains et de serviettes de toilette. 5. Elles se sont peignees et se sont^aidees Tune Tautre. 6. Enfin elles se sont vetues a la hate. 7. Elles se sont rendues tout de suite a la salle a manger. 437. Transposition 1. Replace the third person (a) by nous, (b) by vous. 2. Replace the past indefinite (a) by the past conditional in the first person plural (feminine) : (b) by the pluperfect in the second person plural (masculine) ; beginner's FRENCH 2ig (c) by the past future in the third person plural (masculine; more than two. See 424. 4) ; (d) by the imperfect in the second person plural (mas- culine) ; (e) by the present in the first person plural (mas- culine) ; (/) by the future in the third person plural (mascu- line) ; (g) by the preterit in the first person plural (mas- culine) ; (h) by the imperative in the second person plural (masculine). 438. Questions 1. (a) Comment vos soeurs ont elles dormi? (b) Le lendemain, se sont elles eveillees de bonne heure ? 2. (a) Que se sont elles souhaite? (b) Se sont elles levees sur le champ? 3. (a) Se sont elles lave les mains? (les) (6) Est ce qu'elles se sont lave le visage? (le) (c) Se sont elles brosse les dents? (les) 4. De quoi se sont elles servies? 5. (a) Se sont elles peignees ? (b) Se sont elles aidees reciproquement ? 6. Comment se sont elles vetues? 7. Ou se sont elles rendues tout de suite? (In the answers to the following questions, use votre cousin et vous, vous as subjects.) 1. (a) Qui a profondement dormi ? ^..\Votre frere et vous, vous . . . (b) Qui s'est eveille assez tard le lendemain? 2. (a) A qui avons nous souhaite le bonjour? (le) (b) Qui s'est leve sur le champ? 220 BEGINNERS FRENCH 3. (a) Qui s'est lave les mains ? (les) (b) Qui s'est lave le visage? (le) (c) Qui est ce qui s'est brosse les dents? (les) 4. Qui s'est servi d'essuie mains et de serviettes de toi- lette? (en) 5. Qui s'est peigne? 6. Qui s'est vetu a la hate? 7. Qui s'est rendu tout de suite a la salle a manger? (y) 439. Grammar Drill 1. I dress myself, will they dress themselves? she has dressed herself, dress yourself, they would have dressed themselves, she was dressing herself, you did not dress* yourselves, do we dress ourselves ? you will not have dressed yourselves, we should not dress ourselves, had they not dressed themselves? 2. I make use of pencils, we used to make use of them,^ they did not make* use of them, will he make use of them? make use of them; they make use of paper, I should. make use of it,^'let us not make use of it, you have not made use of it, had she made use of it ? we shall have made use of it, you* would have made use of it. 440. Translation I. When my brother and P awoke* the next day, we spoke to each other and we bade each other good morning. 2. I asked him:*^ "Did you sleep well?" 3. He answered me that he had slept soundly. 4. I said to him : " You may still remain in^ bed one or two hours.^ 5. Are you no longer sleepy? 6. I am going to get up." 7. I got up at once. 1 Use the preterit. 2 g^e 182. ' See 315. i. * Put every past tense in the past indefinite. ^ Supply to. • Say: at the. ' Say: one hour or two. BEGINNERS FRENCH 221 8. My brother asked me : " What time is it ? " 9. I answered him:^ " It is quarter past seven." 10. I had awakened later than usual. 11. My brother got up with me. 12. I had already washed my hands and he had already washed his face when the waiter brought us towels. 13. We made use of them at once. 14. He had already dressed when we heard at last the bell for^ the breakfast. 15. I said to him: " Go^ to the dining room." 16. Do not wait for me. 17. I have not yet dressed. 18. I shall hasten as much as I can.* 19. I shall dress quickly. 20. And he went^ at once to the dining room. 441. Reading Lesson LA TOM BE ET LA ROSE La tombe dit a la rose: (( Des pleurs dont I'aube t'arrose Que f ais tu, f leur des amours ? » La rose dit a la tombe: « Que fais tu de ce qui tombe Dans ton gouffre ouvert toujours?)) La rose dit : « Tombeau sombre, De ces pleurs je fais dans I'ombre Un parfum d'ambre et de miel.)) La tombe dit : « Fleur plaintive, De chaque ame qui m'arrive Je fais un ange du ciel.)) Victor Hugo. 1 Supply to. 2 Say: of. 3 Betake thyself. * Use the future. 6 Cf. note 3. 222 BEGINNER S FRENCH FORTY-SIXTH LESSON Rules Review the formation of tenses (p. 137), the present participles and present subjunctives of the preceding irregu- lar verbs. 442. INFINITIVE PRESENT PARTICIPLE parler parlant punir punissant perdre perdant The present subjunctive of any verb present participle by replacing -ant by - -ent. 443- Exceptions. Infin. : avoir (to have) Pres. part. : ayant Pres. subj. : que j'aie, that I may have que tu aies qu'il ait qu'elle ait que nous ayons que vous ayez ^ qu'ils aient qu'elles aient Infin.: faire (to do, to make) Pres. part. Pres. subj. faisant que je fasse que tu fasses qu'il fasse qu'elle fasse PRESENT SUBJUNCTIVE que je parle que je punisse que je perde is formed from the e, -es, -e, -ions, -iez, etre (to be) etant que je sois que tu sois qu'il soit qu'elle soit que nous soyons que vous soyez qu'ils soient qu'elles soient pouvoir (to be able, may, can) pouvant que je puisse que tu puisses qu'il puisse qu'elle puisse BEGINNERS FRENCH 223 que nous fassions que nous puissions que vous fassiez que vous puissiez qu'ils fassent qu'ils puissent qu'elles fassent qu'elles puissent Faire, pouvoir and etre are the only verbs the present subjunctive of which is irregular throughout. The first and second persons plural of the other irregular verbs are regular. 444. I. II faut qu'il soit puni. // is necessary that he should be punished. II se peut que je fasse ce travail. It may be that I shall do this work. 2. Pensez vous qu'il vienne? Do you think that he may come? Je ne pense pas qu'il vienne. / do not think he will come. 3. Je veux (je doute, je suis heureux, je regrette, je crains, je suis triste, etc.) qu'ils reussissent. / wish (I doubt, I am happy, I regret, I fear, I am sad, etc.) that they should succeed. 4. Vous etes le seul (le meilleur) ami que j'aie. You are the only (the best) friend I have. 5. Je veux vous parler avant que vous partiez. / zvish to speak to you before you go away. The subjunctive mood has no future tense. The present replaces it. The subjunctive mood is not used in a principal clause. It is used in secondary clauses in the following cases : SECONDARY PRINCIPAL CLAUSE CLAUSE 1. Impersonal verbs implying necessity or ' uncertainty. 2. Negative or interrogative verbs. 3. Verbs expressing will, feeling, emotion except hope. 4. Superlatives. m c n 224 BEGINNER S FRENCH .\ in order that. lest. ™"^' \ although. bien que, J ** avant que, before. a moins que, unless. jusqu'a ce que, ////. in c o Pres. part. : Past part. : Pres. ind. : 5. After one of the following conjunctions : afin que, pour que, de peur que, de crainte que, sans que, without. que (used for any of the above conjunctions and for si), and a few others. 445. Infin. : ecrire {to write) ecrivant ecrit j'ecris tu ecris il or elle ecrit nous ecrivons vous ecrivez ils or elles ecrivent j 'ecrivais j'ecrivis j'ai ecrit j 'ecrirai j'ecrirais ecris, ecrivons, ecrivez que j'ecrive que j'ecrivisse Sonffrir {to suffer) is entirely conjugated on the same* model as ouvrir (which see 400). Imperf. ind. : Preterit : Past indef . : Future : Condit. : Imperat. : Pres. subj.: Imperf. subj.: vouloir {to will, wish, want) voulant voulu je veux tu veux il or elle veut nous voulons vous voulez ils or elles veulent je voulais je voulus j'ai voulu je voudrai je voudrais veuille, veuillez que je veuille^ que je voulusse 446. Vocabulary le medecin, the physician. le docteur, the doctor. le pharmacien, the druggist. le pouls, the pulse. la langue, the tongue. la prescription, the prescription. la garde malade. the nurse. gauche, left. 1 The 1st and 2d persons plural are regular. See 443. BEGINNER S FRENCH 225 possible, possible. penser, to think. tater, to feel. soigner, to attend, to take care of. guerir, to cure. souffrir, to suffer. ecrire, to write. remettre, to hand, give. vouloir, to will, want, wish. faire venir, to send for. faire preparer, to have {some- thing) prepared. se porter (bien), to be {in good health). dangereusement, dangerously. tot, soon. ^^^" ^^^' j in order that. pour que, ) il faut, it is necessary. il vaut mieux, it is better. 447. Text 1. Quand vous ne vous portez pas bien, il faut que vous restiez dans votre chambre et que vous gardiez le lit. 2. II vaut mieux que vous fassiez venir un medecin afin qu'il vous soigne. 3. Quand^il vient, vous lui dites: "Docteur, je souffre beaucoup; je veux que vous me gue- rissiez le plus tot possible." 4. Vous lui tendez la main gauche pour qu'il vous tate le pouls et vous lui montrez votre langue afin qu'il puisse I'examiner. 5. II ne pense pas que vous soyez dangereuse- ment malade. 6. II ecrit une prescription et la remet a la garde malade pour qu'elle la fasse preparer chez le pharmacien. 448. Transposition I. Replace everywhere the second person by the first, second and third persons singular. No change in the direct discourse. Ex.: i. Quand je ne me..., il faut que je. . . 226 beginner's FRENCH 2. Replace the second person by the first and third per- sons plural, the third singular by the third plural and mede- cin, docteur and garde malade by medecins, doctenrs and garde malades. In the direct discourse, use the first person plural. 3. Replace the present indicative by the future. No change in the direct discourse and in the subordinate clauses except in the one beginning with quand. 449. Questions 1. (a) Quand je ne me porte pas bien, ou faut il que je reste? A.: M., quand vous ne. . ., il faut que vous ... (5) Que faut il que je garde? 2. (a) Qui vaut il mieux que je fasse venir? (b) Pourquoi vaut il mieux que j'en fasse venir un? 3. (a) Quand il vient, que faut il que je lui dise? (b) Qu'est ce que je veux que le medecin fasse? 4. (a) Qu'est ce qu'il faut que je lui tende? (b) Pourquoi veut il que je la lui tende? (c) Que demande-t-il que je lui montre? (d) Pourquoi demande-t-il que je la lui montre? 5. Le medecin pense-t-il que je sois dangereusement malade ? 6. (a) Enfin, que faut il que le docteur fasse? (b) A qui vaut il mieux qu'il la remette? (c) Qu'est ce que je veux que la garde malade fasse? 450. Grammar Drill I. She has not wished, are you wishing? I was wishing, we shall not wish, you had wished, we wished,^ would you wish ? she will not have wished, he is wishing, I should have wished, I am sorry that he wishes to^ depart. 1 Preterit * Omit. BEGINNER S P'RENCH 22^] 2. Were we writing? write, will he write? you wrote,^ they do not write, we should write, I have not written, she is writing, you* had written, we should have written, you* must^ write. 3. She has not suffered, shall we suffer? they did not suffer,^ I am suffering, you would not have suffered, you* would suffer, we have suffered, let us not suffer, I had suffered, were you suffering? I do not wish you to^ suffer. 451. Translation I. My father is dangerously ill. 2. We wish him to* remain in his room. 3. He must^ keep his (the) bed. 4. What is the matter with him?^ 5. He suffers a great deal. 6. You must® send for your physician as soon as pos- sible. 7. It is better that you [should] also send for a nurse in order that she [may] take care of him. 8. When the physician comes,^ you will say to him : " Doctor, we wish you to^ attend our father." 9. When he enters^ the^ bed- room, he will say : " Good day, sir ; how are^ you ? What is the matter with you?^^ Where do you suffer? Hold out your left hand to me, in order that I [may] feel your pulse. 10. You must® also show me your tongue in order that I [may] examine it." 11. Afterwards, he will sit down at the desk.* 12. He must® write a long prescription. 13. After handing it to the nurse, he will get up and go out. 14. You must® wait for him in the anteroom. 15. You will ask him :" ''Can you cure him? what must® we do?" 16. He will answer you : '' It^^ jg nothing ; he must® remain in^^ bed. It is possible that I [may] cure him within a few days. 17. You must® have the prescription prepared as soon as possible." 18. You will send the nurse to your druggist. 1 Preterit. 2 Say : il faut que tii . . . ^ Say : that you should . . . * Cf. note 3 above. ^ cf „ote ^ above. « Say: what has he. 5* ■^ Use the future. » Supply ////r;, ^ Use: se porter. W Cf. note 6 above. 11 Supply to. 12 Replace by that. 1* Say : at the. 228 BEGINNERS FRENCH FORTY-SEVENTH LESSON Rules Review §§ 305, 444, 445- 452. Craignez vous que je tombe? Do yon fear I shall fallf Je crains que vous ne tombiez. / fear you will fait. Je ne crains pas que vous tombiez. / do not fear you will fall. - Formerly, after verbs meaning fear (craindre, avoir peur, trembler), take care (prendre garde) and prevent (em- pecher), when used affirmatively, and after the conjunc- tions de penr que, de crainte que, a moins que (see 444* 5)> the particle ne was required before the verb of the secondary clause, although affirmative. According to the new decree, ne^may be left out in this case. 453. Infm. : mourir rire vivre {to die) {to laugh) {to live) Pres. part. : mourant riant vivant Past part. : mort ri vecu Pres. ind. : je meurs je ris je vis tu meurs tu ris tu vis ille ["•'^'^ il ) . 11 i nt elle ) 11 r vit elle \ nous mourons nous rions nous vivons vous mourez vous riez vous vivez lis ) dies f"^^^^^^* lis ) . elles } "^"^ ils ) . , .. ). vivent elles J Imperf . : je mourais je riais je vivais Preterit : je mourus je ris je vecus Past indef . : je suis mort(e) j'ai ri j'ai v^cu BEGINNER S FRENCH 229 Future : Condit. : Imperat. : Pres. subj. Impf . subj . je mourrai je mourrais meurs mourons mourez que je menre^ je rirai je rirais ris rions riez je vivrai je vivrais vis vivons vivez que je rie que je'vive queje mourusse que je nsse que je vecusse 454. Vocabulary le surlendemain, two days later. I'intervalle (m.), the interval. le medicament, the medicine. la visite, the visit. la crainte, the fear. la pilule, the pill. la cuilleree, the spoonful. la convalescence, the convales- cence. desagreable, disagreeable. avaler, to swallow, to take. ordonner, to order, to prescribe. remercier de, to thank for. s'en aller, to go away. parti r, to depart, to go away. mourir, to die. devenir, to become. revenir, to come back. revivre, to revive. rire de, to laugh at. en vouloir a, to bear a grudge against, be very much dis- pleased with. entrer en convalescence, to be- come convalescent. toutes les deux heures, every two hours. avant que, before. a moins que, unless. quoique, bien que, de plus en plus, more and more. although. 455. Text 1. Avant que le docteur parte (s'en aille), il faut que je le remercie de sa visite. 2. Je lui dis qu'il faut qu'il revienne le surlen- demain, a moins que je ne meure dans Tintervalle. 3. II rit de mes craintes et je lui e'n veux, quoique (bien que) ce soit le meilleur^ami que j'aie. 1 The 1st and 2d persons plural are regular (see 443). 230 BEGINNER S FRENCH' 4. Il^ordonne que j'avale une pilule toutes les deux^heures et que je boive une cuilleree d'un medicament desagreable avant chaque repas. 5. Ma famille craint que je ne devienne de plus en plus-dangereusement malade. 6. Mais, apres quelques jours, -j entre en con- valescence, je revis, je suis gueri(e). 456. Transposition 1. Replace everywhere the first person singular (a) by the second and third persons singular; (b) by the first, second and third persons pkiral and docteur by docteurs. 2. Replace the present indicative by the future. 3. Use the interrogative forms. 457. Questions 1. Avant que le docteur s'en aille, de quoi faut il que vous le remerciiez? 2. (a) Que lui dites vous qu'il faut qu'il fasse? (b) Le medecin craint il que vous mouriez dans V'm- tervalle ? ( Negative. ) 3. (a) De quoi rit il? (b) Faut il que vous lui en vouliez? (Negative.) (c) N'est ce pas le meilleur ami que vous ayez? 4. (a) Qu'est ce qu'il ordonne que vous avaliez? (b) Quand faut il que vous en avaliez une? (c) Qu'ordonne-t-il que vous buviez? (d) Quand faut il que vous en buviez une? 5. Qu'est ce que votre famille craint? 6. (a) Apres quelques jours, que faites vous? (b) Est ce que vous revivez? (c) £tes vous gueri(e) ? BEGINNERS FRENCH 23 1 458. Grammar Drill 1. We were starving;^ are you very thirsty?^ we are tired to death f they died ;* she will have starved ;^ let u§ die; you* shall not die; is she starving?^ we should be very thirsty;^ you would have been tired to death ;^ he wants us to** die. 2. We are not laughing, they have laughed, were you laughing ? I had not laughed, will you laugh ? I am laughing, they laughed,* you* would have laughed, they would not laugh, laugh, we must® not laugh. 3. We lived,* will they live? he is living, were they liv- ing? you live, we have lived, you would not live, she had lived, we shall have lived, let us live, I fear that they will not live. 459. Translation I . I say to the physician : You must^ come back as soon as possible. 2. I fear that my father will die. 3. Do not laugh at my fears or I shall be very much displeased with you. 4. Before you depart, you must^ tell me whether^ he is dangerously ill. 5. You must not® laugh at me. 6. You are the best friend that my father has. 7. I wish you to^^ cure him quickly. 8. When the nurse comes" back, your father must*^ take two pills every three hours. 9. When must he^^ take the medicine? 10. It is not disagreeable. 11. He must*^ take it before his meals. 12. How many spoonfuls do you prescribe (for) him to^^ drink ?^* 13. You must^ give him two spoonfuls.^* 14. You must not® send for me unless in the interval he becomes worse (more and more ^ mourir de faim. ^ mourir de soif. ^ mourir de fatigue. * Preterit. ^ Say: that we should . . . * Say: it is not necessary that we . . . ' Say: it will be necessary that you . . . ^ Say: if. ' Say: it is not necessary that you ... "^^ Say: that you should . . . ^1 Use the future. *'^ Cf. note 7 above. ^8 Cf. note 5 above. ^* Supply : of it 2^2 BEGINNERS FRENCH sick). 15. The physician comes back two days later before you send for him. 16. You say to him: " Although you are the best friend that we have, we* shall be very much dis- pleased with you unless you cure my father within a few days." 17. " He will not die. 18. In five or six days you will laugh at your fears. 19. He will become convalescent. 20. He will revive. 21. He will be cured. 22. And you will thank me for my visits." 460. Reading Lesson UN COURTISAN PRIS AU PIECE Un matin, Lx)uis XIV dit au marechal de Grammont: « Monsieur le marechal, lisez, je vous prie, ce petit madrigal et voyez si vous en avez jamais vu un si imper- tinent. Parce qu'on sait que depuis peu j'aime les vers, on m'en apporte de toutes les fagons.w Le marechal, apres I'avoir lu, dit au roi: « Votre Majeste juge divinement bien de toutes choses : il est vrai que voila le plus sot et le plus ridicule madrigal que j'aie jamais lu.)) Le roi se mit a rire et lui dit : « N'est il pas vrai que celui qui I'a fait est bien fat? — Sire, il n*y a pas moyen de lui donner un autre nom. — Oh bien ! je suis ravi que vous m'ayez parle si bonne- ment; c'est moi qui I'ai fait. — Ah! sire, quelle- trahison ! que Votre Majeste me le rende! je I'ai lu brusquement. — Non, monsieur le marechal, les premiers sentiments sont tou jours les plus naturels.)) Le roi a fort ri de cette folic et tout le monde pense que voila la plus cruelle petite chose que Ton puisse faire a un vieux courtisan. Mme de Sevigne. BEGINNERS FRENCH 233 FORTY-EIGHTH LESSON Rules Review §§ 443, 444, 452. 461. Infin. : instruire (/o paraitre instruct, teach) (to appear) Pres. part. : instruisant Past part. : instruit Pres. ind. : 1 instruis tu instruis il die \' instruit paraissant paru je parais tu parais > parait elle taire (not to say) taisant tu je tais tu tais il elle Itait nous instruisons nous paraissons nous taisons vous instruisez vous paraissez vous taisez ils ) . . ils ) . ils V incfriiic/anf \ instruisent Impf . ind. : Preterit : Past indef . Future : Condit. : Imperat. : Pres. subj. Impf. subj. elles ) j'instruisais j'instruisis j'ai instruit j'instruirai j'instruirais instruis instruisons instruisez que j'instruise paraissent |tai taisent elles ) je paraissais je parus j'ai paru je paraitrai je paraitrais parais paraissons paraissez que je paraisse que j'instruisisseque je parusse Decouvrir (to uncover) is conjugated like couvrir (see 307), and convenir (to agree, to he proper) like venir (see 366), elles je taisais je tus j'ai tu je me tairai je me tairais tais taisons taisez que je taise que je tusse 234 beginner's FRENCH 462. Vocabulary le parapluie, the umbrella. le samedi, Saturday. incertain, -e, threatening. respecti-f, -ve, respective. rare, rare. gronder, to scold. instruire, to instruct, to teach. paraitre, to appear, to seem. convenir, to be proper. se laire, to be silent. se decouvrir, to take off one's hat or cap. excepte, except. de peur que, de crainte que, en classe, to school. . 1 ^'''' 463. Text 1. Les parents veulent que leurs^enfants aillent en classe chaque jour, excepte le samedi et le dimanche, afin que les maitres lesjnstruisent. 2. Lo;-sque le temps paralt incertain, il vaut mieux qu'ils prennent leurs parapluies de peur qu'il ne pleuve. 3. II est tres rare qu'ils soient en retard. 4. En^entrant dans leurs classes respectives, il convient qu'ils se decouvrent, qu'ils se taisent et qu'ils s'asseyent a leurs places accoutumees. 5. II faut qu'ils se mettent au travail tout de suite de crainte que le maitre ne les gronde. 464. Transposition 1. Replace every third person plural representing enfants by the other persons singular and plural. Ex.: i. Mes parents veulent que j'aille en classe. . . Tes parents veulent que tu . . . 2. Replace everywhere the present of the indicative by the future. 3. Use the interrogative forms. BEGINNERS FRENCH 2^$ 465. Questions 1. (a) Quels jours de la semaine nos parents veulent ils que nous allions a Tecole? A.: Ils veulent que vous y . . . (b) Faut il que nous y allions le samedi et le di- manche ? (c) Pourquoi nos parents veulent ils que nous y allions ? 2. (a) Lorsque le temps parait incertain, que vaut il mieux que nous prenions? (b) Pourquoi vaut il mieux que nous les prenions? 3. Sommes nous souvent en retard? 4. (a) En entrant dans nos classes respectives, que con- vient il que nous fassions? (b) Convient il aussi que nous nous taisions? (c) Oil convient il que nous nous asseyions? 5. (a) A quoi faut il que nous nous mettions tout de suite ? (b) Pourquoi faut il que nous nous y mettions tout de suite? 466. Grammar Drill 1 . They taught^ their pupils ; had they taught you ? she was teaching her daughter ; teach us ; would she teach you ? we have taught them ; I teach the pupils ; will you teach me? he wishes me to teach his sons. 2. "Will he appear? they have appeared, she does not appear, you would not appear, appear, had you appeared? you appeared,^ I should not have appeared, we were ap- pearing, I fear that the weather will appear threatening. 3. Let us be silent, we should not be silent, they were silent,^ is she silent? we have been silent, will you be silent? 1 Preterit. 2'}^(i beginner's FRENCH she had not been silent, you were silent, you would not have been silent, I wish you to be silent. 467. Translation I. On^ what days do you go to school? 2. We must go there every day except Saturday and Sunday. 3. Who wishes you to go there? 4. Our parents wish us to go there. 5. What do they wish the teachers to do? 6. They wish them to educate us. 7. Do you take your umbrellas every day? 8. It is rare that we take them. 9. When will it be better for you to take them? 10. We shall take them when the weather appears to be threatening. 11. Why do you hurry? 12. We are late and we hurry lest our parents and our teachers should scold us. 13. Do you fear that it will rain ? 14. Yes, the weather seemed to be threatening this morning. 15. I fear that you will be late. 16. What does the teacher want you to do when you enter your respective class rooms? 17. He wants us to take off our hats. 18. Is it proper that you should be silent on^ entering the school? 19. Yes, but it is rare that we are silent. 20. When you are seated at your usual places, what does the teacher say to you? 21. " Gentlemen, be silent, start to work at once lest I scold you or punish you." 22. And we are silent and start to work at once. 1 Omit. 2 gn. BEGINNER S FRENCH 237 FORTY-NINTH LESSON Rules Review §§ 444, 452; note e, bottom of p. 138. 468. FIRST CONJUGATION SECOND CONJUGATION Infin. : parler punir Preterit : je parlai je punis tu parlas tu punis Impf. subj. : que je parlasse, que je punisse, that I might speak that I might punish que tu parlasses que tu punisses qu'il or elle parlat qu'il or elle punit que nous parlassions que nous punissions que vous parlassiez que vous punissiez qu'ils or elles parlassent ; qu'ils or elles punisser THIRD CONJUGATION Jnfin. : perdre avoir Preterit : je perdis j'eus tu perdis tu eus Impf. subj. : que je perdisse, que j'eusse, that I might lose that I might hofue que tu perdisses que tu eusses qu'il or elle perdit qu'il or elle eut que nous perdissions que nous eussions que vous perdissiez que vous eussiez qu'ils or elles perdissent ; qu'ils or elles eussent Infin. : gtre Preterit : je fus tu fus Impf. subj. : que je fusse, that I might he que nous fussions que tu fusses que vous fussiez qu'il or elle fut qu'ils or elles fussent 238 BEGINNERS FRENCH The first person singular of the imperfect subjunctive of any verb, regular or irregular, is formed by adding -se to the second person singular of the preterit. 469. Je suis content ) qu'il travaille. Je serai content C qu'il ait travaille. / am glad ) that he works. I shall he glad \ that he has worked. Je doutais qu'il partit. qu'il fut parti. je doutai j'ai doute je douterais I used to doubt I doubted I have doubted I should doubt I that he departed, that he had departed. SEQUENCE OF TENSES PRINCIPAL CLAUSE Present. Future. Imperfect. Preterit. Compound tenses. Conditional. 470. Infin. : acquerir (fa acquire) Pres. part. : acquerant Past part. : acquis Pres. ind. : j'acquiers tu acquiers il or elle acquiert nous acquerons vous acquerez ils or elles acquierent SECONDARY CLAUSE Present subjunctive. Past subjunctive. Imperfect subjunctive. Pluperfect subjunctive. croire (to believe; see 263). croyant cm je crois tu crois il or elle croit nous croyons vous croyez \\s or elles croient BEGINNER S FRENCH 239 Iniperf . ind. : j'acquerais je croyais Preterit: j 'acquis je crus Pastindef. : j'ai acquis j'ai cru Future: j'acquerrai je croirai Condit. : j'acquerrais je croirais Imperat. : acquiers crois acquerons croyons acquerez croyez Pres. subj. : que j'acquidre^ que je croie Impf. subj. : que j'acquisse que je crusse Infin. : savoir (to know thoroughly) Pres. part. : sachant Past part. : su Pres. ind. : je sais tu sais , il or elle sait nous savons vous savez ils or elles savent Imperf. ind. : jc savais Preterit : je sus Pastindef. : j'ai su Future: je saurai Condit. : je saurais Imperat. : sache, sachons, sachez Pres. subj. : que je sache Impf. subj.: que je susse Connaitre (to know, to be acquainted with) is con- jugated like paraitre (see 461). Connaitre is never used before a clause, and savoir is never used before a name of a person. 1 The first and second persons plural are regular. 240 BEGINNER S FRENCH 471. Vocabulary le progres, the progress. - le zele, the seal. le coeur, the heart. I'effort (m.), the effort. le devoir, the written exercise. le soin, the care. les jeunes gens (m. pi.), the young people. la connaissance. the knowledge. la legon, the lesson. studieu-x, -se, studious. rapide, rapid, quick. essentiel, -le, essential. satisfait (-e) de, pleased with. exiger, to require. travailler, to work. acquerir, to acquire. croire, to believe. connaitre, to be acquainted with. savoir, to knozv. jamais, ever. par coeur, by heart. de leur mieux, the best they can or could. 472. Text 1. Le maitre voulait que ses^eleves acquissent beaucoup de connaissances et fissent des progres rapides. 2. ILexigeait qu'ils travaillassent avec le plus grand zele et qu'ils sussent leurs le9ons par coeur. 3. II etait essentiel qu'ils repondissent de leur mieux a ses questions et que leurs devoirs fussent ecrits avec le plus grand soin. 4. Cependant, les^eleves ne craignaient pas que leur maitre les punit. 5. Celui ci etait satisfait de leurs^efforts et il croyait que c'etaient les jeunes gens les plus stu- dieux qu'il eut jamais connus. 473. Transposition I. Replace every third person plural representing §Uves by the other persons singular and plural. Ex. : i. Le maitre voulait que j 'acquisse . . . BEGINNER S FRENCH 24I 2. Replace the imperfect indicative (except c'etaient in 5) (o) by the preterit. Ex. : i. Le maitre voulut que. . . (b) by the past indefinite. Ex.: i. Le maitre a voulu que . . . (c) by the conditional. Ex. : i. Le maitre voudrait que. . . 3. Replace the imperfect indicative by the present (see 469). Ex.: I. Le maitre veut que ses eleves acquierent. . . 4. Replace the imperfect indicative by • the future and every third person plural representing eleves by the first person plural. Ex.: i. Le maitre voudra que nous acque- rions ... 474. Questions 1. (a) Qu'est ce que le maitre voulait que vous acquis- siez? A.: II voulait que nous. . . (b) Que voulait il que vous fissiez? 2. (a) Comment exigeait il que vous travaillassiez ? (b) Comment exigeait il que vous sussiez vos legons? 3. (a) De quelle maniere etait il essentiel que vous repondissiez a ses questions? (b) Comment etait il essentiel que vos devoirs fussent ecrits ? 4. Qu'est ce que vous ne craigniez pas que le maitre fit ? 5. (a) De quoi celui ci etait il satisfait? (&) Que croyait il que vous fussiez? 475. Grammar Drill I. Have they acquired? we v^ere not acquiring, he is acquiring, will you acquire? you* acquire, will she acquire? acquire, they will have acquired, you acquired/ we had not acquired. 1 Preterit. 242 BEGINNER S FRENCH 2. Would you believe? she had not believed, we believe, we used to believe, one would have believed, we believed,^ does she believe ? we shall believe, let us believe, they did not believe.^ 3. They have known, did you know?^ we knew,^ you would know, know, you will not have known, do they know ? we shall not know, you* do not know, you must know. 4. They are acquainted with, she was acquainted with,^ you will not be acquainted with, were we acquainted with?^ they had been acquainted with, are you acquainted with? we have not been acquainted with. 476. Translation I. What did your teachers wish^ you to* do? 2. They wished me to^ work the best I could. 3. They wished me to** be very industrious. 4. How did they require you to^ know your lessons? 5. They required every pupil to*^ know them by heart, but it was rare that we knew them by heart. 6. Had you to® write your exercises with much care? 7. Yes, each exercise had to^ be written with the greatest care. 8. What was it essential for the students to* do? 9. It was essential for us to® reply the best we could to the answers of the teachers. 10. What did your teachers tell you every day? II. Every teacher used to scold us and to tell us: 12. "I should wish your progress to^ be quick, I should wish you to^ work with more zeal. I should wish each one of you to^ acquire a great deal of knowledge. 13. Your parents wish us to° teach you, but it is rare that we are pleased with your efforts. 14. You are the least^** studious ^ Preterit 2 imperfect. ' Put in the imperfect every past t«ise of the principal clauses. * Say : that you should ... * Cf. note 4 above. ^ Say : was it necessary that you ... ' Cf. note 6 above. * Say : that the students should ... ^ Cf. note 8 above. ^^ mains. BEGINNER S FRENCH 243 young people that I have ever known." 15. Did you fear that your teachers would punish you? 16. No, we used to believe that they were the most amiable men that we had ever known. 477. Reading Lesson BONS MOTS DE DIOGENE I Diogene, voyant un maladroit lancer des javelots, alia s'asseoir pres du but et comme on lui en demandait le motif, il repondit : « Je crains qu'il ne me frappe.)) II Un jour, le meme philosophe visitait la ville de Myndus et voyant qu'elle avait des portes tres grandes et magni- fiques bien qu'elle f ut petite, il s'ecria : « Habitants de Myn- dus, fermez vos portes de peur que votfe ville ne s'enfuie.)) l'animal le plus nuisible On demandait au philosophe Bias quel etait I'animal le plus nuisible. II repondit : <( Si vous parlez des betes feroces, le tyran est I'animal le plus nuisible que je connaisse; si vous parlez des animaux apprivoises, c'est le flatteur.)) REPONSE DE SOCRATE Dans sa derniere entrevue avec son mari, I'epouse de Socrate, Xantippe, connue pour son humeur acariatre, s'e- criait en pleurant : « Mourras tu done condamne injuste- ment? — Prefererais tu, lui repondit il, que je mourusse condamne justement?)) POEMS FOR MEMORIZING List of poems for memorizing prescribed for elementary classes by the Regents of the University of the State of New York. Two of the prescribed poems have been given as reading lessons : " La Petite Mendiante," on page 163, and "La Tombe et la Rose," on page 221. LE COLIMAgON Sans ami, comme sans famille, Ici bas vivre en etranger; Se retirer dans sa coquille Au signal du moindre danger; S'aimer d'une amitie sans bornes, De soi seul emplir sa maison ; En sortir suivant la saison, Pour faire a son prochain les cornes; Signaler ses pas destructeurs Par les traces les plus impures; Outrager les plus belles fleurs Par ses baisers ou ses morsures; Enfin, chez soi comme en prison Vieillir, de jour en jour plus triste; C'est I'histoire de I'egoiste, Et celle du colimagon. Arnault. 244 beginner's FRENCH 245 LA FEUILLE DESSECHEE De ta tige detachee, Pauvre feuille dessechee, Ou vas tu ? — Je n'en sais rien, L'orage a brise le chene Qui seul etait mon soutien. De son inconstante haleine Le zephir ou I'aquilon Depuis ce jour me promene De la foret a la plaine, De la montagne au vallon. Je vais ou le vent me mene, Sans me plaindre ou m'effrayer; Je vais ou va toute chose, Ou va la feuille de rose Et la feuille de laurier. Arnault. LE PETIT PIERRE Je suis le petit Pierre, Du faubourg Saint Marceau, Messager ordinaire, Facteur et porteur d'eau. J'ai plus d'une ressource Pour faire mon chemin : Je n'emplis pas ma bourse; Mais je gagne mon pain. Je n'ai nl bois, ni terre, Ni chevaux, ni laquais ; 246 beginner's FRENCH Petit proprietaire, Mon fonds est deux crochets. Je prends comme il arrive L'ivraie et le bon grain ; Dieu veut que chacun vive, Et je gag^e mon pain. Contre un bel edifice J'ai place mon comptoir ; La, sans parler au Suisse, On peut tou jours me voir. Pour n'oublier personne, Je me leve matin Et la joumee est bonne Quand je gagne mon pain. Comme le disait Blaise, Feu Blaise, mon parrain. On est tou jours a I'aise Lorsque Ton n'a pas faim. Dans les jours de misere Je m'adresse au voisin; II a pitie de Pierre, Et je trouve mon pain. Boucher de Perthes. BEAU SOIR Lorsqu'au soleil couchant les rivieres sont roses Et qu'un tiede frisson court sur les champs de ble, Un conseil d'etre heureux semble sortir des choses Et monter vers le cceur trouble. BEGINNER S FRENCH 247 Un conseil de gouter le charme d'etre au monde Cependant qiron est jeune et que le soir est beau, Car nous nous en allons, comme s'en va cette onde : EUe a la mer, — nous au tombeau. Paul Bourget. ETOILES FILANTES Dans les nuits d'automne, errant par la ville, Je regarde au ciel avec mon desir, Car si, dans le temps qu'une etoile file, On forme un souhait, il doit s'accomplir. Enfant, mes souhaits sont toujours les memes: Quand un astre tombe, alors, plein d'emoi, Je fais de grands voeux afin que tu m'aimes Et qu'en ton exil tu penses a moi. A cette chimere, helas ! je veux croire, N'ayant que cela pour me consoler. Mais voici Thiver, la nuit devient noire, Et je ne vois plus d'etoiles filer. FRANgOIS COPPEE. CONSEILS A UN ENFANT Oh! bien loin de la voie Ou marche le pecheur, Chemine ou Dieu t'envoie! Enfant! garde ta joie! Lis! garde ta blancheur! 248 beginner's FRENCH Sois humble! que t'importe Le riche et le puissant! Un souffle les emporte. La force la plus forte, C'est un coeur innocent! Bien souvent Dieu repousse Du pied les hautes tours ; Mais dans le nid de mousse, Ou chante une voix douce, II regarde toujours ! Victor Hugo. PARTANT POUR LA SYRIE Partant pour la Syrie, Le jeune et beau Dunois Venait prier Marie De benir ses exploits: (( Faites, Reine immortelle,)) Lui dit il en partant, « Que j'aime la plus belle Et sois le plus vaillant.)) II trace sur la pierre Le serment de I'honneur Et va suivre a la guerre Le comte, son seigneur. Au noble voeu fidele, II dit en combattant : « Amour a la plus belle, Honneur au plus vaillant.)) BEGINNER^S FRENCH 249 On lui doit la victoire: (( Vraiment,)) dit le seigneur, (( Puisque tu fais ma gloirti, Je ferai ton bonheur. De ma fille Isabelle Sois I'epoux a I'instant, Car elle est la plus belle Et toi le plus vaillant.)) A I'autel de Marie lis contractent tous deux Cette union cherie Qui seule rend heureux. Chacun dans la chapelle Disait en les voyant: (( Amour a la plus belle, Honneur au plus vaillant.)) La Reine Hortense. TROIS FILS D'OR La bas sur la mer comme I'hirondelle Je voudrais m'enfuir et plus loin encor ; Mais j'ai beau vouloir, puisque la cruelle A lie mon coeur avec trois fils d'or. L'un est son regard ; I'autre son sourire ; Le troisieme enfin est sa levre en f leur ; Mais je I'aime trop, c^est un vrai martyre: Avec trois fils d'or elle a pris mon ccEur. 250 BEGINNERS FRENCH Oh, si je pouvais denouer ma chaine ! Adieu! pleurs, tourments — je prendrais I'essor. Mais non ! non ! Mieux vaut mourir a la peine Que de vous briser, 6 mes trois f ils d'or ! Leconte de Lisle. CHANSON DE BARBERINE Beau chevalier qui partez pour la guerre, Qu'allez vous faire Si loin d'ici? Voyez vous pas que la nuit est profonde, Et que le monde N'est que souci ? Vous qui croyez qu'une amour delaissee De la pensee S'enfuit ainsi, Helas! helas! chercheurs de renommee, Votre fumee S'envole aussi. Beau chevalier qui partez pour la guerre, Qu'allez vous faire Si loin de nous? J*en vai's pleurer, moi qui me laissais dire Que mon sourire fitait si doux. Alfred de Musset. BEGINNER S FRENCH 251 AUXILIARY VERBS I. Avoir PRESENT INFINITIVE avoir, to have. PRESENT PARTICIPLE ayant, having. PRESENT INDICATIVE j 'ai, / have. tu as. il or elle a. nous avoiis. vous avez. {\s or elles ont. IMPERFECT j'avais, / had, I used to have. tu a-^ais. il or elle avait . nous avioflg. vous aviez. ils or elles avaient. PRETERIT j'eus, / had. tu eus. il or elle eut. nous pjjrrip^ vous eutes. ils or elles eurent. FUTURE j'aurai, / shall or will have. tu auras. il or elle aura. nous aurons. vous aurez. ils or elles auront. PAST INFINITIVE avoir eu, to have had. PAST PARTICIPLE eu, -e, had. PAST INDEFINITE j'ai_£t4, / have had, I had. tu as^^^. il or elle a eu. nous avons eu. vous avez eu. ils or elles ont eu, PLUPERFECT j'avais eu, / had had. tu avals eu. il or elle avait eu. nous avions eu. vous aviez eu. ils or elles avaient eu. PAST ANTERIOR j'eus eUj, / had had. tu eus^fiu, il or elle ^t eu. nous eiimes eUj, vous eutes eu^ ils or elles eurent eu. PAST FUTURE j' aurai eu, / shall have had. tu auras^ eu. il or elle aura eu. nous aurons_eu. vous a urez e u. ils or elles auront eu. 252 beginner's FRENCH PRESENT CONDITIONAL / would or should have. j'aurais. tu aurais. il or elle aurait. nous aurions. vous auriez. ils or elles auraient. PRESENT SUBJUNCTIVE that I may have, that I have. que j'aie. que tu aies, qu'il or qu'elle ait que nous ayons. que vous ayez. qli^ls or qu'elles aient. IMPEgPECT SUBJUNCTIVE that I might have, that I had. que j^gusse. que tu Qijssfcs. qu'il or qu'elle ^. que nous eussion§. que vous eussiei. qu'ils or qu'elles eussent. PAST CONDITIONAL / would or should have had. j 'aurais_ey. tu aura is eu^ il or eile aurait _fiu, nous auriong.fiii. vous auriez eu. ils or elles auraient eu. PAST SUBJUNCTIVE that I may have had. que j'aie eu. que tu aies eu. qu'il or qu'elle ai t ^u. que nous ayons eu. que vous ayez eu. qu'ils or qu'elles aient eu. PLUPERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE that I might have had. que j'eusse eu. que tu eusses eu. qu'il or qu'elle eut eu. que nous eussions eu. que vous eussiez eu. qu'ils or qu'elles eussent eu. IMPERATIVE aie, have. ayons, let us liave, ayez, have. BEGINNER S FRENCH 253 2. Etre PRESENT INFINITIVE etre, to be. PRESENT PARTICIPLE etant, being. PRESENT INDICATIVE je suis, / am. tu es. /' ; .' ' il or^We est nous sgrnmes. vous etfis. ils or elles sont . IMPERFECT j'etais, / waSj I used to be. tu etais. il or elle etait. nous etions. wCriJG^ vous etiez. ils or elles etaient. PRETERIT je fus, / was. tu fus. il or ellefut. nous fumes. vous futesT" '^ "^ ils or elles furent. r-O^t FUTURE je serai, / shall or will be. tu seras. il or elle sera. nous serons, vous serez. ils or elles seront. PAST INFlit^ITIVE avoir ete, to have been. PAST PARTICIPLE ete, been. PAST INDEFINITE j'ai ete, / have been, I was. tu as ete. il or elle a ete. nous avons ete. vous avez ete. ils or elles ont ete. PLUPERFECT j 'avals ete, / had been. tu avals ete. il or elle avait ete. nous avions ete. vous aviez ete. ils or elles avaient ete. PAST ANTERIOR j'eus ete, / had been. tu eus ete. il or elle eut ete. nous eumes ete. vous eutes ete. ils or elles eurent ete. PAST FUTURE j'aurai ete, / shall have been. tu auras ete. il or elle aura ete. nous aurons ete. vous aurez ete. ils or elles auront ete. 254 BEGINNERS FRENCH PRESENT CONDITIONAL je serais, / should be. tu serais. il or elle serait. nous serions. vous seriez. ils or elles seraient. PRESENT SUBJUNCTIVE que je sois, that I may be, that I be. que tu sois. qu'il or qu'elle soit. que nous soyons. que vous soyez. qu'ils or qu'elles soient. IMPERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE that I might be. que je fusse. que tu fusses, qu'il or qu'elle fut. que nous fussions. , que vous fussiez. qu'ils or qu'elles fussent. PAST CONDITIONAL j'aurais ete, / should have been. tu aurais ete. il or elle aurait ete. nous aurions ete. vous auriez ete. ils or elles auraient ete. PAST SUBJUNCTIVE que j'aie ete, that I may have been. que tu aies ete. qu'il or qu'elle ait ete. que nous ayons ete. que vous ayez ete. qu'ils or qu'elles aient ete. PLUPERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE that I might have been. que j'eusse ete. que tu eusses ete. qu'il or qu'elle eut ete. que nous eussions ete. que vous eussiez ete. qu'ils or qu'elles eussent ete. IMPERATIVE sois. be. soyons, let us be. soyez, be. BEGINNER S FRENCH 257 Pm .->■ §■22 si I Mm IK 1 s/ .^1 o ^ iz O O- 2 2 <2 § §\ .2 S 5| ^ col'- '3 ^1 $2 ^ a .J2\2 5 CO ico J-o' 1^ I CJCJOOOCJT34 'Of'O -(u| oj 4:: |::3 vs ;:2l § g g 2 2 <2 S gl 5l| S S •ill -3 3 p a o t« in § ^^ a pit a ■"■« 4) 1 2? 1 1 0) > 4) 1 3 '3 to *c3 'rt *c3 D 3 > > > *> > > M *§ C4 h 13 S I 1.- *3 3 1 *> 1 *c3 '2 > 'c3 2 2 ■g-g *c3 ^ 2 § -5 'c3 > '2 2 3 (U .b ci 4J s 3 '3 'rt cJ rt .;5 «Li > > > "> ^ > H § CO CO U CO .rl S 1 (0 CO .2 .S2 .2 3 cr CO CO to "0* CO 3 1 *> 1 3 > ■3 CO 3 1 .S 3 'c3 'rt 3 CO S.-Z CO CO CO CO to to to ■^ > > > > > > > tn 3 .H.-C CO CO 0) 0) 1 3 1 3 to *3 CO *3 CO C •1 CO .1 s 03 rt CO .2 .2 3 r »— t CO CO CO M CO to CO ■+3 > > > > > > > 0^ (U ? 0) "G ti « ^ 0) ? V 3 3- ^ S 2, i:- (U 3" 0) > < Pm ^S.. ^ ^ 3" to 1 to CO 1 3 «*3 3 to '3 CO 3" C OJ 'c3 ■3 13 > > * > ■s 3" > z £: ■M *-> .^ 3 p^ «< Ph c > CTJ c g c« > c 1 3 1 ,3 3 > '3 3 C\J to '{3 c 3 ■*-> c 2^ c;J 3 ^j cf 3 3 c4 '5 '^ II 3 > 3 3 1^ ^ CO to CO CO CO to to ■^ > > > > > > > ^ 1 ^ ^ 5 » g s! V. ^•*4 > 1 ^ 2 »— 1 1 % % to i 0) 1 f 1 S «4-l 1 i 1 1 Si VO 1 ^^ CO CO -•^ S .-^ in t^ CO t^ CO 9 5 '3 "^ i| •a 5 'co m 1 s M CO CO 1 In s 1 M c/ CO «» n ca m « so -M ^ > > > ► >• ► ' ABBREVIATIONS adj.. adjective. m.. masculine- art.y article. n.. noun. cond.y conditional. part,. participle. conj., conjunction. plur.. plural. dent., demonstrative. poss.. possessive. /.. feminine. pres.. present. A/., future. prep.. preposition. imperf. imperfect. pret. preterit. impers., impersonal. pron.. pronoun. indie. indicative. prop.. proper. inUrj., interjection. sing.. singular. irr.. irregular. sub;., subjunctive. VOCABULARY I. FRENCH-ENGLISH a, pres. indie, of avoir. a, prep., to, at, in, on, for. abricot, m., apricot. abricotier, m., apricot tree. acariatre, pee/ish. accident, m., accident. accompagner, to accompany. accomplir, to accomplish ; s' — , to be accomplished. accord, m., agreement ; etre d' — , to agree. accoutume, -e, usual. acheminer: s* — , to direct one's steps. acheter, to buy. acquerir, irr., to acquire, get. acquissent, imperf. subj. of ac- querir. acrostiche, m., acrostic. acteur, m., actor. actrice, f., actress. adieu, m., good-by, farewell. administrateur, m., administrator. admirer, to admire. adorateur, m., worshipper. adresse, f., address. adresser, to ask ; s' — , to apply. affecter, to affect, pretend. afin que, in order that. agreable, agreeable, pleasant. ah! interj., oh ! ai, pres. indie, of avoir. aider, to help. aie, pres. subj. of avoir. aile, f., wing. aillent, pres. subj. of aller. aimable, amiable, kind. aimer, to love, like, be fond of; s* — , to be fond of one's self. aine, m., elder or eldest son or brother. ainsi, thus, so; et — de suite, and so forth. air, m., air. aise, f., ease, a j outer, to add. Alfred; see Musset. alite, -e, bedridden. allee, f., lane; contre — , side path. allemand, -e, German. aller, irr., to go; s'en — , to go away. allumer, to light. allumette, /., match. alors, then. ambassadeur, m., ambassador, ambassadrice, /., ambassadress. ambre, m., amber. ame, f., soul. amener, to bring. ami, m., friend. 261 262 BEGINNERS FRENCH amie, /., friend. amiral, m., admiral. amitie, f., friendship, affection. amour, m. or f., love, affection. amuser, to amuse; s' — , to enjoy one's self. an, m., year. ange, m., angel. anglais, -e, English. animal, m., animal. annee, f., year. anniversaire, m., anniversary; — de naissance, birthday. annoncer, to announce. antichambre, f., anteroom. aiOVLt{pronounce ou), m., August. apercevoir, irr., to perceive, no- tice, see. appeler, to call. applaudir, to applaud. apporter, to bring. apprivoise, -e, tame. approcher de, to approach. apres, prep., after. apres midi, ;;/. or f., afternoon. aquilon, m., north wind. arbre, m., tree. Arnault, prop, n., a French poet (1766-1834). Arras {pronounce the s), f., Ar- ras, a city in northern France. arreter: s' — , to stop. arriver, to arrive. arroser, to water, bathe, wet. artiste, in. or f., artist. as, pres. indie, of avoir. aspect (pron. aspe), m., aspect, view. asseoir, irr., to seat ; s* — , to sit down. assez, enough, rather. assieger, to besiege. assiette, f.. plate. assiettee, /"., plateful. assis, -e, past part, of asseoir. assistants, w. pi, persons pres- ent. assister a, to attend, be present at. astre, tn., heavenly body. attarder, to delay; s* — , to tarry. atteindre, irr., to reach. attendre, to wait for. attention, /., attention. attrister, to sadden, afflict. au {contraction of a le), to or at the. aube, f., dawn. aucun, -e, any, no, none. auditoire, m., congregation. aupres de, prep., near, aussi, also, as. [soon as, aussitot, at once ; — que, as autant, as much, as many. autel, m., altar. automne (do not sound the m), m., fall. automobile, /., automobile. autour de, prep., around. autre, other. autrefois, formerly. aux (contraction of a les), to or at the. auzquels (contraction of a les- quels), to or at which. avaler, to swallow, avancer; s' — a tatons, to grope one's way, avant, prep., before; en — , for- ward, avant que, conj., before, avec, with. avenue, /,, avenue. avis, m.. advice. avoir, irr., to have ; — besoin de, to be in need of. need ; — six ans, to be six years old ; il y a, there is or there are. avril, ;«., April. ayez, ayons, pres. siibj. of avoir. BEGINNER S FRENCH 263 B baiser, m., kiss. baisser, to pull down. bal, m., ball. balai, m., broom. bande; plate — , f., border. banc, m., bench. Barberine, prop, n., Barberine. Bastille, f.. Bastille, a famous prison, destroyed by the Paris- ian people on July 14, 1789. bas, -se, low ; see ici and la. bateau, m., boat.- battre, irr., to beat; se — , to fight. beau, bel, belle, beautiful; avoir — {infin.), to do something in vain. beaucoup, much, many; a great deal. Beaune, prop, n., small city in the department of Cote d'or, fa- mous for its wine. bee de gaz, m., gas burner. bel, belle; see beau. benir, to bless. besoin, m., need ; avoir — de, to be in need of, need. bete, f., beast, animal. beurre, m., butter. Bias {sound the s), prop, n., one of the seven wise men of Greece (b. c. 600?). bibliotheque, /., library. bicyclette, f., bicycle. bien, well ; very. bien que, conj., although. bienvenue, /., welcome. biere, f., beer. bijou, m., jewel. billet, m., ticket. [encore. bis {sound the s), adv., bravo, biscuit, m., biscuit, cracker. bissextil, -e, leap (year). Wane, blanche, white. blancheur, f., whiteness. ble, m., wheat. bleu, -e, blue. blond, -e, blond, light, fair. boire, irr., to drink. bois, m., wood. boite, f., box. bon, -ne, good; — marche, cheap; — mot, witticism. bonbon, m., candy. bonheur, m., happiness. [day. bonjour, m., good morning, good bonnement, simply, frankly. bonsoir, m., good evening. bonte, f., kindness. bord, m., bordeir, edge. borne, f., limit ; sans — s, bound- less. bosquet, m., grove, thicket. Boucher de Perthes, prop, n., a French poet (1788-1868). boue, f., mud. bougie, /., wax candle. boulevard, m., boulevard. Bourget (Paul), prop, n., a mod- ern French novelist. bourse, f., purse. bouton, m., button, knob. branche, f., branch. brave, brave, good. briller, to shine. briser, to break. brosse, f., brush. brosser, to brush. brun, -e, brown. brunir, to turn brown. brusquement, abruptly, rudely. bureau, m., desk. but, m., aim. buvez, pres. indie, of boire. buviez, pres. subj. of boire. 264 BEGINNER S FRENCH C = ce. cacher, to hide. cadet, m., younger, youngest son or brother. cafe, ;;/., coffee. cahier, m., note book. calembour, m., pun. calme, calm. campagne, f., country. capitale, f., capital. car, conj., because, for. carte, f., map. cause, f., cause. causer, to chat. cave, f., cellar. ce, cet, m., cette, f., ces, pi. dem. adj., this, that ; ce . . . ci, cet . . . ci, cette . . . ci, ces . . . ci, this, these ; ce . . . la, cet . . . la, cette ... la, ces . . . la, that, those. ce, dem. pron., that, he, she, it, they. ceci, pron., this. ceder, to yield. cela, pron., that. celebre, celebrated. celebrer, to celebrate. celle; sec celui. celui, m., celle, /., ceiix, celles, pi dem. pron., this, that, these, those, the one, the ones. celui ci, m., celle ci, f., ceux ci, celles ci, pi. dem. pron., this, this one, these, the latter. celui la, m., celle la, f., ceux la, celles la, pi. dem. pron., that, that one, those, the former. cent, hundred. centaine, f., about one hundred. cependant, however; — que, while. ceremonie, f., ceremony. certain, -e, certain. ces; see ce, adj. cet; see ce, adj. cetera; et — , and so forth. cette; see ce, adj. ceux; see celui. chacun, -e, pron., each one, every one. chaine, f., chain, fetter. chaise, /., chair. chambre, f., room; — a coucher, bed room. champ, m., field ; sur le — , on the spot, at once. chanson, f., song. chansonnette, f., Jittle song, chant, m., singing, song, chanter, to sing. chapeau, m., hat. chapelle, /., chapel, chaque, adj., each, every, charger, to intrust, ask. charmant, -e, charming, pleasant, charme, m., charm, charme, -e, pleased, chateau, m., castle. chaussee, /., causeway, street, chef d'oBUvre, m., masterpiece. chemin, m., way, road ; — de f er, railroad, cheminer, to walk, go, advance, chene, m., oak. cher, chere, dear, expensive, chercher, to look for, seek, try to find. chercheur, m., seeker. cheri, -e, beloved, dear, cherir, to be fond of, like. cheval, m., horse, chevalier, in., knight, cheveu, m., hair. chez, at, to, in the house (or shop) of; — moi, home, at home ; — nous, among us ; — soi, at home. chimere, f., idle fancy. chocolat, m., chocolate, choisir, to choose, select. BEGINNER S FRENCH 265 choix, m., choice. chose, /., thing; quelque — , w., something. ci; see ce and celui. del, m., sky, heaven. cieux, pi. of del. cinq, five. cinquieme, fifth. classe, f., class, classroom ; en — , cle, f., key. [to school., clement, -e, clement, mild. clerc, m., divinity student. climat, m., climate. cloche, f., bell. clocher, m., steeple. cocher, m., coachman. coeur, m., heart. coiffer, to fix the hair of. coin, m., corner. colimagon, m., snail. combattre, irr., to fight. combien, how much, how many. comedie, /"., comedy. comique, comic. commander, to command, order. comme, as, like, how. commencement, m., beginning. commencer, to begin. comment, how. [drawers. commode, f., bureau, chest of comparable, comparable. composer, to compose. comprendre, irr. (like prendre), to understand. comptoir, m., counter, desk. comte, m., count. condamner, to condemn. conduire, irr., to lead, take, drive. conduite, f., behavior. confortable, comfortable. confusion, f., confusion. connaissance, f., knowledge ; ac- quaintance, [tre. connaisse, pres. subj. of connai- connaitre, irr., to be acquainted with, know. connu, -e, past part, of connaitre. conseil, m., advice, conseiller, to advise. consoler, to console. consonne, /., consonant, content, -e, pleased. continuer, to continue, go on. contractor, to contract, contre, against. contre-allee, f., side path, convalescence, f., convalescence; entrer en — , to become con- valescent. convenir, irr., (like venir), to agree; (impers.) be proper. coquille, f., shell. come, f., horn ; faire les — s a, to laugh at. couchant, setting. coucher, to put to bed ; se — , to go to bed; set; chambre a — , bedroom. couleur, /., color, coup, m., blow; time; rap. courage, m., courage. courir, irr., to run. court, pres. indie, of courir. court, -e, short. courtisan, m., courtier. cousin, m., cousin. cousine, /., cousin. couteau, m., knife. coutume, /., custom; comme de — , as usual. couverture, /., blanket. couvre pieds, m., counterpane, couvrir, irr. (like ouvrir), to cover. craindre, irr., to fear, crainte, f., fear, crayon, m., pencil, creme, f., cream, cri, 111., cry. crier, to cry, exclaim, critiquer, to criticise. crochet, m., rag-picker's hook. 266 BEGINNER S FRENCH croire, irr., to believe, cruel, -le, cruel, cueillir, irr., to gather, pick, cuilleree, /., spoonful. cure, m., curate, priest d' — de. dame, f., lady. danger, m.. danger. dangereusement, dangerously. dans, in, into, to. danser, to dance. date, f., date. de, of, from, by, with ; than ; any, some. debout, adv., standing, erect, decembre, m., December. decor, m., scenery, decouvrir, irr. {like couvrir), to uncover ; se — , to take off one's hat or cap defendre, to forbid. deja, already. dejeuner, to breakfast. delaisser, to forsake. delicieu-x, -se, delicious, delight- demander, to ask, ask for. [ful. demeurer, to live, reside, demi, -e, half, demoiselle, f., young lady, denouer, to untie. dent, f., tooth, dentelle, /"., lace, deposer, to lay down, depouiller, to strip, depuis, since, from, demi-er, ere, last. derober, to steal. derriere, behind. des {contraction of de les), of or from the. desagreable, disagreeable, descendre, to come down, go down. descente {f.) de lit, bedside rug. deshabiller, to undress ; se — , to undress one's self. desir, m., wish. desirer, to desire. desobeir a, to disobey. desquels = de + lesquels. desseche, -e dried up. dessert, tn., dessert. dessiner, to draw. destination, f., destination. detacher, to detach. deux, two. deuxieme, second. devant, before (place), [come. devenir, irr {like venir), to be- devenu, -e, past part, of devenir. deviens, prcs. indie, of devenir: deviner, to guess. devoir, must, ought, to have to, be obliged to ; owe. devoir, m., duty ; written exer- devorer, to devour. [cise. dictionnaire, m., dictionary. diete, /., diet. Dieu, ;»., God. difference, f., difference. difficile, difficult. diligent, -e, diligent, industrious. dimanche, m., Sunday. diner, to dine; m., dinner. Diogene, prop, n., Greek Cynic philosopher (b. c. 4i9?-324?). dire, irr., to say, tell ; se laisser — , to let one's self believe. directement, directly. directeur, ;;?., manager. diriger, to direct ; se — , to direct one's steps. discours, m., speech. dit, pres. indie, and pret. of dire. dit, -e, past part, of dire. divertir, to amuse ; se — , to en- joy one's self. divinement, divinely, admirably. division, f., division. BEGINNER S FRENCH 2(i'J dix, ten. dixieme, tenth. docteur, m., doctor. dois, doit, pres. indie, of devoir. done, therefore ; then ; see ecouter. donner, to give. dont, whose, of whom, of which. dormir, irr., to sleep. doucement, gently, noiselessly. double, double; see enfermer. doubler, to double. douleur, /., grief. doute, m., doubt. dou-x, -ce, sweet, soft. douzaine, f., dozen ; tine demi — , half a dozen. douze, twelve. dotizieme, twelfth. drap, m., sheet. drapeau, m., flag, drogue, /., drug. droit, -e, right. droite, f., right side; de — , on the right. du {contraction of de le), of or from the. Dumoulin, proper name. Dunois, proper name. £ eau, f., water. eclairer, to light up. ecole, f., school ; a 1' — , to ,school. ecouter, to listen to; ecoutez done, do believe. ecrire, irr., to write. edifice, m., building. effacer, to erase, scratch out. effort, m., effort. effrayer, to frighten; s' — , to be frightened. eglise, /., church. egoiste, selfish. eh, interj., ah ! — bien! well ! elancer: s' — , to spring, iXy away, electrique, electric, elephant, m., elephant, eleve, m. or f., pupil, elle, she, it, her. elles, they, them, eloigner: s* — , to go away, embellir, to beautify, eminent, -e, eminent, great, emmener, to take along, emoi, m., emotion, excitement. empereur, m., emperor, emplir, to fill up. employer, to employ, use. emporter, to carry away. en, prep., in, into ; as a. en, pron., of him, of her, of it, of them ; for it, about it, from it ; thence. encor (poetical), encore, still, yet. encre, f., ink. encrier, m., inkstand. endormir, irr. (like dormir) : s* — , to fall asleep, enfant, m. or f., child, enfermer, to shut; s' — a double tour, to shut one's self in by locking the door. enfin, at last. enflammer, to inflame. enfuir, irr. (like fuir) : s* — , to flee, run away. enigme, f., enigma, riddle, enlever, to take away, enorme, enormous, ensuite, afterwards. entendre, to hear, enthousiasme, m., enthusiasm, enti-er, -ere, entire. entonner, to strike up. entourer, to surround. entre, prep., between. entree, f., entrance. entrer, to enter; — dans, to en- ter. ;68 BEGINNER S FRENCH entretenir, irr. {like tenir), to entertain ; s' — , to converse. entrevue, f., meeting. envoler; s' — , to take flight. envoyer, irr., to send. epouse, f., wife. epoiiz, in., husband. equipage, in., equipage. errer, to wander. escalier, m., staircase. espace, m., space. Espagnol, m., Spaniard. espece, f., sort, kind. esperer, to hope. esprit, m., mind, wit essayer, to try. essentiel, -le, essential. essor, m., flight; prendre 1* — , to soar away. essuie main, in., towel. est, prcs. indie, of etre. et, and. etalage, m., display, show-win- dow. £tats Unis, in. pi., United States. ete, rn., summer. ete, past part, of etre. eteindre, irr., to extinguish. etes, pres. ind. of etre. etoile, f., star. etourdiment, heedlessly. etranger, m., stranger, foreigner. etre, irr., to be; — alle(e), ve- nu(e), etc., to have gone, come, etc. etroit, -e, narrow. eu, -e, past part, of avoir. Eugenie, empress of the French, wife of Napoleon III. Europe, f., Europe. eut, imperf. suhj. of avoir. eux, they, them. eveiller, to awaken; s* — , to awake, wake up. evenement, m., event. eviter, to avoid. examiner, to examine, excellent, -e, excellent excepte, except, exclamation, /., exclamation, executer, to play; carry out execution, f., execution, exemplaire, exemplary, exemple, m., example ; par — , for instance. exercice, m., exercise, exiger, to require, exil, m., exile, experience, f., experience, exploit, ;;/., deed. expression, /., expression, exquis, -e, exquisite. fabrication, f., making, casting. face, f., face ; en — de, opposite. fagon, /., fashion, kind. facteur, ;«., porter, postman. faim {pronounce m like n), f., hunger ; avoir — , to be hungry. faire, irr., to do, make, take ; (weather) to be; — venir, to send for; — preparer, to have (something) prepared. fais, fait, pres. indie, of faire. fait, -e, past part, of faire. faites, prcs. indie, of faire. falloir, irr., to be necessary, must fameu-x, -se, famous. famille, /., family. fasse, pres. suhj. of faire. fat {sound the t), m., fop, cox- comb. fatalite, f., fatality. fatigue, -e, tired. fatuite, f., foppishness, conceit. faubourg, m.. suburb. faut, pres. indie, of falloir. fauteuil, >«.. armchair. favori, -te, favorite. BEGINNER S FRENCH 269 femme, f., woman, wife. fenetre, /'., window. fer, m^ iron; en chemin de — , by rail, f erai, fut of faire. fermer, to shut, feroce, ferocious. ferveur, f., fervor, fete, f., feast, festival. feu, -e, late, deceased, feuillage, m., foliage, feuille, f., leaf, fevrier, m., February, fidele, faithful. fidele, m., faithful. • figue, f., fig. fil, m., thread. filant, -e, shooting. filer, (of stars) to shoot, fille, f., girl, daughter. fils {pronounce the s), m., son. fils, pi. of fil, which see. fin, f., end; stiite et — , con- fin, -e, fine. [eluded, fini, -e, over, finir, to finish, end. firent, pret. of faire. fissent, imperf. subj. of faire. flatteur, m., flatterer. fleur, /._, flower ; en — , bloom- ing, rosy. folie, f., folly; joke. fonds, m., capital, force, f., strength. foret, f., forest. former, to form, make, fort, -e, strong, fort, adv., very, very much, foumeau, w., stove. frais, fraiche, fresh. fraise, f., strawberry. franc, m., frank. frangais, -e, French, t Frangais, m., Frenchman. France, /,, France. franchir, to cross. frapper, to strike, rap. frere, m., brother. frisson, m., shiver. froid, -e, cold. froid, m., cold. fromage, m., cheese. f rotter, to rub, strike. fruit, m., fruit. fumee, f., smoke. furieu-x, -se, furious. fussent, fussiez, imperf. subj. of fut, pret. of etre. [etre. fut, imperf. subj. of etre. gagner, to gain, earn. gai, -e, cheerful, merry. gaiete, f., mirth. gargon, m., boy; waiter. garde, m. and f., guard ; — ma- lade, m. and f., nurse ; prendre — de, to take care not to, be careful not to. garder, to keep. gateau, m., cake. gauche, left. gauche, /., left side ; de — , on the gaz, m., gas. [left. geler, to freeze. general, m., general. generalement, generally. gens, m. and f. pi., people; jeunes — , m., young people. gloire, f., glory. gouffre, m., abyss. gourmand, -e, gluttonous, vora- cious. gout, m., taste. gouter, to taste. grain, m., grain. Grammont, one of the wittiest courtiers in the court of Louis XIV. (1621-1707). grand, -e, grand, great, large, tall. 270 BEGINNER S FRENCH grandir, to grow, gratitude, f., gratitude, graver, to engrave, carve, gris, -e, gray, gronder, to scold, guerir, to cure, guerre, f., war. guichet, m., ticket-office. ' means h formerly aspirate ; see p. 16. habile, skilful. habiller, to dress; s* — , to dress, dress up. habitant, m., inhabitant. habiter, to inhabit. 'hair, to hate. haleine, f., breath. 'harangue, f., harangue. 'hate, /,, haste ; a la — , hastily. 'hater: se — , to hasten. 'haut, -e, high, tall. *haut, m., top. helas, {pronounce the s), alas. 'heros, m., hero. hesiter, to hesitate. heure, f., hour; de bonne — , heureu-x, -se, happy. [early. hier, yesterday. hirondelle, f., swallow. histoire, f., history, story. hiver {sound the r), m., winter. homme, m., man. honneur, m., honor. Hortense, wife of Louis Bona- parte, king of Holland (1783- hote, m., host. [1837). hotel, m., hotel. hotesse, /., hostess. Hugo (Victor), one of the great- est French poets (1802-1885). huile, f., oil. 'huit, eight. 'huitieme, eighth, humble, humble. humblement, humbly, humeur, f., humor, disposition, temper. ici, here ; — bas, here below, ideal, -e, ideal. ignorer, to ignore, not to know, il, he, it. ils, they. image, /.f image, picture, immediatement, immediately, immense, immense. immortel, -le, immortal. impatiemment, impatiently, imperatrice, f., empress, [sical. impertinert, -e, absurd, nonsen- importer, to be of importance, importuner, to annoy, impossible, impossible, impur, -e, unclean, incapable, unable, incertain, -e, uncertain, inconstant, -e, fickle, infliger, to inflict, give, infortune, f., misfortune, injustement, unjustly. innocent, -e, innocent, innocente, f., innocent little girl. inscription, f., inscription, [once, instant, m., instant; a Y — , at instituteur, m., schoolmaster, institutrice, f., schoolmistress, instruire, irr., to instruct, teach, educate. instrument, m.. instrument, intention, f., intention, interessant, -e, interesting, intervalle, m., interval, introduire, irr., to introduce, put. inutile, useless. invite, m., -e, f., guest. BEGINNER S FRENCH 271 inviter, to invite. Isabelle, ^prop. n., Isabella, ivraie, /., tares. jamais, ever; {with neg.) never. Janvier, m., January. jardin, m., garden. jaune, yellow. javelot, m., javelin. je, I. Jeter, to throw, utter. jeu, m., play; game. jeudi, m., Thursday. ' jeune, young. joie, f., joy. joli, -e, pretty. joue, f., cheek. jouer, to play ; — de, to play. jouir de, to enjoy. joujou, m., toy. jour, m., day; de — en — , from day to day. journal, m., newspaper. joumee, f., day. joyeu-x, -se, joyful, joyous. juger, to judge. juillet, m., July. juin, m.j June. , jusqu'a, until, till, to. justement, justly. r = le or la. la, art, the. la, pron., her, it. la, there ; — bas, yonder ; see ce and celui. lac, m., lake. - laisser, to leave, let. lait, m., milk. lampe, f., lamp. lancer, to throw, cast. langue, f., tongue. laquais, m., footman. laquelle; see lequel. large, wide, broad. • laurier, m., laurel. lavabo, m., washstand. laver, to wash. le, art, the. le, pron., him, it. legon, /., lesson. Leconte de Lisle, prop. n.,a rnod- ern French poet. lecteur, m., reader. leg-er, -ere, light. legume, m., vegetable. lendemain, m., next day. lentement, slowly. lequel, laquelle, lesquels, les- quelles, who, whom, which, which one, that. les, art., the. les, pron., them. lettre, f., letter. leur, poss. adj., their. [theirs. leur, pron., le — , la — , les — s, lever, to raise; se — , to get up. levre, /., lip. Her, to bind, tie.. lieutenant, m., lieutenant. limonade, f., lemonade, lion, m., lion. lire, irr., to read, lis (sound the s), m., lily. lit, m., bed. livre, m., book. livre, f., pound. ^ loin, far; — de, far from. long, -ue, long, lors, at the time of. lorsque, when. louer, to rent. Louis, prop, n.; Louis XIII., king of France (1601-1643) ; Louis XIV., king of France (1638-1715^. 2^2 BEGINNER^S FRENCH loiiis, m., louis, twenty-franc gold piece, lu, -e, past part, of lire, liii, he, to him, to her. lumiere, /., light. lundi, tn., Monday. M. =. Monsieur. m* = me. ma, f. poss. adj., my. madame, f., madam, Mrs. mademoiselle, f., miss. madrigal, m., madrigal, love ditty. magasin, m., store. magnifique, magnificent. mai, w.. May. main, f., hand. maire, m., mayor, mais, but. maison, f., house, maitre, m., master, teacher, maitresse, f., mistress, school mistress. majeste, f., majesty. mal, adv., badly. malade, ill. sick ; garde — , m. and f., nurse. maladroit, m., unskilful man. manant, tn., boor, manger, to eat. maniere, f. , manner ; par — de plaisanterie, in a joking way. manquer, to fail ; — de, to lack, manteau, m., cloak, marche, m., market; bon — , cheap ; meilleur — , cheaper. marcher, to walk, mardi, m., Tuesday, marechal, m., marshal ; horse- shoer mari, tn., husband. Marie, prop, n., Mary (the holy virgin). marquis, m., marquis. [March mars (pronounce the s), m., martyre, m., martyrdom. matelas, m., mattress. matin, m., morning; adv., early. mauvais, -e, bad. me, me. medecin, m., physician. medicament, m., medicine. meilleur, -e, better, best ; — mar- che, cheaper. melodrame, m., melodrama. membre, m., member. meme, same ; self. menagerie, f., menagerie. mendiante, f., beggar. mener, to lead, take. meprise, f., mistake, blunder. mer, f., sea. mercredi, m., Wednesday. mere, f., mother. mes, pi poss. adj., my. messager, m., messenger. messe, f., mass, metal, m., metal. mettre, irr., to put; se — a (m- f in.), to begin to; se — au pia- no, to sit down at the piano; se — au travail, to start to work. meuble, m., piece of furniture. midi, ;«., noon. miel, m., honey. mien, poss. pron.; le — , la — ne, les — s, les — nes, mine. mieux, adv., better, best ; de leur — , the best they can or could ; — vaut, it is better. ministre, m., minister. minute, f., minute. miroir, tn., mirror. misere, f., misery, poverty. missent, imperf. suhj. of mettre. mit, pret. of mettre. BEGINNERS FRENCH 273 moderne, modern. modifier, to modify, alter. moi, I, me, to me. moindre, less, least. moins, less, least, fewer; a — que, unless. mois, m., month. moitie, f., half; a — , half. mon, poss. adj., my. monarque, m., monarch. monde, m., world ; tout le — , everybody; etre au — , to be alive, living. monseigneur, m., my lord. monsieur, m., sir, Mr., gentle- man. montagne, /., mountain. monter, to mount, go up. montrer, to show. morceau, tn., piece. morsure, f., bite, sting. mort, f., death; lit de — , death- bed. mot, m., word ; bon — , witticism. motif, m., motive, cause. mourant, m., dying man. mourir, irr., to die. mourras, fut of mourir. mousse, /., moss. mousseline, f., muslin. moutarde, f., mustard. moyen, m., means, way. muet, -te, mute, dumb. mur, -e, ripe. mur, m., wall. murmurer, to murmur, mutter. Musset (Alfred de), a French poet (1810-1857). musique, f., music. Myndus, a proper name. n* = ne. naissance, f., birth; anniversaire de — , birthday. Napoleon, prop, n.; Napoleon I., emperor of the French (1769- 1821) ; Napoleon III., em- peror of the French (1808- 1873). nappe, f., napkin. national, -e, national. nature, f., nature, naturel, -le, natural. ne, not ; — ... pas, not ; — ... que, only; — ... plus, no neige, f., snow. [longer, neiger, to snow. neuf, nine. neuvieme, ninth. neveu, m., nephew. ni, neither, nor. nid, m., nest. niece, f., niece, noble, noble. Noel, m., Christmas. noir, -e, black, dark. nom, m., name. nombreu-x, -se, numerous. non, no. nos, pi. poss. adj., our. notre, sing. poss. adj., our. nous, we, us, to us. nouvelle, f., news ; a cette — , on hearing this news. novembre, m., November. nuisible, harmful, injurious. nuit, f., night. nul, -le any; (with neg.) no; none. 6, inter}., o! obeir a, to obey. obliger, to oblige, compel, obscur, -e, dark, occasion, /., occasion, occuper, to occupy. octobre, m., October, oeil, m., eye» 274 BEGINNER S FRENCH OBUvre, /., work; chef d' — , m. masterpiece. off icier, vu, officer. offrir, irr., to offer. oh, interj., o ! ho ! oiseau, m., bird, olive, f., olive, ombre, f., shade. on, I'on, one, they, people. oncle, m., uncle. onde, f., water. ont, pres. indie, of avoir. on2ieme, eleventh. opera, m., opera. or, conj., now. or, m., gold. orage, m., storm. orange, f., orange ordinaire, ordinary, usual. ordonner, to prescribe. ordre, m., order. oreille, f., ear. oreiller, m., pillow. organiste, m., organist. orgue, m., organ, original, m., eccentric man. omer, to adorn. oser, dare. oter, to take off. on, or. ou, where. oublier, to forget, oui, yes. outrager, to outrage. ouvert, -e, past. part, of ouvrir. ouvreuse, f., (female) usher. ouvrir, irr., to open. pain, m., bread. pale, pale. palier, m., landing. panier, m., basket. papier, m., paper. par, by, through, out of, about. parait, pres. indie, of paraitre. paraitre, irr., to appear. parapluie, iii., umbrella. pare, m., park. parce que, because. pardessus, di., overcoat. pardonner, to forgive. pareil, -le, such ; du — au meme, tit for tat. parent, )n., parent, relative. parfois, sometimes. parfum, m., perfume. Paris, m., Paris. parler, to speak. parrain, m., godfather. parterre, m., flower-bed. partie, f., part. partir, irr., to depart, go away. partout, everywhere. parvenir, irr., to reach. pas, m., step ; ne . . . — , not. passer, to pass. pasteur, m., minister. pauvre, poor. pays, m., country, fatherland. paysan, in peasant. pecheur, m., sinner. peigner, to comb ; se — , to comb one's hair, comb each other's hair. peine, f., pain, sorrow, trouble ; a la — , in the attempt. pelouse, f., lawn. pendant, during. pendre, to hang. penetrer, to enter. pensee, f., thought. penser, to think. pension, /., boarding-house. pensionnaire, m. and f., boarder. perdre, to lose. pere, m., father. perfectionnement, m., improve- ment. permettre, irr., to allow. permission, f., permission.. BEGINNER^S FRENCH 275 personne, /., person ; sur ma — , about me. personne, m., anybody; (with neg. ) nobody. petit, -e, small, little. peu, adv., little, few. peur, f., fear; de — que, lest. pent, pres. indie, of pouvoir. pharmacien, m., druggist. philosophe, m., philosopher. piano, m., piano. piece, f., piece; play. pied, m., foot; du — , with his foot. piege, m., trap, snare. pierre, f., stone. Pierre, prop, n., Peter, pilule, /., pill. pitie, f., pity. place, f., place. placer, to place. plaindre, irr., to pity; se — , to complain. plaine, /., plain. plainte, f., complaint, doleful story. plainti-f, -ve, plaintive, mourn- ful, sad. plaire, irr., to please. plaisanterie, /., joke; par ma- niere de — , in a joking way. plaisir, m., pleasure. plat, -e, flat. plate bande, f., border. plein, -e, full. pleur, m., tear. pleurer, to weep. pleut, pres. indie, of pleuvoir. pleuvoir, irr., to rain. plume, f., pen. plus, more, most ; ne . . . — , no more, no longer; de — en — , more and more; — de, (num- ber) more than. plusieurs, several. plutot, rather. poche, /., pocket. point, m., point; ne...— , not poire, /., pear. [at all. poisson, m., fish. poivre, m., pepper. poll, -e, polished, polite. population, /., population. porte, /., door, gate. porter, to carry; se — , to be (in reference to health). porteur, m., carrier. portiere, /., car window. portrait, m., portrait, picture. poser, to ask. possible, possible. pouls, m., pulse. pour, prep., for, to, on account of, in order to; — que, in order that. pourquoi, why, the reason why. pourvoir, irr., to provide. pousser, to utter. pouvoir, irr., to be able, can, may; il se pent, it may be. pratique, /., practice. preau, m., playground. preceder, to precede. precieii-x, -se, precious. precis, -e, precise, preciser, to make a more definite statement, to state the names. .preferable, preferable. preferer, to prefer. premi-er, -ere, first ; mon — , my first syllable. prendre, irr., to take; catch; — garde, take care, be careful not. prenne, pres. subj. of prendre, preparer, to prepare; faire — , to have (something) prepared, pres de, prep., near, prescription, /"., prescription, presenter, to present, introduce, presque, almost. presser, to press, urge, pretre, m., priest. 276 BEGINNER S FRENCH prier, to pray, beg. priere, f., prayer, princesse, f., princess, printemps {pron. tan), w., spring, pris, -e, past part, of prendre, prise, f., capture, taking, prison, f., prison, prix, m., price, probablement, probably, prochain, m., neighbor, professeur, «z., professor, teacher, profond, -e, deep, great, profondement, soundly, progres, m., progress. promenade, /.. walk. promener, to take out for a walk, drive ; se — , to take a walk, promeneur, m., promenader. promptement (pron. mp like n), quickly. prononcer, to pronounce, proposer, to propose, propre, clean. proprietaire, m., landlord, owner, protester, to protest, public, m., public, puis, then. puisque, since, puissant, powerful, puisse, pres. subj. of pouvoir. punir, to punish, punition, f., punishment. pupitre, m., desk. qu* = que. qualite, f., quality, quand, when, quart, ;«.. quarter. quatorze, fourteen, quatre, four, quatrieme, fourth, que, conj., that, than, as; ne.. — , only. que, pron., which, whom, what; see ce. quel, -le, what, which; — ...! what a . . . ! quelconque, some ... or other. quelque, some; — chose, m., something. quelquefois, sometimes, quelqu'un, somebody. question, /., question ; il est — , the question is. qui, who, whom? which, that; see ce. quiconque, whoever. quoi, what ; de — , what one needs. quoique, although. R radis, jn., radish. raisin, m., grape. raison, f., reason; avoir — , to rapide, rapid, quick. [be right. rapidement, rapidly, quickly. rappeler: se — , to remember. rapporter, to bring back. rare, rare. rarement, seldom. rat, in., rat. ravi, -e, delighted. recevoir, irr., to receive. recherche, f., search. recommander, to recommend. reconnaissance, f.. gratitude. regu, -e, past part, of recevoir. reflechir, to reflect. refuser, to refuse, decline. regaler, to regale; se — , to re- gale one's self, have a feast of. regard, m., look. regarder, to look at; — par la portiere, to look out of the car-window. regne, m.. reign. BEGINNERS FRENCH 277 regner, to reign. regret, m., regret. reine, f., queen. rejeter, to repel, send away, refuse. rejouir, to rejoice; se — , to re- joice, remarquer, to notice, remercier, to thank, remettre, irr. (like mettre), to hand, give. remplir, to fill, fulfil, rencontrer, to meet. rendre, to render, make, return, give back; se — , to betake one's renommee, /., fame. [self. rentier, to reenter, go or come renverser, to upset. [home. repartie, f., repartee, retort. repartir, irr. (like partir), to reply, repas, m., meal. repasser, to repass, pass again, repeter, to repeat, repliquer, to reply. repondre, to reply, answ^er. reponse, f., answer. repos, m., rest. reposer: se — , to rest. repousser, to repel, push back. reprendre, irr. (like prendre) : — le chemin de, to go back to. representation, f., performance, representer, to play, reproche, m., reproach, reputation, f., reputation. resoudre, irr.: se — , to decide. respecti-f, -ve, respective, respectiieusement, respectfully. respirer, to breathe, inhale, ressource, /., resource. restaurant, ;«,, restaurant, tester, to remain. retard, tn., delay; en — , late. retirer; se — , to withdraw. retour, m., return; de — , on re- turning. retourner, to return. reussir, to succeed. revenir, irr. (like venir), to come back, revenu, -e, past part, of revenir. revienne, pres. subj. of revenir. revivre, irr. (like vivre), to re- vive. riche, rich, wealthy. rideau, m., curtain. ridicule, ridiculous. rien, m., anything; (with neg.) nothing. riposter, to retort, reply. rire, irr., to laugh. ' riviere, f., river. robe, /., dress. roi, m., king. roman, m., novel. rond, -e, round. rose, /., rose. rose, rosy. rouge, red. rougir, to blush. route, f., road; en — , on the way. royal, -e, regal, kingly. royaume, m., kingdom. rue, /., street. s'=rse; also si before il and ils. sa, f. pass, adj., his, her, its. Saint Marceau, prop, n., a former suburb, now a part of Paris. saison, f., season. sait, pres. indie, of savoir. salir, to soiK salle, /., class room : auditorium ; — a manger, dining-room. salon, m., parlor. 278 BEGINNER S FRENCH saluer, to salute, greet, bow to. samedi, m., Saturday. sans, without, but for; — que, without. satisfaction, /,, satisfaction, satisfait, -e, pleased. sauvage, wild. savoir, irr., to know, scene, f., stage, sculpteur (do not pronounce the p), rn., sculptor, se, one's self, himself, herself, themselves, one another, to one's self, etc. sec, seche, dry. second, -e (pronounce c like g), second ; mon — , my second syllable. • seconde (pronounce c like g) , f., seigneur, m., lord. [second sel, m., salt. semaine, f., week. sembler, to seem. sens, pres. indie, of sentir. sentiment, m., sentiment, feel- ing. sentir, irr., to feel ; se — , to 'feel that one is . . . sept (do not pronounce the p), seven. septembre, m., September. septieme (do not pronounce the p), seventh. serais, serait, condit. of etre. serment, m., oath, pledge, sermon, m., sermon. serpent, m., snake. serrer, to shake. serrure, f., lock. servante, f., maid-servant. service, m., service. serviette, /.. napkinr. servir, irr., to serve; se — de, to make use of. ses, plur. poss. adj., his, her, its. seul, -e, alone. severe, severe, stern, si, conj., if. si, adv., so ; yes. siecle, ni., century, sien, poss. pron.: le — , la — ne, les — s, les — nes, his, hers, its. signal, m., signal, sign, [one's, signaler, to signal, mark, silence, ;»., silence. simple, simple, mere. singe, m., monkey. sire, m., sire, six, six. sixidme, sixth. societe, f., society, company. Socrate, prop, n., Socrates, a famous Greek philosopher (b. c. 468-399)- soeur, f., sister. soi, one's self ; chez — , at home, soif, f., thirst; avoir — , to be thirsty. soigner, to take care of, attend. soin, m., care. soir, 7n., evening. soiree, /., evening party, sois, imper. of etre. soit, pres. siibj. of etre. soixante, sixty. soldat, m., soldier, soleil, m., sun. soUiciteur, m., solicitor, solution, /., solution, sombre, gloomy, dark, somme, /., sum. sommeil, m., sleep ; avoir — , to be sleepy, sommes, pres. indie, of etre. son, sa, ses, p-oss. pron., his, her, son, m.. sound. [its songer, to dream, think, sonner. to ring, sonnette. f., (small) bell. sont, pres. indie, of etre. BEGINNER S FRENCH 279 sorite, m., series of syllogisms. sors, pres. indie, of sortir. sorte, f., sort, kind. sortir, irr., to go out. sot, m., silly fellow, fool. sot, -te, foolish. souci, m., care, anxiety. souffle, m., breath. souffrir, irr., to suffer. souhait, m., wish. souhaiter, to wish. souper, to sup, eat supper. souriant, -e, smiling. sourire, m., smile. souris, f., mouse. sous, prep., under. soutien, m., support. souvent, often. spectacle, m., spectacle, show. spiiituel, -le, witty. statue, /., statue. store, m., shade, blind. studieu-x, -se, studious. subir, to undergo, get. subitement, suddenly. subsister, to subsist. suis, pres. indie, of etre and of suivre. Suisse, m., porter, door keeper, suit, pres. indie, of suivre. suite, /., continuation ; _ — et fin, concluded; tout de — , at once, suivant, -e, following. suivant, prep., according to. suivre, irr., to follow; a — , to be continued, sujet, m., subject. superbe, superb. supposer, to suppose. suppression, f., suppression. sur, -e, sure, certain, sur, on, upon, about, surlendemain, m., two days la'ter. surprise, f., surprise. sussent, imperf. subj. of savoir. Syrie, prop, n., Syria. t' = te. ta, f. poss. adj., your. table, /., table. tableau, m., blackboard. taire, irr., not to say; se — , to keep silent. tant, so much, so many, tante, f., aunt. tantot, presently ; — . . ., — . . ., now . . ., now ... tapis, m., carpet. tapisser, to cover, hang. tard, late. tasse, f., cup. tater, to feel, tatons; a — , gropingly. te, you, to you. tel, -le, such. temoigner, to show. temps, m., time ; weather ; dans le — que, while. tendre, to extend, hold out. tenir, irr., to hold, terminer, to end. terre, /., earth, ground ; estate. tete, /., head. the, m., tea. theatre, m., theater. tiede, tepid, lukewarm. tige, f., stem, stalk. tigre, m., tiger. tirer, to drav/, take out. toi, you, to you. toilette, f., toilet, toit, m., roof, tombe, f., grave, tombeau, m., grave, tomber, to fall. ton, ta, tes, poss. adj., your. j8o BEGINNER S FRENCH tort, m., wrong; avoir — , to be tot, soon. [wrong. toujours^ always. tour, f., tower. tour, m., turn; a votre — , in your turn; se£ enfermer. tourelle, f., turret, tourment, m., torment. toumer, to turn, tout, -e, pi. tous, toutes, adj., all, whole, any; — le monde, everybody. tout, pron., everything, all; mon — , the whole word, tout, adv., wholly, entirely, trace, /., trace, track. [quite. tracer, to trace, draw. tragedie, f., tragedy. trahison, f., treason, treachery. travail, tn., work, travailler, to work, traverser, to cross, traversin, tn., bolster. treize, thirteen. trente, thirty; — et un, thirty- tres, very. [one. Trinite, f., Trinity Sunday, 56 days after Easter, triste, sad, gloomy, sorry, tristesse, f., sadness. trois, three. troisieme, third. trop, too, too much, trottoir, m., sidewalk, troubler, to disturb. trouver, to find, tu, you. tyran, m., tyrant un, -e, art, a, an. un, -e, adj., one ; 1' — , pron., one ; r — I'autre, each other ; les — s les autres, one another. union, f., union. ya.,pres. indie, and imper. of aller. vaillant, valiant, brave. vain; en — , vainly. vais, pres. indie, of aller. valait, imperf. indie, of valoir. valet, m., man-servant. valeur, f., value. vallon, m., little valley, dale. valoir, irr., to be worth; il vaut mieux or mieuz vaut, it is bet- ter. vas, pres. indie, of aller. vaste, vast. vaudeville, m., vaudeville. vaut, pres. indie, of valoir. vendre, to sell. vendredi, m., Friday. venir, irr., to come. vent, m., wind; il fait du — , it is windy. - verrais, eondit. of voir. verre, m., glass. verrez, fut. of voir. verrou, m., bolt. vers, prep., about, toward. vers, m., verse, line. verser, to pour. vert, -e, green. vetement, m., garment; />/., clothes, dress. vetir, irr., to dress : se — , to dress. veulent, veut, veux, pres. indie, of vouloir. viande, f., meat. victoire, /., victory. vide, empty. vieil, vieille; see vieux. vieillir, to grow old. vieux, vieil, vieille, old. vilain, ugly. village (pronotmee 11), tn., vil- lage. BEGINNER S FRENCH 281 ville (pronounce 11), f., city. vin, m., wine. vingt, twenty; — deux, twenty- two; — huit, twenty-eight; — neuf, twenty-nine. violon, m./ violin. visage, m., visage. viser, to aim. visite, f., visit. visiter, to visit. vite, fast, quickly. vitrine, f., shop- window. vive, pres. subj. of vivre. vivement, quickly. vivre, irr., to live. voeu, m., vow, wish. voici, here is, here are. voie, f., way, road. voila, there is, there are. voir, irr., to see ; voyez vous pas = ne voyez vous pas. voisin, m., neighbor. voisine, f., neighbor. voisinage, m., neighborhood. voiture, f., carriage. volee, f., volley; a toute — , full voler, to fly; steal. [peal. voluptueusement, with delight. vos, pi. poss. adj., your. votre, sing. poss. adj., your. votre, poss. pron.;' le — , la — , les — s, yours. voudras, fut. of vouloir. vouloir, irr., to will, wish, want ; en — a, to bear a grudge against, be displeased with. vous, you, to you, each other, to each other ; — meme, yourself, voyage, m., trip, travel, vbyager, to travel, voyageur, m., traveller, voyant, pres. part, of voir, voyelle, /., vowel, voyez, pres. indie, of voir, vrai, -e, true. vraiment, truly. vu, -e, past part, of voir. wagon lit, m., sleeping-car. Washington, prop. n. Xantippe, prop, n., wife of So- crates. y, there, in it, to it, to them; il — a, there is, there are. yeux, pi. of oeil, eyes. zele, m., zeal. zephir, m., west wind. II. ENGLISH-FRENCH Verbs marked with an * require the auxiliary Hre in their compound tenses. A.; see o'clock. a, un, -e. able; to be — , pouvoir, irr. about, de ; vers ; see hundred. acquainted; to be — with, con- naitre, irr. acquaintance, connaissance, f. acquire, acquerir, irr. actor, acteur, m. actress, act rice, f. add, a j outer. address, adresse, f. administrator, administrateur, m. admiral, amiral, m. admire, admirer. adorn with, orner de. advice, avis, m. advise, conseiller a (person) de (in fin.). after, prep., apres. after, conj., apres que (indie). afternoon, apres midi, m. or f. afterwards, ensuite. agree, etre (irr.) d'accord. aim, viser. air, air, m. » all, adj., tout, toute; plur. tous, toutes. all, pron., tout, m. almost, presque. along; see take, already, deja. 283 also, aussi. [subjunctive). although, quoique, bien que (with always, tou jours. ambassador, ambassadeur, m. ambassadress, ambassadrice, f. amiable, aimable. an, un, -e. and, et; see forth. animal, animal, m. anniversary, anniversaire, m. another, un autre ; see one. answer, repondre a. anteroom, antichambre, f. any, part, art., du, de la, de V, des ; de. any, adj., tout, quelque; (with neg.) aucun, nul, pas de. any, pron., quelqu'un, quelques uns ; en; (with neg.) nul, au- cun ; — one, quelqu'un ; (with neg.) personne. anybody, quelqu'un ; (with neg.) personne. anything, quelque chose; (with neg.) rien. appear, paraitre, irr. applaud, applaudir. apricot, m., abricot. apricot tree, m., abricotier. armchair, fauteuil, m. arrive, *arriver. artist, artiste, m. or f. as, comme ; — ... — , aussi . . . que; — soon — , aussitot que 284 BEGINNERS FRENCH (indie.) ; — soon — possible, le plus tot possible ; see much, many, same, so and usual. ask, demander a (person) de (infin.) ; — for, demander; — somebody a question, poser or adresser une question a quelqu'un. at, a; see last, once, present, school, the. attend, soigner. attention, attention, /. attentively, avec attention. attract, appeler. auditorium, salle, f. aunt, tante, f. automobile, automobile, /. avenue, avenue, /. avoid, eviter de (infin.). awake, s'eveiller. away; see carry, go and take. B back; see bring, come, give and bad, mauvais, -e. [go. badly, mal. ball, bal, m. basket, panier, w. be, etre, irr.; (weather) faire, irr.; there is or are, il y a ; (when pointing to) voila. beautiful, beau^ bel, belle. beautify, embellir. because, parce que (indicat.). become, *devenir, irr. ; — conva- lescent, entrer en convales- cence. bed, lit, m. ; bedroom, chambre (f.) a coucher; bedside rug, descente (f.) de lit; see flower and go. beer, biere, f. before, prep., avant (time) ; de- ' vant (place) ; avant de (i>e- fore infin.). before, conj., avant que (sub- junctive). begin, commencer a (infin.) ; se mettre (irr.) a (infin.). beginning, commencement, m. behavior, conduite, f. believes, croire, irr. bell, cloche, /.;. (small), son- nette, f. bench, banc, m. best, meilleur, -e, adj.; mieux, adv.; the — they can or could, de leur mieux. betake one's self, se rendre. better, meilleur, -e. adj.; mieux, adv.; be — , valoir (irr.) mieux. bicycle, bicyclette, /. bid one another good night, se dire (irr.) bonsoir. bird, oiseau, m. birth, naissance, f. birthday, anniversaire (w.) de biscuit, biscuit m. [naissance. black, noir, -e. blackboard, tableau, m. blanket, couverture, f. blind, store, m. blue, bleu, -e. blush for, rougir de. boarder, pensionnaire, m. or f. boarding house, pension, f. boat, bateau, m. bolster, traversin, m. book, livre, m. border, plate bande, f. boulevard, boulevard, m. box, boite, f. branch, branche, f. bread, pain. m. breakfast, dejeuner, m. breakfast, dejeuner. breathe, respirer. BEGINNER S FRENCH 285 bring, apporter; — (persons), amener ; to — back, rapporter. brother, frere, m. brown, brun, -e. brush, brosser. building, edifice, m. bureau, commode, f. burner; see gas. but, mais. butter, beurre, m. button, bouton, m. buy, acheter. by, par; see rail. cake, gateau, m. call, appeler. calm, calme. can, pouvoir, irr. candle; see wax. candy, bonbon, m. car window, portiere, /.; sleep- ing car, wagon lit, m. care, soin, m.; take — of, soi- gner; take — not to, prendre (irr.) garde de (infin.). carpet, tapis, m. carry away, emporter. celebrate, celebrer. century, siecle, m. ceremony, ceremonie, f. chair, chaise, f. charming, charmant, -e. cheap, bon marche. cheaper, meilleur marche. cheek, joue, f. cheerful, gai, -e. cheese, fromage, m. child, enfant, m. or f. chocolate, chocolat, m. choice, choix, m. choose, choisir. church, eglise, f. city, ville, f. class, classe, f.\ — room, classe, f.; salle, f. clean, propre. climate, climat, m. climb, monter. cloak, manteau, m. cloth; see table. clothes, vetements, m. pi. coachman, cocher, m. coffee, cafe, m. cold, froid, -e; be — {weather), faire {irr.) froid. color, couleur, f. come, *venir, irr.; — back, *re- venir, irr.; on coming back from, de retour de ; — down, descendre ; — home, *rentrer. comedy, comedie, f. comfortable, confortable, bon, -ne. comic, comique. confusion, confusion, f. congregation, auditoire, m. convalescent; see become. converse, s'entretenir, irr. counterpane, couvre pieds, m. country, campagne, f. cousin, cousin, m.; cousine, /. cover with, couvrir {irr.) de. cracker, bisctiit, m. cream, creme, f. criticise, critiquer. cross, traverser, franchir. cry, cri, m. cup, tasse, f. cure, guerir. curtain, rideau, m. dance, danser. dangerously, dangereusement. dark, noir, -e, obsciir. -e. 286 BEGINNER S FRENCH daughter, fille, f. day, jour, m.; good — , bonjour, in.; next — , lendemain. ul; two — s later, le surlende- main. dead, mort, -e. deal; a great — , beaucoup. dear, cher, chere. deceive one's self, se decevoir, irr. decide, resoudre {irr.) de (tn- fin.). deep, profond, -e. delicious, delicieu-x. -se. delight; with — , voluptueuse- ment; take — in, se plaire {irr.) a {in fin.). delightful, delicieu-x, -se. depart, *partir, irr.; s'en aller, irr. desire, desir, m. desire, desirer. desk, bureau, m.; pupitre, m. dessert, dessert, m. destination, destination, /. die, *mourir, irr. diligent, diligent, -e. dine, diner. dining room, salle (/.) a man- ger, dinner, diner, m. direct one's steps, se diriger, s'acheminer. directly, directement. disagreeable, desagreable. disobey, desobeir a. display, etalage, m. displeased; be very much — with, en vouloir {irr.) a. disturb, troubler. division, division, f. do, faire. irr.; see 86. I. doctor, docteur. m. door, porte, f. doubt, doute, w. down; sec come, go, lay and sit. dozen, douzaine, /.; sec half, draw, dessiner. dress or — up, s'habiller, se ve- tir, irr. dress, /., robe, drink, boire, irr. druggist, pharmacien, m.; to the — , chez le pharmacien. dry, sec, seche. during, pendant, duty, devoir, m. each, chaque ; — one, chacun, -e ; — other, Tun I'autre. ease, aise, /. eat, manger. educate, instruire, irr. effort, effort, m. eight, huit. eighty, quatre vingts; — one, quatre vingt un. elder son or brother, aine, w. electric, electrique.. elephant, elephant, m. eleventh, onzieme. end, fin, f. English, anglais, -e. enjoy {something), jouir de ; — {doing something) , s'amuser a {infin.) or se divertir a {in- fin.) ; — one's self, s'amuser, se divertir. enormous, enorme. enough, assez. enter, *entrer dans, entrance, entree, f. equipage, equipage, nt. essential, essentiel, -le. evening, soir, m.; good — , bon- soir, m.; — reception, soiree, /. event, evenement, m. BEGINNERS FRENCH 287 ever, jamais. every, chaque, tout; — three hours, toutes les trois heures. everybody, tout le monde. everything, tout, m. examine, examiner. excellent, excellent, -e. except, excepte. exemplary, exemplaire. exercise, exercice, m.; written — , devoir, m. expensive, cher, chere. experience, experience, f. expression, expression, f. exquisite, exquis, -e. extend, tendre. extinguish, eteindre, irr. eye, oeil, m.; — s, yeux, m. pi. F face, visage, m. fail, manquer de iinfin.). fair, blond, -e. faithful, fidele, m. [mir, irr. fall, *tomber; — asleep, s'endor- family, famille, /.; see head. famous, c61ebre, fameu-x, -se. far, loin; — from, loin de. favorite, favori, -te. fear, crainte, /. [peur. fear, craindre, irr.; avoir {irr.) feast, fdte, /.; to have a — of, se regaler de. feel, sentir, irr.; {pulse) tater. ferocious, f6roce. fervor, ferveur, /. few, peu de; a — , quelques, adj.; quelques-uns, pron. . fewer, moins de. fifth, cinquieme. fifty, cinquante. fig, figue, /. figure; with small (large) — s, i petites (grandes) fleurs. et cetera, et filled with, plein(e) de. find, trouver. fine, beau, bel, belle. finish, finir. first, premi-er, -ere. fish, poisson, m. flag, drapeau, m. flat, plat, -e. flower, f leur, /. ; — bed, parterre, m. follow, suivre, irr. following, suivant, -e. for, prep., pour; {during) pen- dant; — instance, par exemple; — rent, a louer ; — sale, a ven- dre. for, conj., car. forbid, defendre a {person) de {in fin.). form, former. forth; and so - ainsi de suite. forty, quarante. four, quatre. fourteen, quatorze. freeze, geler. fresh, frais, fraiche. friend, ami, m.; amie, f. from, de ; — the, du, de la, de 1', des; — the beginning, depuis le commencement. front; in — of, devant. fruit, fruit, m. fulfil, remplir. full, plein, -e; see ring, furniture; see piece. game, jeu, m. garden, jardin, m. gas burner, bee (m.) de gaz. gather, cueillir, irr. general, general, m. generally, generalement. 288 BEGINNER S FRENCH gentleman, monsieur, m.; gen- tlemen, messieurs, m. pi get up, se lever. girl, fille, /. give, donner ; — back, rendre. glass, verre, m. gloomy, triste. go, *aller, irr.; — away, s'en aller, irr; *partir, irr.; — back to, retourner a, *rentrer a ; — down, descendre; — home, *rentrer, retourner a la mai- son (chez soi) ; — out, *sor- tir; — to bed, se coucher; — up, monter. God, Dieu, m. good, bon, -ne. grand, grand, -e. grape, raisin, m. gratitude, gratitude, f. gray, gris, -e. great, grand, -e. green, vert, -e. greet, saluer. grope one's way, s'avancer a ta- lons. gropingly, a tatons. ground, terre, f. grove, bosquet, m. grow, grandir. guess, deviner. guest, invite, rn.; invitee, f. hair, cheveux, m. pi. half, demi, -e ; — a dozen, une demi douzaine. hand, main, f. hand, remettre, irr. [tapisser de. hang from, pendre a; — with, happy, heureu-x, -se. hasten, se hater de (infin.). hastily, a la hate. hat, chapeau, m. hate, hair. have, avoir, irr.; to — (some- thing) prepared, faire prepa- rer; to — (with past part, of intrans. verbs of motion), etre, irr. he, il, lui. head of a family, pere (;».) de famille. health; to be in good — , se por- ter bien. hear, entendre. heart, coeur, m.; by — , par coeur. help, aider. her, pron., elle, la, lui. her, poss. adj., son, sa, ses. here, ici ; — is or are, voici. hers, le sien, la sienne, les siens. les siennes. high, haut, -e. him, le, lui. his, poss. adj., son, sa, ses. his, poss. pron., le sien, la sienne, les siens, les siennes. hold out, tendre. home, chez moi (toi, soi, lui, elle, nous, vous, eux, elles) ; a la maison ; see go. horse-shoer, marechal, m. host, bote, m. hostess, hotesse, f. hotel, hotel, w. hour, heure, f.; every three — s, toutes les trois heures ; one or two — s, une ou deux heures or une heure ou deux. house, maison, f.; at, to or in my (your, etc.) — , chez moi (toi, soi, lui, elle, nous, vous, eux, elles) ; at, to, in the — of, chez le, la, 1', les. how, comment ; — much, — many, combien de ; — is the weather? quel temps fait il? however, cependant BEGINNERS FRENCH 289 hundred, adj., cent. hundred, n., centaine; about one — , une centaine. hungry; to be — f avoir {irr.) faim. I, je, moi. ideal, ideal, -e. if, si. ill, malade. immediately, immediatement. immense, immense. impatiently, impatiemment. improvement, perfectionnement, m. in, dans, en ; — winter, en hiver ; — front of, devant. industrious, diligent, -e. inflict upon, infliger a {person). inhabitant, habitant, m. inkstand, encrier, m. instance; for — , par exemple. instrument, instrument, m. interesting, interessant, -e. interval, intervalle, m. into, dans, introduce, introduire, irr.; {to another person) presenter. invite, inviter. it, il, elle, le, la, ce, cela. its, adj., son, sa, ses ; en . . . le, la, les. jewel, bijou, m. joyful, joyeu-x, -se. keep, garder. key, cle, f. kind, aimable, bon, -ne. kind, sorte, f. kindness, bonte, /. knife, couteau, m. knob, bouton, m. know thoroughly, savoir, irr.; to — a little, connaitre, irr. knowledge, connaissance, f. lace, dentelle, /".; — curtain, ri- deau (m.) de dentelle. lack, manquer de. lady, dame, f.; young — , de- moiselle, f.; ladies and gen- tlemen, mesdames et messieurs. lake, lac, m. lamp, lampe, f. landing, palier, m. lane, allee, f. large, grand, -e; nombreu-x, -se. last; at — , en fin. late, tard; en retard {person.)-, two days later, le surlende- main. laugh at, rire {irr.) de. lawn, pelouse, /. lay down, deposer. lead, mener. leaf, feuille, f. left, gauche, /.; see side. leisurely, a mon (ton, son, notre, votre, leur) aise, f. lemonade, limonade, f. less, moins de {noun). lesson, legon, f. lest, de peur que, de crainte que {subjunctive) . let, louer; to — , a louer. library, bibliotheque, f. light, lumiere, /. light, allumer ; to — up, eclairer. like, aimer, cherir. lion, Hon, m. listen to, ecouter. little, adj., petit, -e. little, adv., peu de. 290 BEGINNER S FRENCH live, demeurer. lock, serrure, f. lock; sec shut. [plus. long, long, -ue ; no — er, ne . . . look, regarder; to — at, regar- der ; to — out of, regarder par. lose, perdre. M.; see o'clock. Madam, Madame. magnificent, magnifique. maid, servante, f. make, faire, irr.; to — use of, se servir {irr.) de. man, homme, m. manner, maniere, f. many, beaucoiip de ; as — ... as, autant de {noun) que; how — , combien de {noun) ; so — ...as, tant de {noun) que; too — , trop de {noun). map, carte, /. marquis, marquis, m. master, maitre, m.; — piece, chef (m.) d'oeuvre. match, allumette, /. mattress, matelas, m. may, pouvoir, irr. me, me, moi. meal, repas, m. meat, viande, f. medicine, medicament, m. meet, rencontrer. melodrama, melodrame, m. member, membre, m. menagerie, menagerie, f. merry, gai, -e. mild, clement, -e. milk, lait, in. mine, le mien, la mienne, les miens, les miennes. minister, ministre. tn. minute, minute, f. mistress, maitresse, f. modem, moderne. Monday, lundi, m. monkey, singe, m. month, mois, m. more, plus de {noun) ; no — , ne . . . plus ; — and — , de plus en plus. morning, matin, vi.; good — , bon- most, plus. [jour, m. mother, mere. f. much, beaucoup de {noun) ; as — ... as, autant de ( noun ) que ; 80 — ...as, tant de {noun) que; how — , combien de {noun) ; too — ,trop de(noMn). mud, boue, f. music, musique, f. muslin, mousseline, f.; — cur- tain, rideau (m.) de mousse- line. must, devoir, irr.; falloir, irr., impers. mustard, moutarde, /. mute, muet, -te. my, mon, ma, mes. napkin, serviette, f. narrow, etroit, -e. nature, nature, f. near, pres de. necessary; to be — , falloir, irr., impers. need, besoin, m.; to be in — of, avoir {irr.) besoin de. need, avoir {irr.) besoin de. neighbor, voisin. m.; voisine, f. neighborhood, voisinage, m. nephew, neveu, m. never, ne . . . jamais. newspaper, journal, m. next day, lendemain, m. niece, niece, f. [m. night, nuit, f.; good — , bonsoir, BEGINNER S FRENCH 291 ninety, quatre vingt dix ; — one, quatre viiigt onzc. ninth, neuvieme. no, ne . . . pas de, aucun . . . ne, ne . . . aucun ; nul . . . ne, ne . . . nul ; — more, ne . . . plus. no, non. nobody, personne, m. (with noiselessly, doucement. [neg.). none, nul . . . ne, aucun . . . ne^ ne . . . aucun ; n'en . . . pas, nor, ni; (a//^r prendre garde) ou. not, ne . . . pas ; — a, — any, ne . . . pas de ; ne . . . aucun. notebook, cahier, m. nothing, rien , . . ne, ne , . . rien, notice, remarquer, apercevoir, novel, roman. m. [irr. numerous, nombreu-x, -se. nurse, garde malade, m. or f. obey, obeir a. obscure, obscur, -e. occupy, occuper. o'clock, heure, /.; two — A.M., deux heures du matin ; six — P. M., six heures du soir. of, de; — the, du, de la, de 1', des ; — it, — them, en. office; ticket — , guichet, m. oil, huile, f. olive, olive, f. on, sur; omitted before dates. once; at — , aussitot, tout de suite. one, adj., un, -e ; — or two hours, une heure ou deux or une ou deux heures. one, pron., on; — 's self, se; — another, se, se...run I'au- tre; the — , celui, celle ; the — s, ceux, celles : this — , ce- lui ci, celle ci ; that — , celui la, celle la. only, ne . . . que. open, ouvrir, irr. opera, opera, m. opposite, en face de. or, ou. order, ordre, m.; in — that, pour que, afin que {suhjunct.) organ, orgue, m. organist, organiste, m. other, autre; some... or — , un . . . quelconque. ought, devoir, irr. our, notre, nos. ours, le notre, la notre, les no- out of, par. ' [tres. over; to be — , etre {irr.) fini, -e. overcoat, pardessus, m. pale, pale. paper, papiet, m. parent, parent, m. park, pare, m. parlor, salon, m. part, partie, f. party; evening — , soiree, /., pass, passer. passenger, voyageur, m. path; side — , contre-allee, f. peal, volee, f.; see ring. pen, plume, f. pencil, crayon, m. people, on, m.; young — , jeunes gens, m. pi. pepper, poivre, m. perceive, apercevoir, irr. performance, representation, f. perfume, parfum, m. permission, permission, f. person, personne, f.; — s pres- ent, assistants, w. pi. physician, medecin, m. piano, piano, m. pick, cueillir, irr. piece, morceau, m.; — of fur- niture, meuble, m. 292 BEGINNERS FRENCH pill, pilule, f. pillow, oreiller, w. pity, pitie, /.; to have — on, avoir (»Vr.) pitie de. pity, avoir (»Vr.) pitie de. place, placer, plate, assiette, f. plateful, assiettee, /. play, piece, f, play, jouer; {instrument) joiiei de; playground, preau, m. pleasant, charmant, agreable. please, plaire {irr.) a. pleased, content (e) de (infin.) ; — with, satisfait(e) de. pleasure, plaisir, m. pocket, poche, /. poor, pauvre ; mauvais, -e. possible, possible; it is — , il se peut. pound, livre, f. pour, verser. practice, pratique, f. pray, prier. precise, precis, -e. prefer, preferer. preferable, preferable. prepare, preparer; to have (something) prepared, faire (irr.) preparer. prescribe, ordonner. prescription, prescription, f. present; to be — at, assister a. present, presenter, press, presser. pretty, joli, -e. princess, princesse, f. probably, probablement. progress, progres. m. proper; be — , convenir, irr. provide with, pourvoir (irr.) de. public, public, m. puU down, baisser. pulse, pouls, m. punish, punir. punishment, punition, f. pupil, eleve, m. or f. put, placer; mettre, irr.; to — on, mettre, irr. quality, qualite, f. quarter, quart, m.; a — of an hour, un quart d'heure. question, question, /. quick, rapide. quickly, rapi dement quiet, calme. radish, radis, m. rail; by — , en chemin de fer. railroad, chemin de fer, m. rain, pleuvoir, irr. raise, lever. rap, coup, m. rapid, rapide. rapidly, rapidement. rare, rare. rather, plutot. reach, parvenir (irr.) a; attein- dre, irr. read, lire, irr. receive, recevoir, irr.; to — a punishment, subir une puni- tion. reception; evening — , soiree, f. recommend, recommandcr de (infin.). red, rouge. reflect upon, reflechir a. refuse, refuser. reign, regner. rejoice, (somebody) rejouir; (doing something) se rejouir de (infin.). relative, parent, m. remain, *rester. rent, louer ; for — , a louer. BEGINNERS FRENCH 293 repass, repasser. repeat, repeter. reply, repondre, repliquer. represent, representer. reputation, reputation, f. require, exiger. reside, demeurer. respective, respecti-f, -ve. rest, repos, m. rest, se reposer. restaurant, restaurant, w. return, {give back) rendre; {go back) retourner; on returning from, de retour de. revive, revivre, irr. right, droite, f.; on the — , de droite; see side, ring, sonner; to — a full peal, sonner a toute volee. ripe, mur, -e. road, route, f. room, chambre, f. rosy, rose, round, rond, -e. rug; see bedside. S sad, triste. sale; for — , a vendre. salt, sel, m. same, meme. Saturday, samedi, m. say, dire, irr. scenery, decors, m. pi. [en classe. school, ecole, /.; at — , a I'ecole, schoolmaster, instituteur, m. schoolmistress, institutrice, f. scold, gronder. scratch, frotter. sculptor, sculpteur, m. season, saison, f. seat, place, f. seated, assis, -e. second, seconde, f. see, apercevoir, irr.; voir, irr. seem, sembler; paraitre, irr.; to — to be, paraitre, irr. seldom, rarement. sell, vendre. [{irr.) venir. send, envoyer, irr.; — for, faire sermon, sermon, m. service, service, m. set, se coucher. seven, sept, seventy, soixante dix. several, plusieurs. shade, ombre, /.; {blind) store, she, elle. [m. sheet, drap, m. short, court, -e. show, montrer. show window, etalage, m. shut one's self in by locking the door, s'enfermer a double ^ tour, side, cote m.; — path, contre-al- lee, f. ; on the right — , de droit ; on the left — , de gauche. sidewalk, trottoir, m. silence, silence, m. silent; to be — , se taire, irr. since, depuis. sing, chanter, sir, monsieur. sister, soeur, f. sit down, s'asseoir, irr. six, six. sixteen, seize, sixth, sixieme. sixty, soixante. skilful, habile, sleep, dormir, irr. sleeping car, wagon lit, m. sleepy; to be — , avoir (irr.) slowly, lentement. [sommeil. small, petit, -e. smiling, souriant, -e. snake, serpent, m. snow, neige, f. so, si ; — much as, — many as, tant de {noun) que. 294 BEGINNERS FRENCH soil, salir. some, part, art, du, de la, de V, des ; quelque, certain ; — ... or other, un . . . quelconque. some, pron., quelques uns ; en. somebody, quelqu'un. something, quelque chose, m. sometimes, quelquefois, parfois; — ...» — . . ., tantot . . ., tan- son, fils, m. [tot . . . song, chant, tn. soon, bientot; — er, plus tot; as — as possible, le plus tot pos- sible; as — as, aussitot que {indie). sorry, triste. sort, sorte, f. sound, son, m. soundly, profondement ; to sleep — , dormir {irr.) sur les deux oreilles. space, espace, m. speak, parler. spectacle, theatre, m. spend, passer. spoonful, cuilleree, f. stage, scene, /. staircase, escalier, m. stairs, escalier, m. standing, debout {adv.). start to work, se mettre {irr.) au travail. statue, statue, /. stay, *rester. steal, derober. still, encore. stop, s'arreter. store, magasin. m. stove, fourneau, m. stranger, etranger, m. strawberry, f raise, f. street, rue, /.; {causeway) ch2i\is- strike, f rotter. [see, /. strip, depouiller. studious, studieu-x, -se. ♦ subject, sujet, m. succeed, reussir. such, tel, -le. suffer, souffrir, irr. summer, ete, m. sun, soleil, m. Sunday, {last or next) dimanche, m.; {every) le dimanche. superb, superbe. supper; to take — , souper. sure, siir, -e. sweet, dou-x, -ce. table, table, f.; — cloth, nappe, take, prendre, irr.; (o person) mener; {drink) boire, irr.; {s-djalloiv) avaler ; to — away, emporter ; {steal) enlever; to — along, emmener; to — care of, soigner; to — care not to, prendre {irr.) garde de (m- fin.) ; to — delight in, se plaire a {in fin.) : to — off one's hat, se decouvrir. irr.; to — out, tirer; to — supper, , souper ; to — a walk, se pro- mener, faire {irr.) une pro- menade. talk, parler. tall, grand, -e. tarry, s'attarder a {infin.). tea, the, m. teach, instruire. irr. teacher, maitre, m. tell, dire, irr. ten, dix. than, que. thank for, remercier de. that, dem. adj., ce, cet, cette; ce ... la, cet . . . la. cette ... la. that or — one, dem. pron., celui, celle ; celui la. celle la ; cela ; ce. that, relat. pron., qui, que. BEGINNERS FRENCH 295 that, conj., que. the, le, la, 1', les; — one, celui, celle; — ones, ceux, celles. theater, theatre, m. their, leur, leurs. theirs, le leur, la leur, les leurs; en . . . le, la, 1', les. them, les, leur, eux, elles. then, alors; puis. there, la, y ; — is or are, il y a ; {when pointing to) voila. these, dem. adj., ces ; ces . . . ci. these, de7n. pr., ceux, celles ; ceux ci, celles ci. they, ils, eux, elles. ^hink, penser. thirsty; to be — , avoir (irr.) thirteen, treize. [soif. thirty, trente. this, dem. adj., ce, cet, cette; ce . ; . ci, cet . . . ci, cette . . . ci. this or — one, dem. pron., celuT, celle ; celui ci, celle ci ; ceci ; ce. those, dem. adj., ces ; ces . . . la. those, dem. pr., ceux, celles; ceux la, celles la. thousand, mille. threatening, incertain, -e. three, trois. through, par. ticket, billet, m.; — office, gui- chet, m. tiger, tigre, m. time, temps, m.; {o'clock) heure, f.; meal — , I'heure du repas; what — is it? quelle heure est il? tired, fatigue, -e. to, a, de; — the, au, a la, a 1', aux; — the end, jusqu'a la fin ; see house, tongue, langue, f. too, trop; — much, — many, trop de {noun). top, haut, m. towards, vers. towel, serviette de toilette, /.; es- suie mains, m. tower, tour, /. toy, joujou, m. tragedy, tragedie, /. travel, voyager, traveller, voyageur, m. tree, arbre, m. trip, voyage, m. trouble, peine, f.; see worth, try, essayer de {infin.). Tuesday, mardi, m. turn, tourner. twelve, douze. twenty, vingt. two, deux. ugly, vilain, -e. umbrella, parapluie, m. uncle, oncle, m. undress, se ddshabiller. unless, k moins que {subjunc- until, jusqu'k. \tive). us, nous. use; to make — of, se servir {irr.) de. useless, inutile, usher, ouvreuse,/. usual, accoutum^, -e; as — , comme de coutume. usually, gdndralement, de cou- utter, Jeter. [tume. vast, vaste. vaudeville, vaudeville, m» vegetable, legume, m, very, tres, bien. • village, village, m. violin, violon, m. visit, visite, f. 296 BEGINNER S FRENCH W wait, attendre ; — for, attendre. waiter, garden, m. walk, promenade, f. walk, marcher. wall, mur, w. want, vouloir, irr. wash, laver. washstand, lavabo, in.' water, eau, f. wax candle, bougie, f. way, chemin, m.; on the — , en route. we, nous. weather, temps, m.; how is the — ? quel temps fait il? week, semaine, /. weep, pleurer. well, bien. what, interr. adj., quel, -le? what, interr. pron., qu'est ce qui? qu'est ce que? que? quoi? le- quel? laquelle? etc. what, relat. pron., ce qui, ce que. when, quand, lorsque. whenever, quand, lorsque. where, ou. which, interr. adj., quel, -le. which, interr. pron., qui? que? lequel? laquelle? etc.; of — ? duquel? etc. which, relat. pron., qui, que; of — , duquel, etc.; dont. while, en (pres. partic.). white, blanc, -he. who, qui, qui est ce qui? whoever, quiconque. whole, tout; the — garden, tout le jardin. whom, interr. pron., qui? qui est ce que? whom, relat. pron., que. whose, de qui, duquel, dont; — toy is this, a qui est ce jou- why, pourquoL wide, large. wild, sauvage. wind, vent, m. window, fenetre, f.; (shop) vi- trine, f.; sec show and car. windy; to be — (impersonal), faire (irr.) du vent wine, vin, m. winter, hiver, m. wish, desir, m. wish, desirer, vouloir, irr, with. avec. within, en. without, sans. work, travail, m. « work, travailler. worth ; to be — , valoir, irr.; to be — tiie trouble or the while, en valoir (irr.) la peine; that is — looking at, cela vaut la peine d'etre regarde. write, ecrire, irr. year, annee, f. yellow, jaune. yes, oui; (after negat question) sL yet, encore. yield, ceder. you, tu, toi, te, vous. young, jeune; — lady, demoi- selle, /. younger eon or brother, cadet, m. your, ton, ta, tes; votre, vos. yours, le tien, la tienne, les tiens, les tiennes; le votre, la votre, les votres. yourselves, vous. zeal, zele, m. INDEX Numbere refer to paragraphs unless preceded by p. = page. k: contraction with the definite article, 97; before infinitives after certain verbs, 384; — moins que, 444. s, 452- accent, p. 13; tonic accent, p. 18. acquerir, 470. active voice replacing English passive voice, 267, 346. adjectives: agreement, 28, 163. i and 2; feminine: general rule, 29; exceptions, 29. i and 2, 38 note, 148, 161, 171. 2, 172; plural: general rule, 30; ex- ceptions, 147, 170. 2, 171. i; comparison, 38; position, 149, 160; demonstrative, 41, 116; ♦ indefinite, 264; interrogative, 230. i; numeral: cardinal, 75; ordinal, 76; possessive, 40, 367; replaced by the definite article, 432; replaced by en and the definite article, 367. 2; super- lative, 39. adverbs: formation, 118. i, 130; position, 118. 2, 433; compari- son, 118. I. afin que, 444. 5. after, see apres. agreement, see adjectives and participle. aller, 306, 324, p. 256. anterior, see past. any, see partitive under article, and en. apostrophe, p. 13. aprSs, 392. article: definite, i. 2, 2. i, 9; contraction with i, 97; with de, 48; generic, p. 80 footnote; indefinite, 62; partitive, 63, 137, 150, 162, 308. i; replacing possessive adjective, 367, 432, aspirate h, p. 16. asseoir, 366. atteindre, 408. auxiliary verbs, see dtre, avoir, do, and verbs. avant que, 444. 5. avoir: conjugation, p. 251; past participle conjugated with avoir, 243, 288. B bel for beau, 147. 2. bien que, 444. 5. boire, 393, p. 256. by, 392. C cardinal numbers, 75. ce: demonstrative adjective, 41; demonstrative pronoun, 221, 251, 252, 253; C*est, 221. ceci, 251. cedilla, p. 14. cela, 251. celui, celle, ceux, celles, 220. -cer, verbs ending in, 139. cet, cette, 41. ci, 116, 220. I note. comparison, 38. compound: nouns, 375; tenses, 297 298 p. 138 footnote, 235, 305; vowels, p. 15. conditional, 201, p. 137 footnote, p. 255- conjugation: regular verbs, p. 255; irregular verbs, pp. 251-254, pp. 256-259. conjunctions: quand, 262, 347; lorsque, 347; si, 261; requiring the subjunctive, 444. 5. connaitre, 470, p. 257. consonants, p. 16, 75 note i; final, p. 17. construction: interrogative, 19, 20, 21, 31, 52, 119. i; negative, 18, 21,64,119,265,452. contraction, 48, 97. convenir, 461. couvrir, 307, p. 257. craindre, 385, p. 257; followed by the subjunctive, 452. CTainte: de — que, 444. 5, 452. croire, 470, p. 257. cueillir, 287, p. 257. de: contraction, 48; partitive, 63, T-n, 150. 162, 308. i; trans- lating with, 308. 2 ; translating in after a supyerlative, 222; after adverbs of quantity, 181; after nouns of quantity and measure, 191; after rien, quelque chose, 266. decouvrir, 461. definite, see article and preterit. demi, 207. demonstrative, see adjectives and pronouns. derived tenses, p. 137 footnote, p. 138 footnote. diaeresis, p. 14. diphthongs, p. 15. dire, 377, p. 257. division into syllables, p. 18. do, 86. 1. beginner's FRENCH dont, 232, 252. dormir, 416, p. 257. E e: mute or silent, p. 14; final e replaced by e, 86. 2; change of e before last syllable of infinitive' 193, 204. I. e, change of e before last syllable of infinitive, 192, 203. each other, 424. ecrire, 445, p. 257. -eler, verbs ending in, 194, 204. 2, 205. 2. elision, 9, 18, 48. 3, 64, 65, 221, 347-' en: pronominal adverb, 182, 288, 367; position, 286; preposition, 392. endings of regular verbs, p. 255. envoyer, 297, p. 257. est ce que, 52. gteindre, 416, p. 257 footnote i. -eter, verbs ending in, 194, 204. 3, 205. I. etre, p. 253; used for avoir, 306; with reflexive verbs, 364. -evoir, verbs ending in, see rece- voir, p. 258. faire, 307, p. 257. falloir, 316, p. 257. fear: verbs of fear requiring the subjunctive, 444. 3, 452. feeling: verbs of feeling requiring the subjimctive, 444. 3. feminine, see gender and adjec- tives. final consonants, p. 17. formation of tenses, p. 137 foot- note, p. 138 footnote. future, 201, p. 137 footnote, p. 138 footnote, p. 255. beginner's FRENCH 299 G gender, i. generic article, p. 80 footnote, -ger, verbs ending in, 138. graphic signs, p. 13. h: aspirate, p. 16; mute, p. 16. hair, 316. he is, 221. hope, see feeling, hyphen, p. 13, 66. I if, 261. imperative: p. 138 footnote, p. 255; position of personal pronouns with, 296. imperfect: indicative, p. 137 foot- note, p. 255; subjunctive, p. 138 footnote, p. 255. impersonal verbs, 444. i. in, 392; after superlatives, 222, indefinite, see adjectives, article, and pronouns. indicative, p. 137 footnote, p. 138 footnote, p. 255. infinitive, p. 137 footnote, p. 255; without preposition, 384; with kj de, 384; replacing present participle, 376, 392. instruire, 461. interrogative, see adjectives, con- struction, pronouns, and verbs. introduire, 408. irregular verbs, pp. 251-254, pp. 256-259. it: as subject, 10; it is, 221, 323; as object, 277, 286, 296. its, 367. L U, 116, 220. I note, liaison, p. 17. linking of words, p. 17. lire, 400, p. 257. Ton, 267. lorsque, 347. M madame, p. 95 footnote, mademoiselle, p. 95 footnote, masculine, i. mettre, 324, p. 258. moins: a — que, 444. 5, 452. monsieur, p. 95 footnote. mourir, 453, p. 258. mute or silent e, p. 14; mute h, p. 16. N nasal sounds, p. 15. ne, 18, 21, 64, 119, 265, 452. negation or negative construction, 18, 21, 64, 119, 265, 452. negative verbs requiring the sub- junctive, 444. 2. no, not, not a, not any, 18, 64, 264. nouns: gender, i; number: gen- eral rule, 2. 2; exceptions, 49- 51, 88, 96, 170. I, 183; com- pound, 375. number: of adjectives: general rule, 30; exceptions, 147, 170. 2, 171. i; of nouns: general rule, 2. 2; exceptions, 49-51, 88, 96, 170. I, 183; of compound nouns, 375. numeral adjectives, 75, 76. object, see personal under pro- nouns. -oir, verbs ending in, 152, p. 251, pp. 256-259. on, 267. on, 206, 392. one another, 424. only, 65. ordinal' numbers, 76. orthographic peculiarities of verbs of the first conjugation, 138, 300 beginner's FRENCH 139, 192, 193, 194, 203, 204, 205, 263. oui, 119. 2. ouvrir, 40x5, p. 258. paraitre, 461, p. 258. participle: present, p. 137 foot- note, p. 138 footnote; replaced by the infinitive in French, 376, 392; past, 234; agreement, 243, 288, 306, 364, 415. partir, 316, p. 258. partitive, see article. passive, see voice. past: anterior, footnote p. 179, p. 251, p. 253; definite, see preterit; and see participle. jersonal, see pronouns. peur: de — que, 444. 5, 452. plaire, 348, p. 258. pleuvoir, 307, p. 258. pluperfect, see compound under tenses. plural, see number. position, see adjectives, adverbs, pronouns. possessive, see adjectives and pro- nouns. pour que, 444. 5. pourvoir, 416, p. 258. pouvoir, 393, p. 258. prendre, 339, p. 258. prepositions, see H, apr^s, de, en, by, in, with. present: indicative, p. 255, p. 137 footnote, p. 138 footnote; par- ticiple, p. 137 footnote, p. 138 footnote, 376, 392; subjunctive, p. 255, p. 137 footnote, p. 138 footnote. preterit or past definite, p. 255, p. 137 footnote, p. 138 footnote. primitive tenses or principal parts, p. 137 footnote, p. 138 footnote. pronouns: demonstrative, 220, 221, 251; indefinite, 264, 265; interrogative, 223, 230. 2, 3, and 4, 233; personal, 277, 315; position, 277, 286, 296, 315; possessive, 242; relative, 220. 2, 231, 232, 252. pronunciation, pp. 13-18. quand, 262, 347. que: conjunction that, 444. 5; as or than, 38; relative or interrogative pronoun, see pro- nouns. questions, see construction. quoique, 444. 5. R recevoir, 152, 153, p. 258. reciprocal verbs, 424. reflexive verbs, 355, 356, 364, 365, 432. regular verbs, 84, p. 255. relative, see pronouns. resoudre, 377, p. 259. rirCf 453, P- 259. S que, 444. 5. savoir, 470, p. 259. sentir, 366, p. 259. sequence of tenses, 469. servir, 434, p. 259. she is, 221. si: if, 261; yes, 53. simple tenses, p. 255. simple vowels, p. 14. some, see partitive under article, indefinite under adjectives, and en. sortir, 357, p. 259. souffrir, 445, p. 259. sounds, nasal, p. 15. BEGINNER S FRENCH 301 subjunctive: tenses, p. 137 foot- note, p. 138 footnote, 442, 443, 468, p. 25s; uses, 444, 452. superlative: adjectives, 39; ad- verbs, 118. i; followed by sub- junctive, 444. 4. syllabication, p. 18. -t-, when inserted, 66. taire, 461, p. 259. tenir, 393, p. 259. tenses: simple, p. 255; compound, p. 138 footnote, 235, 305; forma- tion, p. 137 footnote, p. 138 footnote; conjugation, pp. 251- 255; sequence, 469. they are, 221. time of day, 323. tonic accent, p. 18. tu, p. 23 footnote. valoir, 377, p. 259. venir, 366, p. 259. verbs: regular, p. 255; irregular, pp. 251-254, pp. 256-259; auxiliary, pp. 251-254; do, 86. i; impersonal, 444. i; interrogative or negative fol- lowed by subjunctive, 444. 2; reflexive, 355, 356, 364, 365, 432; reciprocal, 424; -cer, 139; change of 6 before last syllable of infinitive, 192, 203; change of e before last syllable of infinitive, 193, 204. i; -eler, 194, 204. 2, 205. 2; -eter, 194, 204. 3, 205. i; -evoir, see recevoir, p. 258; -ger, 138; -oir, 152, p. 251, pp. 256-259; -yer, 263. vfitir, 434, p. 259. vivre, 453, p. 259. voice: active replacing passive, 267, 346; passive, 305, 306. voir, 331, P- 259- vouloir, 445, p. 259. vowels: simple, p. 14; compound, p. 15. W while, 392. wiU: verbs of will followed by subjunctive, 444. 3. with, 308. 2. Y y, 278, 286, 298. -yer, verbs ending in, 263. yes, 53, 119. 2. THIS BOOK IS DUE ON THE LAST DATE STAMPED BELOW AN INITIAL FINE OF 25 CENTS WILL BE ASSESSED FOR FAILURE TO RETURN THIS BOOK ON THE DATE DUE. THE PENALTY WILL INCREASE TO 50 CENTS ON THE FOURTH DAY AND TO $1.00 ON THE SEVENTH DAY OVERDUE. DEC Ik iS^a ]9Jun'57BJ FE B 23 1 9 44 REC'D LD JU.Ni7Wb/ FEB 10 1948 T.fvy 3Nov*50C:^ TiE^^ ^L )up\2'5V>b JUN 1 1 iflfin ^^^?5IE,^ )J»pr'5 4 HH ^Cf 2 9 ioor IBflSS 1954 il rv:R 'r})^ i; 6 l95Si. § LD21-100m-7,'39<40' YB 01366 \ /^ ^•'^ t^L -V /. \ «* '-'^'^?90£5 UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY